Você está na página 1de 241

E

p- 6 3 8 0 0
December 1985

Report EP-63800

MANUAL

FOR WELLSITE

STRA TIGRAPHERS

BY

P.C.J. HOOGKAMER (SIPM-EP/12.1)

This document is confidential. Neither the whole nor any part of this document may be disclosed to any third party without the prior written consent of
Shellinternationale The copyright document
prior written

Petroleum

Maatschappij
is vested

B.V.,

The Hague,

the Netherlands.
Maatschappij B.V., The Hague, the Netherlands. All rights reserved. Neither the whole nor any

of this document consent

in Shelllntemationale retrieval

Petroleum or transmitted

may be reproduced,
of the

stored in any
copyright

system

in any form or by any means

(electronic,

mechanical,

reprographic,

recording

or otherwise)

part of this without the

owner.

SHELL INTERNATIONALE PETROLEUM MAATSCHAPPIJ B.V., THE HAGUE


EXPLORATION AND PRODUCTION

Report

EP-63800

December 1985

MANUAL

FOR WELLSITE

STRATIGRAPHERS

BY

P.J.C.

HOOGKAMER

(SIPM-EP /121)

Contents

Page
INTRODUCTION PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTABILITIES

1 3

1.

PREPARATION 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1. 7 1.8 1. 9 1.10

FOR WELLSITE

DUTIES

4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 9 10 11 11 12 12 12 12 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 16 18 18 18 19 19

General Well proposal Drilling programme Stratigraphical reference collection EP/11 / OPCO's requirements and lines Responsibilities at the we11site Safety Laboratory equipment Rig jargon Mental preparation

of communication

2.

ROCK

SAMPLE

HANDLING

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6

General' Cuttings Sidewall samples (SWS) Cores Bit-, Logging too1-, JunksubCore slices from the MCT

and Junkbasket

samples

3.

STRATIGRAPHIC

INVESTIGATION

& REPORTING

AT THE WELLSITE

3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.2.1 3.2.2.2 3.2.2.3 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.4.1 3.2.4.2 3.2.4.3 3.2.4.4 3.2.4.5 3.2.4.6 3.3

General
Investigation Lithology Biostratigraphy Palaeontology Palynology Nannoplankton Environment of deposition Wire1ine logs

General
Lithology from wire1ine logs Environment of deposition from wire1ine logs Structural geological data from wire1ine logs Porosity and Permeability from wireline logs Source Rocks from wire1ine logs Reporting

II

4.

SPECIAL INVESTIGATIONS

Page 20
20 20 21

4.1 4.2 4.3

General
Biostratigraphic investigations by SIPM EP/121 Source rock investigations by KSEPL

5.

TEAM

WORK

22

5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.3 6.

General
Assistance to the Petroleum Hydrocarbon detection Wire line logging Assistance to the mudlogger

Engineer (PE)

22 22 22 22 22

FINAL WELL REPORT (WELL RESUHE)

23 23 23 23 23 24 24 24 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 27 27 27 27 28

6.1

6.2 6.3

General Timing
Contents Geological summary Well prognosis Stratigraphy Structural results Petrophysical evaluation of potential reservoirs Source rock potential Conclusions and recommendations Appendices (/Textfigures) and Enclosures Appendices Stratigraphical summary table Time-stratigraphical subdivision Core description Sidewall sample description Enclosures Well summary data sheet Well completion log Master log (or drilling speed log) Stratigraphical data sheet Geophysical well data sheet/T-Z Graph Well correlation

6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.1.1 6.4.1.2 6.4.1.3 6.4.1.4 6.4.2 6.4.2.1 6.4.2.2 6.4.2.3 6.4.2.4 6.4.2.5 6.4.2.6
REFERENCES

APPENDICES

General
Number Gen. 1 Gen. 2 Gen. 3
Time-Stratigraphic table Stratigraphic terminology First- and second-order global cycles in the Phanerozoic Global transgression/regression & Cenozoic Conversion table Alphabet - Radio callwords

transgression/regression cycles in the Mesozoic

Gen. 4 Gen. 5 Gen. 6

III

Preparation

for Duties

1.2.1 1.8.1 1.8.2


1.8.3 1.8.4 1.8.5 1.9.1
1.9.2 1.9.3

1.9.4 1.9.5

Example of well prognosis Checklist of recommended wellsite laboratory equipment and consumables List of recommended equipment and consumables for palynological investigations at the wellsite Example of wellsite laboratory Recommended equipment for a palaeontological laboratory Sketch of lay-out for a small geological laboratory Drilling programme, Major components of the drilling rig Diagrammatic view of rotary drilling rig Rig manpower, Mud treating equipment, Casing scheme Mud circulation Diagram of self-supported platform

Rock

Sample

Handling

2.1.1 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.3.1 2.4.1

Example Example Example Rate of Example mud log

of sampling procedures of master log of contractor's master log penetration curve (drilling speed log) terminology of correlation.beiween drilling speed log and

Time lag Depth control during sidewall Wellsite core handling

sampling

Investigation

& Reporting

3.2.1.1 3.2.1.2 3.2.1.3 3.2.1.4 3.2.1.5 3.2.1.6 3.2.1.7 3.2.1.8 3.2.1.9 3.2.1.10 3.2.1.11 3.2.1.12 3.2.1.13 3.2.1.14 3.2. 1. 15

Percentage chart of a rocktype in a tray of cuttings Guide for lithological descriptions of sedimentary rocks ("TAPEWORM") Example of cutting sample description sheet Example of sidewall sample description sheet Example of core description sheet Routine sediment determination, example A Routine sediment determination, example B Rock/Mineral identification tests Classification of siliciclastic rocks Classification of carbonate rocks Checklist for carbonate rock description Classification of carbonate particles other than whole fossils Charts for estimating particle percentages Key to identification of skeletal grains in thin sections Key to identification of non-skeletal grains

IV

3.2.1.16 3.2.1.17 3.2.1.18 3.2.1.19 3.2.1.20 3.2.1.21 3.2.1.22

Staining techniques for carbonate rocks Preparation of thin sections from drill cuttings Porosity in carbonate rocks Charts for estimating porosity Grainsize, sorting/porosity, permeability relationship EPIPAL input sheet for rock sample & fossil data Instruction for filling up EPIPAL input sheet for rock sample and fossil data Palaeontological sample preparation by the "Petrol Preparation of thin sections of isolated large~ foraminifera Standard preparation method of rock samples for palynological investigation Coal rank classification and organic metamorphism Nannoplankton investigation at the wellsite Method"

3.2.2.1.1 3.2.2.1.2 3.2.2.2.1 3.2.2.2.2

3.2.2.3.1 3.2.3.1 3.2.3.2 3.2.3.3 3.2.3.4 3.2.3.5 3.2.3.6 3.2.3.7 3.2.3.8 3.2.3.9 3.2.3.10
3.2.3.11 3.2.3.12 3.2.4.2.1 3.2.4.2.2

Depth distribution of selected recent benthonic foraminifera genera Generalized ecological data for selected living benthonic foraminifera genera Summary of living benthonic foraminiferid distributions and their application to palaeoecology Distribution of depositional t.extures in carbonate environments Distribution of skeletal particles in carbonate environments Distribution of non-skeletal particles in carbonate environments Distribution of sedimentary structures in carbonate environments of bedding in carbonate environments Distribution Distribution of minerals in carbonate environments Distribution of early diagensis in carbonate environments Distribution of late diagenesis in carbonate environments Environmental classification scheme Wire-line log values/responses of single mineral lithologies and common rock types Lithology from overlays of porosity logs

3.2.4.3.1 3.2.4.3.2 3.2.4.3.3

Characteristic gamma ray (SP) log shapes in clastics and their potential environmental significance Common reservoir sand types and their characteristic GR (SP) log profiles, as well as other significant features Depositional environment of sand (stones) with "cylinder" shaped GR (SP) patterns determined by the fauna from the enclosing clays

3.2.4.3.4 3.2.4.3.5 3.2.4.4 3.2.4.5 3.2.4.6.1 3.2.4.6.2 3.3.1 3.3.2

Examples of GR (SP) log patterns of balanced environmental conditions GR (SP) log patterns indicative of regression/transgression supported by faunal evidence Quick reference dictionary of dipmeter patterns Correlation between Gamma-Ray and porosity logs Source rock log expression Nomogram for source rocks detection on wireline Example of the lithological report the daily drilling report/telex Stratigraphical well data sheet. by the

logs i~

mud logger,

Special

Investigations

4.1.1 4.2.1 4.3.1

Addresses Rock sampling for palynological fer investigation detection of (non post-

Pyrolysis mature)

test-tube method source rocks.

Team Work

5.2.1

Hydrocarbon

detection

in

rock

samples.

Final

Well

Report table

6.4.1.1 6.4.1.2 6.4.2.1 6.4.2.2 6.4.2.3 6.4.2.4 6.4.2.5

Stratigraphical Time-stratigraphical Example Example Example Example T-Z Graph of heading of heading of of

summary

subdivision of well of well summary completion data sheet log

contractor's stratigraphical

masterlog data sheet

Abbreviations

7.1
7.2

Abbreviations REGEO codes Abbreviations Abbreviations for

for

Lithological lithological

Descriptions descriptions

7.3 7.4

commonly used at the wellsite of wire line logs/tools/programs

VI

Transparent

wireline GR (Gamma SNP FDC BHC

log response Ray) Log Neutron Density

charts

8.1

Response Response Response Response

Chart Chart Chart Chart

8.2
8.3 8.4

(Sidewall (Formation (Bore Hole

Porosity)

Log Log Log

Compensated) Sonic)

Compensated

Introduction

1 -

INTRODUCTION Adequate collection and analysis of geological/stratigraphical data from rock samples at the wellsite is essential for a reliable evaluation of the subsurface geology, despite the availability of modern, high quality wireline logs, whose value can only be fully realised, if lithology is properly recorded. Consequently, greatest care should be exercised to capture all stratigraphical data right at the source. Therefore a close supervision of the well sample handling and an on the spot stratigraphical analysis of these samples must be ensured. These duties are best carried out by a wellsite stratigrapher, who is also able to interpret all the data, e.g establish the age, environment of deposition and reservoir properties of the penetrated strata. This allows a fast reconstruction of the subsurface at an early stage, which is essential in the optimisation of the drilling operation and might influence the programme, probably saving many times the cost of the on-the-spot stratigraphical advice. Opco's running their own exploration laboratory normally send a member of their own staff to the wellsite. However, small exploration companies, without their own laboratory (e.g. one-hole ventures), often require the services of a wellsite stratigrapher from SIPM-EP/121, who may be the only exploration representative in the area. In some cases the team geologist or review geologist may be called upon. This manual is addressed to all of them. The functioning of the drilling operations is of course essentially the responsibility of the drilling and petroleum engineering departments. However, the wellsite stratigrapher ensures that the right action is taken to prevent loss of data at the collecting point and that new geological data are considered in the ongoing effort to optimise operations. In this respect communication is of prime importance. Generally the wellsite geologist/ stratigrapher is directly responsible to the operations manager (OM), but he is usually asked to report to the chief petroleum engineer (CPE). Besides he must have, wherever possible, a direct line of communication with the nearest competent exploration office, to enable him to discuss the interpretation and consequences of his findings. His principal accountabilities are lined up and dealt with in this manual, which is also meant to provide a general guideline for his job and to acquaint him with particular procedures and problems that might be encountered at the wellsite. A set of appendices has been compiled with a "toolkit" during investigations to furnish the wellsite stratigrapher and subsequent reporting. of company list. handouts and

In compiling this manual free use has been made reports which are incorporated in the reference Users are encouraged to submit useful additions.

2 -

KEYWORDS: Exploration drilling, lithostratigraphy, biostratigraphy, wellsite reporting, litho/rock/time unit subdivision, rock sample handling / examination, lithological description, cutting/sidewall sample/core description, palaeontology, palynology, environment of deposition, wire line log interpretation, source rock investigation, geochemical investigation, well resume, well summary data sheet, well completion log, wellsite laboratory equipment.

P "ncipal Accountabilities

PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTABILITIES
The tasks/duties of a wellsite stratigrapher are:

1) prior to starting his duties at the wellsite, to acquire a sound knowledge of the regional and local stratigraphy and to be up-to-date with the prognosis, drilling programme and target of the well, the reporting requirements of the operating company (OPCO) and SIPM, the basic drilling/wellsite terminology and safety rules,

2) to ensure the efficient the rock samples,

collection

initial

investigation

and dispatch

of

3) to establish the stratigraphy of the penetrated sequence and to advise the OPCO (if present in first instance the expl. dept.) and/or SIPM, EP/11 (EP/121) as directly and immediately as possible on all relevant stratigraphical/geological matters, especially at critical stages of the well when stratigraphical information may influence the operations,

4) to initiate special stratigraphical/geochemical investigations of selected sample material (to be performed by EP/121/KSEPL), when routine wellsite examination does not provide all information required, and, if necessary to recommend special sampling and/or logging programmes (e.g. coring or intermediate logging) particularly in connection with the decision on total depth (TD) ,

5) to establish and maintain toolpusher and mudloggers logging,

close cooperation with the petroleum engineer, and assist, if necessary, e.g. in HC detection,

6) to contribute resume.

to the compilation

of the geological

part

of the well

1. Preparation

For Duties

-41.
1.1 PREPARATION FOR WELLSITE DUTIES

General
Prior to starting his duties at the wellsite, the stratigrapher has to acquaint himself with the geology of the area. This will best be achieved by : visits to and discussion with area geologists and seismologists (EP/11,12) and/or the Opco's exploration department. digesting well proposals. reading pertinent literature. compiling a concise dossier with all relevant data (incl. pertinent literature) and information (e.g. well proposis, seismic sections, logs and other data from neighbouring wells, outcrop data, etc.)

1.2

Well

proposal proposal issued by the Opco and/or data EP/11 presents, as a rule of a prospect zones.

A well

the geological an evaluation Hence

and geophysical of the objectives importance

that justify

drilling problem

the stratigraphical prognosis of the proposed well (see Appendix 1.2.1)


and the anticipated

it is of prime

to obtain own copy of this document and study it carefully. to register all potential markes horizons, e.g. tops of distinctive lithological units and fossil occurrences, contracts, etc. to list and evaluatedephts/intervals that require special attention by the wellsite stratigrapher e.g coring-, casing-, and total depth. to discuss with the Opco/EP/11 the action to be taken, in case the encountered stratigraphy deviates from the one prognosed. to obtain a good feeling for the confidence level of the prognosis i.e. to appreciate the areas of uncertainty and speculation jn the geological prognosis. This can only be achieved through personal discussion with the full range of specialists (geologists, seismic interpreters, stratigraphers) involved in the preparation of the well proposal.

1.3

Drilling

programme

Although the wellsite stratigrapher has no control or responsibility for drilling operations as such, he must always be prepared to cooperate and assist wherever possible. Hence he has to acquaint himself with the essential details of the operations by careful study of the drilling programme (see also Appendix 1.9.1) with the aim to : evaluate possibilities for an early indication of casing/coring points (and possible TD) based on the encountered stratigraphy check the various sampling and logging programmes to ensure that all requirements for a reliable geological evaluation are met.

5 -

1.4

Stratigraphical

reference

collection

If material from adjacent wells and/or surface sections is available a wellsite reference collection of marker rock types and faunal/floral index microfossils should be assembled. In case such material is not available, literature has to be searched and an album with illustrations, descriptions and ranges of the more important lithologies and microfossils likely to be encountered has to be compiled.

1.5 EP/11 / Opco's

requirements

and lines

of communication

It is imperative to discuss EP/11's and the Opco's requirements for the evaluation of information and time and type of reporting of the stratigraphical data from the wellsite, as well as requirements for geological/stratigraphical part of the well resume. To avoid work duplication these requirements have to be tuned to each other right from the beginning. Moreover, it must be clearly established who will be the exploration"focal point (in the Opco or in SIPM) with whom the wellsite stratigrapher will be able to communicate directly. (In a Opco environment this would normally be the operations geologist.) As stated before (p. 1) the routine line of communication is through the Chief Petroleum Engeneer and Operations Manager. Besides, however, the wellsite stratigrapher must whenever possible also have a direct line of communication to the focal point of the exploration organisation to allow effective utili~ation of the geological interpretation. The use of this line of communication, however, should be minimused, and only used in geologically critical/sensitive situations, where the wellsite stratigrapher feels that direct communication could be important for a) further optimisation of the operation, or b) improved interpretation of observations made. In order to avoid communication problems, the information directly given to the exploration focal point must be copied also through the routine line of communication, i.e. through the CPE and OM.

1.6 Responsibilities

at the wellsite

The responsibilities and reporting lines of the various functions at the wellsite, including those of the "wellsite geologists" are normally spelled out in the drilling programme. These wellsite geologists are usually mudlogging contractors or junior geologis~s in charge of the lithological description of the samples only. As responsibilities and authority of a wellsite stratigrapher, however, reach generally much further, it is important to carefully discuss responsibilities, reporting procedures and authority with the operations manager (OM) and inform him on the instructions received from EP/11 in

respect to action to be taken when particular situations arise (see 1.2).

1.7

Safety
The the to his wellsite stratigrapher rig safety regulations safety by establishing laboratory. has to familiarize himself with and adhere to and procedures. Moreover he will contribute non-hazardous and bealtby working conditions in

1.8 Laboratory

equipment

A list of principal items required for stratigrapbical investigations at tbe wellsite is presented in Appendix 1.8.1 (and 1.8.2 for palynological investigations). An example of a wellsite laboratory is given in Appendix
-

1.8.3.
In good time before to be taken: tbe departure to the wellsite tbe following action has

check witb tbe Opco (PE) wbicb of tbe items required, are already available at tbe wellsite or will be supplied by tbe mud-logging contractor Order tbe remainder tbrough SIPM EP/121, as soon as possible. Tbe latter items normally have to be carried safeband.
If a geological/palaeontological laboratory bas to be set up at the base camp, reference is made to tbe more comprehensive equipment list in Appendix 1.8.4 and the lay-out sketch for a small laboratory in Appendix 1.8.5.

1.9

Rig jargon To establish good cooperation at tbe wellsite the stratigrapber has to have a basic knowledge of the rig jargon, i.e. he bas to know tbe rig, tbe names of its most important parts, and bow tbey function (See Appendix 1.9.1-1.9.5). Moreover be bas to acquire a basic understanding of tbe various operations and tbeir abbreviations used for reporting. Abbreviations of terms commonly used at the wellsite and in wellsite reporting are presented in Appendix 7.3. It is recommended to read "Geological Prospecting of Petroleum" by H.BECKMANN (See Ref.)

1.10 Mental

preparation

It is advisable to prepare yourself mentally: at tbe wellsite you are on call 24 hrs a day and working conditions migbt cause a certain degree of bardsbip.

2.

ock Sa

pie

andling

I)

L.

ROCK

SAMPLE

HANDLING

2.1

General
Samples are collected to evaluate the stratigraphy (lithology, age and depositional environment) and the hydrocarbon potential (source-, reservoir-, and cap rock properties) of the penetrated formations. The sampling programme has to be designed accordingly. The instruction for the sampling procedures at the wellsite is normally issued by the Opco. However, since the wellsite stratigrapher or EP/121 are usually asked to provide this instruction an example is given in Appendix 2.1.1. Collecti~n, initial description and shipment of all rock samples are carried out by the mud-logging contractor, supervised by the petroleum engineer (PE). Interfering with these routine procedures is only necessary if the prescribed sampling procedures are not adhered to (e.g. incorrect labelling) or if additional samples are required for stratigraphical reasons. The mud-logging unit prepares the rate of penetration, lithology of "percentage log"), an interpreted shows and other useful data. (for Rate of penetration Appendix 2.2.3. curve masterlog, a the cuttings lithological examples see speed log) document displaying (in %) (="mud log" or column, hydrocarbon Appendix 2.2.1 - 2.2.2.) terminology is documented in

(drilling

Appendix 2.2.4 gives an example of correlating the drilling the "mudlog" to define tops of lithological units.

spee9

log with

Until wireline logs are available, the masterlog is used for correlation with neighbouring wells. The actual handling of the various type of samples is dealt with in the next chapters.

2.2

Cuttings Handling Check regularly whether cuttings are indeed properly sampled, and watch whether the shaker screen has been thoroughly cleaned after sample collection to ensure that the next accumulation of cuttings only contains "fresh" material. Generally, cuttings samples are labelled with the depth corrected for time lag, viz. the true depth-level the material is calculated to originate from. The time lag is calculated by the mudlogger or PE (Appendix 2.2.5). If the correction for time lag cannot be accomplished, cuttings samples have to be collected from the shaker at drillers' depth. This "collected depth" is later corrected for time lag by the PE to determine the "corrected depth"... Disadvantages of this method are, that samples are not regularily spaced (because of variable penetration rates) and an incorrect depth is stated on the sample bags. Label properly also the (small) samples used for your own investigation with well name and sample depth.

- 8 -

For rinsing cuttings tbe "decantation" metbod is recommended: place tbe sample in a container, fill it up witb water and stir. Decant tbe dirty water and repeat tbis process until tbe water remains reasonably clean. Treating soft clays, take care not to remove all tbe clay with the mud. Cbeck the quality of tbe initial cuttings descriptions by tbe mudlogger. In case corrections or improvements are necessary inform tbe PE or tbe mudlogger directly. Encourage the latter to establish a reference collection of the various litbologies penetrated. Avoid overheating (>60oC) geochemical investigations hydrocarbons) .' when drying samples destinated/selected (or well-site cbecks on lighter for

Establisb your own reference drilling proceeds.

collection

of representative

lithologies

as

No samples,

or only

a few,

can be obtained

from

the shale

shaker

when:

drilling poorly consolidated sediments (some representative material may then be collected from the desanders/desitters or by holding a fine sieve in the mud stream) soft clay is taken up in drilling mud drilling with lost circulation drilling in salt with fresh-water mud turbodrilling; this often yields more or. less unrecognizable sludges
rather than cuttings. Similar powdering may result from regrinding of
.

of cuttings, e.g. during conventional diamond drilling.


If for any reason recorded. no samples are collected, ensure that tbis is properly

Unrepresentative

samples

may

(also)

be due to:

strong caving of tbe borebole wall spreading: different lithologies may yield different cbipsizes travelling at different speeds cindering (burning/fusing) of bard claystones (e.g. wben turbodrilling with diamond bit). Tbis produces cuttings resembling volcanic rocks contamination:

cement
fragments of up-bole casing sboe formation cemented-in below

material (LCM) fragments of drilling equipment re-circulated particles (e.g. microfossils) particles present in new drilling-mud alteration of samples during drying or storage, e.g. microfossils + pyrite can react to form .gypsum

lost-circulation

calcite

of

Sampling at closer intervals than specified in the drilling be recommended when e.g.: the lithologies penetrated are very varied the drill approaches a formation to be cored a prospective interval is penetrated.

programme

may

2.3

Sidewall

Samples

(SWS) your list of depths to be sidewall sampled

Preparation: whilst preparing consider the following:

Time is limited; when the last logging tool comes out, the SWS gun goes down. PEls desiderata: he usually wants to sample reservoir rocks and strata with oil shows. Your own reasons why/where to take SWS: lithology: space samples in such a way as to achieve maximum strata definition and log calibration - source rocks (for selection see Appendices 3.2.4.6.1 and 3.2.4.6.2) - reservoirs and shows; co-ordinate with PE - microfossils (age or environment). Select the depth levels for the SWS you want on the 1:200 logs; ask PE which log will be used as reference during the shooting. For depth control during sidewall sampling see Appendix 2.3.1. Gun-runs need planning. When many SWS are needed more than one gun (or gun-assembly) has to be run. Keep in mind that: - deteriorating hole conditions may limit or prohibit subsequent runs (or necessitate a round-trip); priority-samples are therefore to be shot during the first run. - some spare capacity is required in last run to cope with possible non-recoveries of previous run(s). - closely spaced samples are usually best taken in different runs. - logging engineer may have to mount different charges or bullets if the hardness of the rocks varies strongly. Advise on lithology and hardness of formations.

Damage: SWS shooting damage drilling bits

damages borehole walls. Lost bullets may severely or even cause the drilling string to become stuck.

Handling Gun should be cleaned and bullet-cables disentangled before engineer takes samples out of bullets. Attend or supervise removal of the samples from the bullets assignment of the shot numbers. Samples recovered, gun/run-numbers, misfires, lost bullets, recorded properly (PE responsible in first instance). The following terms are used:

logging
and check should be

- 10 -

(bullets) (samples)

fired: recovered:

misfire: empty (bullet): lost (bullet):

refers to the number of attempts by the logging engineer to take samples in one run. All bullets containing some rock material, regardless of length. failure of the powder charge to ignite. recovered bullet not containing any sample. bullet remaining in the hole, either shot-off in a washout or stuck in the formation.

Each sample container should be labelled with a waterproof felttip marker, showing well name, core depth and shotnumber. Furthermore the shot number and/or depth should be scratched on the metal lid of the sample container.

Samples of less than cm (excluding mudcake) are generally not accepted by the PE. In particular cases, however, (e.g. poor recovery due to hardness of the formation) it is advisable to accept undersized samples and discuss the billing (e.g. two undersized samples are billed as one).
If the recovery is poor or essential samples are missing or samples are mixed up during the discharge of the gun, insist on running an additional gun, but note before the operational base has been consulted. Samples must despatch. Impact e.g.: be described at well-site (main lithology and shows) before

lithology:

shooting

may

drastically

alter

texture

o~ formation

reduce grain-size in sandstone. convert tight limestone to chalk-like Take drilling (microfossil) mud samples for each contamination.

rock. in order to check

SWS operation

2.4

Cores
The core handling 2.4.1. procedure at the wellsite is spelled out in Appendix

Coring point criteria are established to facilitate the decision when start actually coring an interval specified in the drilling programme. They may consist of the expected: (updated) top of the interval drilling break change in lithology hydrocarbon shows

to

11 -

In exploration wells cores indications and favourable Coring for stratigraphical

are generally cut only when fair hydrocarbon reservoir properties have been encountered. purposes is usually carried out in appraisal

wells.
In case of coring a potential hydrocarbon adhere to the following procedure: halt drilling immediately after reservoir it is recommended to

the expected

drilling

break

observe flow (PE)


drill a further few (1-3) metres into the formation stop drilling circulate bottoms up and determine hydrocarbon indication (in both cuttings and mud) and reservoir properties if both are fair to good, pullout for coring and inform the operational

base
if one of them is poor the next step is dicussed with the base. (The next step might be drilling another few metres and repeating the above procedure). When cutting a core for stratigraphical purposes at the top of a particular formation, the above procedure is followed and coring starts once the required lithology has been identified in the cuttings samples. Examine the cuttings comming up during the actual coring to collect preliminary information on the lithological composition of the core. A brief description has to be reported to the operational base soonest~

2.5

Bit-,

logging

tool-.

junk

sub- and junk

basket

samples The drilling crew has to be

These should be collected whenever available. instructed to collect these samples.

2.6

Core

slices

from

the MCT

After evaluation of the wire line logs, core slices can be cut with a mechanical core slicer (MCT= Mechanical Coring Tool) from the borehole wall over intervals of particular interest, e.g. for petrophysical or stratigraphical evaluation. The tool is normally positioned with the Gamma Ray log. The triangular slices are labelled and marked like normal cores and packed in special triangular containers supplied by Schlumberger. Note that taking core slices has to be planned in advance, because MCT's are normally not on the rig.

3. Investigation

&

eporting

3.
3.1
STRATIGRAPHICAL INVESTIGATION

12

ON THE WELLSITE

& REPORTING

General
The stratigrapher
should collect as much stratigraphical information as possible at the wellsite to construct an accurate and meaningfull record of the penetrated strata for the evaluation of the prospect at an early stage, so that consequent possible changes in operations can be carried out in time (e.g. additional coring, intermediate logging, etc.). Guid~lines how to describe the sediments and how to establish time and type of deposition, as well as the recommended reporting of the obtained data, are given in this chapter.

3.2 3.2.1

Investigations

Lithology
The wellsite stratigrapher obtains the best knowledge of the strata penetrated by describing all rock samples himself and not relying on the initial description of the mudloggers who usually record the main lithologies only. Moreover, due to the personal bias lithologies may change sometimes with the crew change. It is recommended to instruct the mudloggers to layout a separate set of slightly rinsed cuttings samples (approx. one table spoon per sample), preferably in five cell examination trays. This enables you to carry out your own investigations at any time. Starting the examination, wet the cuttings and pour off the superfluous water together with any fine contaminants (powdered rock or mud) masking the true texture of the rock. Scan the samples for lithological breaks and then start the detailed examination under the microscope. When describing the cuttings remember that:

Cuttings are usually contaminated with a variable amount of caving and drilling mud and sometimes with lost-circulation material, cement or fragments of drilling equipment. Ask the PE/mudboy to supply you with a sample of all mud-additives that might show up in the cuttings (e.g. nutshells, used to cure loss of circulation) Cuttings may be pulverized by regrinding or crushing and erroneously be logged as chalky limestone or soft anhydrite. Cuttings may be burned and fused (especially when drilling a very tight formation or drilling hard shales with a diamond bit) and become dark and hard and resemble igneous rock.

To distinquish the autochthonous lithology from caving/contamination apply the information from the prognosis, the regional geology, the drilling speed log, tool samples, and at a later stage, the wireline sidewall samples and cores.

also logs,

13 -

First, describe the various lithologies (for abbreviations see Appendix 7.1) then establish the percentage of each lithology in the sample. For percentage estimation charts see Appendix 3.2.1.1. For the order of description of the various lithologies follow the sequence as presented on page 1 of the tapeworm (Appendix 3.2.1.2) and the description sheets (see Appendix 3.2.1.3 - 3.2.1.5) for the actual description. To establish the rock type follow the procedures for routine sediment determination presented in Appendix 3.2.1.6 and 3.2.1.7 and if necessary carry out the required rock identification tests (see Appendix 3.2.1.8). For a minor lithological change do not establish a new rock type but rather incorporate it in the existing description (e.g. limestone, locally argillaceous). For the classification of siliciclastic and carbonate rocks see Appendix 3.2.1.9 and 3.2.1.10 respectively. For the description of clastics see the tapeworm (Appendix 3.2.1.2) page 2,3,11,13 and 14, and for

carbonate rocks the tapeworm page 6

10 as well as Appendix 3.2.1.10

3.2.1.16. To obtain details of the texture and particles of carbonates it might be necessary to thin section a few selected cuttings (for this preparation see Appendix 3.2.1.17.) For the description of porosities classification and also identify 3.2.1.18 and 3.2.1.19. Note that samples than in wet ones. in carbonates use the Archie the type of porosity, see Appendix it is easier to recognize pores in dry

Porosities in clastics are usually intergrannular and controlled primarily by the textural properties, sorting, grainsize, shape, roundness and packing, (e.g. the better the sorting the higher the porosity). Porosity estimates in clastics (see Appendix 3.2.1.19) as well as in carbonates are best reported in terms of poor (5 - 10%), fair-good (10 - 20%) and very good> 20%. Permeability, a measure of the capacity of a rock for transmitting a fluid, can not be established by microscopic examination. However, the speed with which water is absorbed by a rock is an indication of its relative permeability (e.g. water will stand up in a bead on a completely impermeable rock). For clastics: the better the sorting and the coarser the grains, the higher the permeability. The permeability estimates (see also Appendix 3.2.1.20) are best reported in terms of poor

( 5 md, millidarcy's)
(100-1000 md)

fair (5

10 md), good (10-100 md) and very good

The Standard Legend "informal" abbreviations (see Appendix 7.1) are most suitable for the routine lithological description at the wellsite and the subsequent reporting. For storing data on computer files (for EPIPAL see Appendix 3.2.1.21 and 3.2.1.22) the computer abbreviation (see Appendix 7.2 and 3.2.1.2) have to be applied. After the examination the samples are dried and stored in small plastic bags in a washresidue box and kept on the rigsite as a reference set.

3.2.2 3.2.2.1
Biostratigraphy

14

Palaeontology
Detailed palaeontological investigations cannot normally be carried out at the wellsite due to the time constraint. Therefore the samples to be examined have to be selected very carefully, e.g. samples that contain a high For percentage of "new" lithologies. of the material the procedure is as

the preparation

and examination

follows:

a)

for slightly or non-consolidated rocks and consolidated fine clastics: - rinse the cuttings - if necessary, dry and crush if time available, soak or boil in water (or for harder shales use the petrol method see Appendix 3.2.2.1.1) wash the sample through two (20 and 200 mesh) or three sieves (20, 100 & 200 mesh)

dry the residue

sieve it through a set of table sieves examine and pick the various fractions (isolated larger foraminifera might have

to be thinsectioned

or

split, see Appendix

3.2.2.1.2).

When investigating a thick monotonous sequence of soft rocks it is time saving to prepare a combined sample be using e.g. a tea spoon of cuttings from samples at 20 m spacing over a 100 m interval. If a faunal break is discovered in such a sample the actual depth of the break has to be traced by examination of the individual samples.

b)

for hard consolidated rocks: rinse the cuttings examine them wet under the microscope with the same magnification as for the investigation of thin sections. In carbonates, etching the cuttings by dipping them for a few seconds in 10% HCL and in water there-after, may facilitate the recognition of microfossils and particles. - select if necessary "the most promising" pieces for thinsectioning (see appendix 3.2.1.17)

The time stratigraphical subdivision of the penetrated sequence is established by comparing the encountered microfossils with the wellsite reference collection (see 1.4), your pocket collections and/or literature data from surounding areas. The more detailed palaeontological studies are usually carried out at SIPM (EP/121) at a later stage.

- 15 3.2.2.2
Palynology Palynological investigations are carried out on a routine basis at the wellsite in particular cases only (e.g. in areas with mainly terrestrial sediments). They are performed by a palynologist or a stratigrapher with a sound palynological background. The standard preparation method of rock samples for palynological investigation is presented in Appendix 3.2.2.2.1 and the coal rank classification and organic metamorphism table in Appendix 3.2.2.2.2. In case no palynological investigations have been carried out (see also chapter 4 "special investigations") it is still advisable to evaluate with EP/121 the desirability of a palynological investigation over particular intervals. Note that the wellsite palynologist is usually occupied fully with palynological sample preparation and analyses as his prime duty. If time available he will monitor activities as outlined in this manual.

3.2.2.3

Nannoplankton

studies

These studies are usually not carried out at the wellsite because of lack of a high power microscope, reaching a magnification of at least 1000 times. However if such a microscope is present for palynological investigations, it is recommended to check the marine sediments on their nannoplankton content. For the preparation of the material and the observation method reference is made to Appendix 3.2.2.3.1.

3.2.3.

Environment

of deposition

A preliminary interpretation of the environment of deposition of the penetrated sequence can be achieved at the wellsite based mainly on the encountered fossil assemblages and the lithology. For the interpretation of the depositional environment based on isolated foraminifera (mainly from clastic sediment) see Appendices 3.2.3.1,

3.2.3.2

and 3.2.3.3

and for carbonates Appendices

3.2.3.4

3.2.3.11.

See also paragraph 3.2.4.3: Environment of deposition from wire line logs. For the Group's terminology reference is made to the "Environmental Classification Scheme" (Appendix 3.2.3.12) The subsequent detailed study is carried out in the laboratory and reported in the final well report.

3.2.4 3.2.4.1

Wireline

logs

General
The relationship between the wireline log responses and stratigraphical parameters is evident. The wireline logs can be used for a "quick look" interpretation as soon as they become available and for subsequent more detailed stratigraphical evaluation. The "quick look" interpretation usually proves that the reported levels of stratigraphical boundaries based on cuttings have to be revised to match the wireline logs.

- 16 -

The updated stratigraphical subdivision operational base (and EP/11, SIPM). Before studying the wire1ine logs:
-

has

to be reported

to the

check headings, scales and remarks mark scale changes


note depth discrepancies of wire1ine between the various logs see Appendix 7.4).

mark washouts
log/tools/programs

(for abbreviations

3.2.4.2

Lithology

from wire1ine

logs easily recognized by their typical wire line log

Examples of lithologies responses are:

Lithology

GR

SONIC

DENSITY

RESISTIVITY

Clay/Shale Coal

high very low

rather high-high very high (110-140)

2.2-2.75 very low, 13-1.8 high, 2,98 low, 2.03 1.5-2.8

low high

Anhydrite Rocks salt Potassium salts

very low very low extremely high >180 API

low, 50 66.7 52-78

high high high

For further details see Appendix 3.2.4.2.1. For the lithological interpretation of the wire1ine logs the transparent "Wire1ine Log Response Charts", Appendices 8.1-8.4 useful.

are

Gamma

Ray Log

(GR)

The GR is a good tool to separate clay, claystones and shales from other lithologies. The content of radioactive compounds in clay, claystones and shales is generally high (giving, high GR readings) compared to that in sands, carbonates, evaporites and coals. There are exceptions: high GR readings are obtained in sands containing relatively high concentrations of mica, zircon or glauconite and in potassium salts.

Spontaneous The SP log,

Potential showing

Curve

(SP) of sediments (caused mainly by

the self potential

clay membrane effects) can also be used for "shale" (+) / non-"shale"
(-) separation. The log, however, is useless in oi1based mud or if there is insufficient contrast between the salinity of the mud and the formation water. In salt-water-based mud readings may even be reversed. Moreover the tool is rather sensitive to hole size.

17 -

Neutron Logs (SNP,

CNL)

Neutron logs basically record the hydrogen content of the formation. Therefore they can be used to identify shale/clay (stone) units which because of clay bound water generally give higher readings than (porous) sands/carbonates.

Sonic

Log

(BHC)

The Sonic log measures the velocity of sound waves in terms of transit time (microseconds per foot or m). It indicates "shale" and "shalyness" due to its sensitivity to the low sound transfer in clay minerals. It is sensitive to wash-outs.

Formation

Density

Log

(FDC, LDT)

The density tool measures essentially the electron density of the formation, which is related to the true bulk density expressed in gr/cm3. For identification of lithologies it is used in combination with the GR and for crossplotting (overlay) with the Neutron and Sonic. The overlays are discussed below.

Density

(FDC of LDT)

/ Neutron

(SNP or CNL)

overlay

This is a good method to identify lithologies (see Appendix 3.2.4.2.2). The Neutron Log is considered to indicate (in non-"shales") the hydrogene content of the pores, thus recording porosity. The Density log is considered to indicate the density of the frame work. Therefore, for the same porosity different rock types give different density readings. Overlaying a transparency of the Neutron over the Density (or vice versa) and aligning the limestone porosity scales of
the two logs, by overlying the density line of 15% porous limestone

2.45g/cm3 over the 15% porosity line on the neutron shows that a variety of different and characteristic separations for the main rock types other than limestone. Presence of gas effects the Density-Neutron separation, and dolomite may be interpreted as limestone and limestone may be interpreted as sand. Also the presence of minerals other than quartz, calcite or dolomite, e.g. mica, glauconite, pyrite, feldspar can alter the separation. For example micaceous sandstone may give a shale/dolomite separation.

Density

(FDC or LDT)

/ Sonic

(BHC)

overlay

This method serves well to separate "shales" from non-"shales" (see Appendix 3.2.4.2.2). The Sonic indicates "shale" and "shalyness" very effectively, due to the low sound transfer in clay minerals. The Density is considered to indicate the density of the framework and thus to reflect the true porosity, also in "shales" and "shaly" rocks.

18 -

Overlaying a transparency of the Sonic over the Density (or vice versa), so that the 2.5 gr/cm3 line of the Density log is overlain the 80 ms/ft line of the Sonic, shows that there is a significant separation for shales, sand or clean limestone.

by

3.2.4.3

Environment

of deposition

from wireline

logs

In clastic sediments particular GR/(SP) log shapes are, in combination with the information obtained from the faunal/(floral) analysis, of significance for the evaluation of the depo~itional
environment. Examples are given in Appendix

3.2.4.3.1

to

3.2.4.3.3.

Sequences of these GR/(SP) log shapes give certain log patterns which, again in combination with the faunal/(floral) data, are indicative of particular environmental conditions. For instance:
-

monotonous

curves

or

a repetition

of

similar

environmental conditions (see Appendix


-

3.2.4.3.4)

shapes

suggests

balanced

and
another (i.e. a

a change

from

one

ordered

sequence

of

shapes

into

change

from

one balanced

condition

into another)

indicates

transgression or regression.

(see Appendix

3.2.4.3.5)
on the GR as

are usually reflected follows: shape, - balanced conditions by a "Cylinder" - regressive conditions by a "Funnel" shape, by a "Bell" shape. - transgressive conditions

In carbonates these conditions

3.2.4.4

Structural

geological

data

from wireline

logs

Structural interpretations of the drilled sequence are based on the recognition and interpretation of particular patterns of the arrow plot of the dipmeter log (HDT) showing azimuth and dip of the strata. Examples of dipmeter patterns and their interpretation are given in Appendix 3.2.4.4. Use all stratigraphical data for the structural analyses, especially the presence and position of unconformities and faults, which became apparent during the stratigraphical study.

3.2.4.5

Porosity

and Permeability

from wireline

logs

There is at present no log that measures permeabilities. Some logs give indirect permeability indications, but they are usually not very reliable and their interpretation is better left to the petrophysisists. The standard porosity logs are the Neutron, the Density and the Sonic. Their responses are usually a combination of porosity effect and clay effect. The clay effect is generally largest on the Neutron and smallest on the Density log) Correlation between GR and porosity logs normally gives a reasonable indication of the porosity/clay distribution and thus of the porosity

itself. (see Appendix

3.2.4.5)

- 19 -

3.2.4.6

Source

Rocks

from wireline

logs

Source rocks are generally recognized on wireline logs by a relatively lower density and a relatively higher resistivity than the surrounding non-source rocks. In addition the source rock intervals usually show a relatively high GR response and low sonic velocity reading. (see Appendix 3.2.4.6.1. and 3.2.4.6.2). Above characteristics will aid in the selection of samples for geochemical analysis, in determining potential source-rock intervals where samples are not available (e.g. exchange well), and assist in regional mapping of potential source rock units.

3.3

Reporting The OPCO's reporting and administration regulations must be followed. The lithological description by the mudlogger is usually transmitted on a daily basis in percentages of rock type per sample. (see Appendix 3.3.1). This report is normally accompanied by a copy of the relevant part of the masterlog (see Appendix 2.2.2). Check this reporting regularly. In addition the stratigrapher is expected to provide a comprehensive stratigraphical report including: - a subdivision of the penetrated sequence into litho-units - a lithological description of these units - a time stratigraphical subdivision - an interpretation of the depositional environment - a correlation of the sequence with the local rock stratigraphy
-

an updated prognosis of as yet undrilled strata

These data have to be reported on a daily, weekly and monthly basis. Especially the daily reports must give all essential stratigraphical/ geological details, but should not to be overloaded with data of interest to specialists only. Initially the lithological descriptions and the drilling speed log are used to define boundaries, but these have to be updated as soon as the wireline logs become available and subsequently reported. It is advisable to compose a stratigraphical well data sheet (see Appendix 3.3.2) and mufax, or send a copy of the relevant hole section to the operational base on a regular basis. When drilling critical hole sections or if particular findings might influence the drilling programme (coring, logging, total depth, etc), it is recommended to report important stratigraphical data immediately, to the Operations Manager and the exploration focal point, as and when they become available. Moreover, it is recommended to communicate with the focal point if this might improve the interpretation of observations. Make sure that the OM (CPE) is informed about the content and results of these discussions. The final stratigraphical report that has to be incorporated in the final well report, is dealt with in chapter 6. Parts of this report can be prepared on the wellsite (including the enclosures) but is normally finalized at SIPM (EP/121).

4. Special Investigations

20 -

-4. 4.1

SPECIAL

INVESTIGATIONS

General
In particular cases it might be necessary to initiate a special biostratigraphical or geochemical investigation, to be carried out by SIPM EP/121 or KSEPL LRE/4 respectively (addresses see Appendix 4.1.1) If the results are urgently required, it is advisable to have the minimum amount of material required (see below) carried safehand to Rijswijk (or mailed at an airport nearest to Rijswijk) as soon as possible. Moreover, inform EP/121 and/or KSEPL LRE/4 by telex about the dispatch details as well as the type and urgency of the investigation required. The PEC and/or the OM have to be informed as well. A few notes on the various investigations are given below.

4.2

Biostratigraphical

investigations

by SIPM EP/121

If dating of the penetrated sediments, essential for the short term operations, cannot be achieved at the wellsite, the following investigations to be carried out by EP/121, might be requested: For marine sediments:

- a micro-palaeontological investigation: A minimum of a table spoon of slightly rinsed sample material is required. Select preferably the softer sediments (for washing) though hard carbonates can also be used (thin-sectioning). - Nannoplankton investigation: (for sediments of assumed post-Triassic age only) Send calcareous shales, marls or argillaceous limestones rather than non-calcarous coarser clastics or hard recrystallized carbonates. A minimum of a small teaspoon (0.5 cm3) of clean sediment is required.

For terrestrial sediments pre-Barremian age:

in general

and marine

deposits

of assumed

a palynological investigation: Select dark coloured shales/siltstones rather than red beds, clean sandstones recristallized) carbonates. (see Appendix 4.2.1) A table spoon of slightly rinsed material is sufficient.

or

(hard

For sediments

of unknown

depositional

environment:

These need a comprehensive biostratigraphical investigation. A minimum of two table spoons of slightly rinsed sediments is required.

- 21 -

4.3

Source

Rock

investigation

by KSEPL

The presence of dark sediments (e.g. dark brown-black organic shale) in the cuttings might indicate that source rocks have been penetrated. Source rocks are sediments with sufficient amounts of suitable organic matter to generate and expel hydrocarbons. It is advisable to send samples (ca. 100 g of slightly rinsed cuttings per sample) of such sediments to KSEPL (for address see Appendix 4.1.1) for geochemical analyses. Samples should not be heated above 600C to avoid oxidation and have to be packed in special plastic bags. Moreover state whether organic mud additives (e.g. walnut shells, coal, etc) have been used. At the wellsite a rapid scanning for source rocks is achieved by the pyrolysis (chemical decomposition be heat) test tube method (see Appendix 4.3.1). Source rock intervals (>2 feet) identified on wireline logs (chapter 3.2.4.6 and Appendices 3.2.4.6.1 and 3.2.4.6.2) should be sidewallsampled for geochemical investigations. In other words: (sidewall-) sample for geochemical analysis all intervals that give a low density/high resistivity (/high gamma ray and relatively low sonic velocity) reading, which can not be explained physically (lithology, hydrocarbon content) or mechanically (mal functioning tool, wash out, etc.). Cindered (burned) cuttings are unsuitable for geochemical investigation.

5.

earn Work

5. 5.1
TEAM WORK

22

General
The wellsite stratigrapher petroleum engineer and the matters and to inform them updated formation tops. To know the rig jargon and to operations (see also 1.9). has to maintain regular contacts with the toolpusher to keep abreast of operational on relevant stratigraphical data like e.g. function satisfactorily he is supposed to gain a basic knowledge of the various

5.2

Assistance Hydrocarbon

to

the

Petroleum

Engineer

(PE)

5.2.1

detection

Hydrocarbon detection and recording is. in first instance. the responsibility of the Petroleum Engineer (PE). However. the wellsite stratigrapher is expected to be able to take over these duties as and when necessary. The methods commonly used to detect hydrocarbons in rock samples are assembled on Appendix 5.2.1. Fluorescence of mud additives such as diesel. asphalt. soltex, etc.. as well as pipe dope and mineral fluorescence should not be mixed up with hydrocarbon shows.

5.2.2

Wireline

logging

The PE might request the wellsite stratigrapher to attend the wireline logging operations or even supervise the logging. Therefore. it is advisable to acquire a basic knowledge of the actual wireline logging practice. (see chapter 9 in BECKMANN 1976)

5.3

Assistance

to

the

mudlogger by it

In case the mudlogger is overloaded penetration or an instrument failure) wellsite stratigrapher carries out descriptions of the cuttings during

work (e.g.

during

a fast
if the

is highly appreciated the elementary lithological such hectic periods.

6. Final Well

eport

6. 6.1
FINAL WELL REPORT (WELL RESUME) General

23

The wellsite stratigrapher assists the regional geologist (EP/ll) or operations manager in completing the geological part of the final well report. He prepares the chapter stratigraphy and contributes to other geological subjects such as: geological summary, comparison prognosis versus results, structural results, potential reservoirs, seals and source rocks, regional correlation etc. His main contribution to the final well report is the well completion log. He is advised to start this work already at the wellsite. The various subjects, as well as the appendices and enclosures of the well resume, are discussed below. Experience shows that government authorities, and partners like national oil companies prefer to receive one single compound report rather than various volumes of special reports. In some countries the government even requires a standard report format.

6.2

Timing
Generally, the well resume has to be presented to authorities within 3 months after completion of the well. This implies that the report should be ready for checking by SIPM approximately two weeks before presentation. Enclosures are to be completed first, to enable draughting department to finalise their work in time. Therefore, the draughting dept. has to be informed on the expected workload.

6.3

Contents The contents of the various chapters that normally geological part of the report are briefly reviewed constitute here. the

6.3.]

Geological

Summary

This normally consists of: - a concise description of the lithologies or the rock stratigraphical subdivision, the time stratigraphical subdivision and the interpreted depositional environment of the penetrated sequence. - a comparison of the sequence with the one predicted in the well proposal - a brief discussion of: structural results, objectives (expectation versus result), hydrocarbon shows/test, encountered potential reservoir rocks, source rocks and seals, coring, sidewall sampling and TD.

- 24 -

6.3.2

Well

prognosis the regional geology, the well prognosis and

This chapter summa rises the play concept.

6.3.3

Stratigraphy This chapter must contain:

- a brief discussion of the various investigations carried out and the regional stratigraphical data applied for the interpretation
-

a summary of the subdivision of the penetrated sequence into the


various sedimentary packages or formal rock units

a concise review of the depositional environment per time interval


intrusions etc. of

- an outline of major stratigraphic events - a statement of significant hiatuses, faults, Subsequently penetration. Start Unit with name : top and bottom : in m/ft :-e.g. clay with unit by unit is described

in detail

in sequence

a listing

of the following

data:

- Interval - Thickness - Main - Upper lithology contact

in m/ft

bdf

subordinate limestone

siltstone and

: e.g. break underlying

between clay

- Lower

contact

: e.g.

silty

clay unconformably

overlying

sucrosic - Environment of deposition:

dolomite cont. shelf, outer neritic

e.g. marine,

Then

present

in detail

the

lithology - time stratigrahpy of deposition

- environment

6.3.4

Structural

results results are discussed and compared with the structural originally interpreted from seismic and presented in the

The dipmeter configuration prognosis.

6.3.5

Petrophysical

evaluation

of potential

reservoirs

As a rule this evaluation is carried out by the petroleum engineering department. However, the stratigrapher might be asked to supply a detailed lithological description of potential reservoirs, including permeability estimates.

6.3.6
Source Rock potential

25

Generally the stratigrapher initiates, in consultation with EP/11 and/or the operations manager, a source rock evaluation of particular intervals (by KSEPL). The results of this investigation are briefly reviewed in this chapter. The details of the source rock evaluation are normally presented in a separate KSEPL report which is included in the well resume as an appendix.

6.3.7

Conclusions

and recommendations

Start this chapter with a review of the stratigraphy encountered and the results of the petrophysical evaluation. (potential reservoirs, hydrocarbons). Subsequently analyse the targets and prognosis versus findings. Then discuss the new information gained and the modifications to the original geological interpretation and analyse alternative prospects.

6.4

Appendices

(/Textfigures)

and Enclosures (/textfigures) and enclosures illustrating to be added to the final well report. Examples

The following appendices results are recommended are given in Appendices

6.4.1.1 - 6.4.2.5.

6.4.1 6.4.1.1

Appendices Stratigraphical summary table (Appendix 6.4.1.1): showing the succession of the penetrated sedimentary packages/rock units and their: boundaries (in m bdf), thickness, lithology, age and depositional environment, source rock potential, estimated reservoir rock potential and eventual remarks. Timestratigraphical subdivision (Appendix

6.4.1.2 6.4.1.3 6.4.1.4 6.4.2 6.4.2.1

6.4.1.2)

presenting

(from

the

top to bottom) the various time units interpreted, incl: log tops, biostratigraphical tops observed in the samples, and thickness.
Core description and an updated typed version from

Sidewall sample description both usually the original wellsite description.

Enclosures Well Summary Data Sheet (Appendix

6.4.2.1)

Compiled

to present: D.F., spudding and

general well data: coordinates, elevation completion dates, total depth and status location map

26 -

- prognosed - encountered - drilling relevant - samples - wireline

stratigraphy stratigraphy

progress technical collected: logs run data: casings SWS, etc. cores

cuttings,

- hydrocarbon - reservoir - interpreted - dipmeter

indications properties wireline log data: azimuth interval and dip velocity, density, etc.

interpretation: Log

6.4.2.2

Well

Completion

(Appendix

6.4.2.2)

This enclosure is the most important stratigraphical document of the final well report. The OPCO may prescribe a standard format for this log. It is recommended to use a 1:1000 scale and to present at least an interpreted lithological column flanked by the GR and caliper logs on the left and the FDC/CNL (or sonic log) and a concise lithological description on the right, and a time- and rock stratigraphical subdivision as well as an environmental interpretation on the left or the right. If the wireline logs are digitized a computer print (as described above) is available from EP/223. A comprehensive completion log usually illustrates at its top the followiqg data as well: - general - location - wire line data: map logs run recorded used coordinates etc, see well summary sheet

- bottom - bit and

hole

temperatures types

sizes

and mud

the log of important fossils

- top occurrences - the dipmeter

interpretation shows sidewall technical samples data collected

- the hydrocarbon - the cores and

- the relevant totco's, plugbacks

such as: results, true vertical depth,

casings,

losses,

test

27

6.4.2.3

Master Log (or Drilling Speed Log) (Appendix 6.4.2.3)


This log is normally composed by the mud logging contractor. It presents all data recorded and collected by the mudloggers at the wellsite such as: mud properties, rates of penetration, hydrocarbon shows, cuttings lithologies, etc. If the well was drilled without a mud logging service unit it is advisable to include the Drilling Speed Log constructed by the PE and the wellsite geologist/stratigrapher.

6.4.2.4

Stratigraphical Data (Appendix 6.4.2.4)

Sheet

(Faunal

and/or

Floral

Distribution

Chart)

This enclosure illustrates the distribution of the fossils recorded withing the penetrated sequence. The timestratigraphical and environmental interpretations of these data are normally presented on this distribution chart as well. The established rock stratigraphical subdivision and the interpreted lithological column flanked by wireline logs and relevant technical data like casings are usually presented along the left side of the chart.

6.4.2.5

Geophysical

Well

Data

Sheet

/ T-Z Graph

(Appendix

6.4.2.5)

This graph, basically showing the link between stratigraphical horizons and their one way reflection time, is normally constructed by the geophysical department. The stratigrapher, however, might be asked to

composethe lithological columnfor this graph.

6.4.2.6

Well

Correlation

If stratigraphical data from nearby wells are available it is advisable to illustrate their correlation with the penetrated sequence.

References

REFERENCES

28

Asquith, G.B. and Gibson, C.R. (1983) Basic well log analysis for geologists. AAPG Tulsa, Oklahoma USA (PALLAB 2371)

Batjes,

D.A.J. (1982) Guide for Exploration Company Handout Course

Well-site E104.

Geologists.

Beckmann, H. (1976) - Geological Prospecting of Petroleum. (Geology of Petroleum Vol. 2) Ferdinand Enke Publishers Stuttgart.

Boltovskoy, E. and Wright, Recent Foraminifera.

Dr. W. Junk b.v.,


Boykin,

R. (1976)

Publishers

The Hague.

e.E. (1959) A laboratory manual on techniques for geologic observation. Unpublished company report EP-34126 Atlas Diplog. Dresser (1983) Analysis and Atlas, Dresser

used

in

preparing

carbonate

rocks

Dresser

Practical Industries,

Geology. Inc. USA.

Eckert,

H.R. (1983) Depositional environment: and Coding. Unpublished company report

A proposal EP-59030

for

Classification,

Terminology

FEigel,

E. (1982) Microfacies analyses in limestones. Springer, Berlin, Heidelberg, New York.

Gary,

M. et a1. (Eds) (1977) Glossary of Geology. American Geological Institute, C.e.M. Methods rocks. Unpublished (1977) for recognition company report

Washington

D.C.

Gutjahr,

and

evaluation or

of

immature

and

mature

source

EP-47472

RKSR.0007.76

Hobson,

G.D. Ed. (1980) Development in Petroleum Applied Science Publishers (art. by Alger,R.P.)

Geology -2. Ltd. London.

29 -

Hoogkamer,P.J.C. (1979) - Stratigraphic evaluation SW-Ireland. Unpublished company report

of the Northern EP-51668

Porcupine

Basin,

offshore

Hoogkamer,P.J.C., Prins,B. and Slissli,P.E. - Stratigraphy of Offshore Expl. Well Petro Dev. Co. Teoranta, Ireland. Unpublished company report EP-49357

(1978) 35/13-1,

Irish

Shell

Juhasz, 1. (1978) - The use of wireline logs in sedimentary geology, Unpublished company report EP-49331 or RKGR.OO17.78

a concise

overview.

Juhasz, 1. (1978) - Log analysis of source rocks. An introduction to the use of wireline logs in the recognition and evaluation of source rocks. Unpublished company report EP-49977 or RKSR.OO33.78

KSEPL (1979) - Instructions for taking, handling and transport


petrophysical and related analyses. Instruction Manual 1 (third revision). Unpublished company report RKMR.OO18.79 Lapr~, J.F. (1975) - Lithology from geologists.

of cores

for

logs:

some basic

data

and a bag of tricks

for

Unpublished Handout Geological Seminar (KSEPL)


Lynch,
-

(1964) Formation Evaluation.


E.J. Weatherhill, Inc., Tokyo and Harper & Row, New York, Evanston &

John

London.
Mabillard, J.E. and Corbin, S.G. (1983) - Oman guide to wellsite geology.
Unpublished company report EP-59084

Majewske, O.P. (1969) Recognition of Invertebrate Fossil Sections. E.J.Brill, Leiden, The Netherlands.

Fragments

in Rocks

and Thin

Meyer, B.L. and Nederlof, M.H. (1976) - Recognition of Source Rocks on Wireline Logs.
Unpublished company report EP-47649

Meyer, B.L. and Nederlof, M.H. (1984) - Identification of Source Rocks on Wireline Logs by Density/
Resistivity and Sonic Transit Time/Resistivity Crossplots. The American Association of Petroleum Geologists Bulletin,

vol.68, no.2, p. 121-129.

- 30 -

Moore, P.F. and Gigon, W.O. / Revised by Dorsman (1964) - Terms and symbols for the description of carbonate rocks.
Unpublished company report EP-33671 (revised)

Moore, R.C. (Ed.) (1964) - Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology. Part C.1 and C.2 The Geological Society of America and The University of Kansas New York. Murray, J.W. (1973) - Distribution and Ecology of Living Heinemann Educational Books, London.

Press,

Benthonic

Foraminiferids.

Nagtegaal, P.J.C. (1974) - Selected Gamma Ray Log Patterns Representing Siliciclastic Depositional Sequences and Reservoirs, NW Borneo. Unpublished company report EP-45588.

NAM BV
- Petroleum Engineering Operations Unpublished company report. Pirson, S.J. (1983) -.Geologic Well Gulf Publishing Postuma, J.A. - Manual Elsevier Procedures Manual.

Log Analysis. Co., Houston,

London,

Paris,

Tokyo.

(1971) of Planktonic Foraminifera. Publishing Co., Amsterdam,

London,

New York.

Racz,L.G., Hoogkamer,P.J.C. and Hoffmann,R.E. (1983) - Pliensbachian Stratigraphy in Central Morocco.


(An example Unpublished of carbonate deposition) company report EP-58930

Reading, H.G. (Ed.) (1978) - Sedimentary Environments and Facies. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford, Ross, W.C. (1983) - Depositional

London,

Edinburgh,

Melbourne

sequence

Analysis

with

an Example

from

the Baltimore

Canyon.
Unpublished Shell Oil Co. report; EP-59459.

Rutten, K.W. (1981) - A review of logging tools and interpretation. Unpublished Shell handout. Course E1.04. Rutten, K.W. (1981) - Wire line log response in Carbonates and Evaporites. Unpublished Shell handout. Course E1.00. Rutten, K.W. (1981) - Wireline log response in Clastic Sediments. Unpublished Shell handout. Course El.00.

31

Rutten, K.W. (1981) - Geological aspects of modern wire line Unpublished Expl. Seminar handout. Schlumberger Ltd. (1971) - Fundamentals of Dipmeter Interpretation. Schlumberger Ltd., New York.

log interpretation.

Schlumberger Ltd. (1972) - Log Interpretation. Volume 1 - Principles.


Schlumberger Ltd., New York.

Schlumberger Ltd. (1977) - Services Catalog. Schlumberger Ltd., New York. Schlumberger Ltd. (1981) - Dipmeter Interpretation. Volume Schlumberger Ltd., New York.

1 - Fundamentals.

Shell Int. Petro Mij. (EP/13 & EP/24)

(1975) - REGEO: Computer Handling of Regional Geological Unpublished company report EP-434731 (Additiona~ Corrections: January 1977) Int. Petro Mij. (1976) - Standard Legend. Unpublished company report. Int. Petro Mij. (EP/121) (1984) - EPIPAL User Documentation. Part I : Data Preparation Guide for EPIPAL Part II : Species Tables and Data Display Guide Unpublished company report EP-61150 I & II. Int. Petro Mij. (1985) - Operational Geology. Handouts of the course E104.

Data.

Shell

Shell

for EPIPAL.

Shell

Stainforth, R.M. et al (1975) - Cenozoic Planktonic Foraminiferal Zonation Index Forms. The Univ. of Kansas Pal. Contr. Article 62. Swanson, R.G. (1981) - Sample Examination Manual. Methods in Exploration Series,

and Characteristics

of

AAPG

Tulsa

Oklahoma

74101,

USA.

Taylor, J.C.M. (1977) - Sandstones as reservoir rocks. in Development of Petroleum Geology, Vail,P.R. et al (1977) - Seismic Stratigraphy

Vol.

1.

and Global

Changes

of Sea Level.

AAPG Memoir 26 pp. 83-97. (PALLAB 2255)

Wagner, C.W. (1964) Foraminifera, report

32

Manual of Larger
company

Generic

Description

and

Stratigraphic

Value. Unpublished

EP-36421

Wagner, C.W. (1983) Carbonate Sedimentary Unpublished company

Geology in Exploration. report RKER.82.088 (KSEPL)

Appendices

General

Appendix
TIME-STRATIGRAPHIC TABLE

Gen.1

GENERAL CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATIONUSED IN NORTHAMERICA 1.) HO


PS $1 S'Cilian N ml!,af'\ alabnan CB ~'lIcenlla~ anch..... M Inl n rt nl n rrava Ian Lan hliln ur Ian '9a
.&.qUltanlan

MAIN OROGENIC PHASES

."

ISOTOPIC ..GEm

i
UJ

OUATERNARY ~00

i i

Holocene Pleistocene

Holocene

OUATERNARY

PleIstocene

Pasadentan 1
2.8 2.8 5.2
-2.8

I,ocene ! U Upper (NeogeneilO


r I

t'ocene N lH U Miocene

Wallact'lian Rhodanlan Attlcan Slynan

0 "-2.8

Ti

TU!

MIocene

MI

}~
s:
24

0
NN OU TERTIARY TT

Chattlan Oligocene Lower (Palaeogene) TL OL


Rupehan

CH RP LF LT yp TERTIARY

saVlan
Oligocene Pyreneean Eocene

Lattorflan
I

Z
LU U

}! ,,
I'T1

P"abor"an IBarton'an\ PR
Eocene

37

i
I

EO

LutetJan

Ypresran PC

Paleocene

Landen,al1(Thanet,an) IN Mont,an MT Danian 1~ OA Maastrichtian Campanian MA CA SA

53.5 Paleocene laramide 65

Senonian

SE

Upper 12

Santontan Coru8clan Turonian

KU CO TR CE

Gulflan

} Sub-Hercynian
96

CRETACEOUS KK

Cenomanian

Albian11,
Apllan BarremIan

AB AP BR HT VA BE y,

CRETACEOUS

Austnan (Oregonian)

lower

Ie

KL Neocomtan NC

Hautenvian Valanginian Berriasian

Comanchean

126 m )to :0 r-

0 NN 0::1;
(f) JURASSIC' LU JJ

Tithonian Upper!'

TI
91

I !
I

}
Upper
JURASSIC Middle

-< :>
r\)

Late

K,mme,,",

(Nevadan)

Z m

143

JU

Kimmeridgian Olfordlan Callovian

KI
OX CN BT BJ AA TC PB 8M HE RH NO CR TRIASSIC LA

I MlddleB' !

JM

Bathonian BaJocian Aalenian Toarcian Pliensbachian Sinemunan Hettan Ian Rhaetian

::I;

178 Lower

I
TRIASSIC' 111' RR

LowerB

JL

!
Upper rr.U) RU

212 Upper Early KImmerian

Nonan Carnian ladinian

Middle lower

'10M) RM '1oLt RL

Am"an !1J'rglonanl A.N SkylhlAn(Wertelllan) S~ T aTtanan TA

Middle Lower Palatine (Pfalzlan! Ochoan 247

Upper

PU

Kazanian Kungurian

KA KG PERMIAN Guadalup,an Saallan (Appalachian) 270

PERMIAN~I.I
pp Lower PL Sakmarian SR Artinskian AT

Leonardian

(.)

Wolfcampian

Orenburgian Upper CU z (/) Stephanian ST Gzehan Moscovian Bashlunan Namurian.~ NM Namunan.\ Visean

OR GZ PENNSYLVANIAN MO BA NA VI TO MISSISSIPPIAN

Virgilian Missourian Desmolneaian Derryan (Atokan) Morrowan Erzgeblrglan (Old Wichita) Chesterian.
Sudetlan

< :> ::tJ en (') :> Z

289

0
N CM

I
Asturian (Arbuckle) Young Wichita

m :0 (')

ON Q.
LU

CARBONIFEROUS"
CC

Middle

.; u;

I'll

Westphalian

WP

-< Z );

341

<

Lower

CL

Meramecian Osagean

-I
<
Q. Upper OU

Dmantian

01
Tournaisian Famennian Frasnian Givetian FA F8 GI

Kinderhookian Bradfordian Chautauquan Senecan Erian CoUYlnlan(Eifelian) CV DEVONIAN DD Coblencian Lower OL CI Siegenian Gedinnian SG GO Emsian ES Ulsterian

Bretonian Acadian

367

Middle DEVONIAN

OM

Mid Devonian 396

........ CD If) N 0> UJ C)

Erian Ardennian 1 416

P.T.C.

......... Bretonian

I
I

Upper

DU

Famennian Frasnian Gi\/etlan

FA FS GI

Bradfordian Chautauquan Senecan Erian

Acadian

367 -

0 N ON

DEVONIAN

Middle

DM Couvlruan (Elfelian) CV

.............Mid De\/onian

DEVONIAN DD
Coblenclan Lower DL CI
I

Emslan
Slegenian

ES SG GD Ardennian Ulsterian ....,.....Erlan

396

I
tl. SalopIan SILURIAN'
IGOTHLANDIAN) SS

Gedmnlan

Pridolian SL Ludlovian Wenlockian

PD LD WN SILURIAN

f-- 416 -

Cayugan

LU

Niagaran

-I
tl.
Llandoyerlan LO Medinan Taconian Ashg tllian AS Cincinnatian 0 r m 0 0 Z ); Z

-446-

CaradocIan

CD

ORDOVICIAN 00

lIandedlan

LE ORDOVICIAN

Champlamian

lIanvltnlarl

LI

Arenigian Tremadocian 1

AR

Canad,""
TM
I

Upper

(CUi EU

Potsdam.an

PO

Trempealeal.uan ~I Franconian ~I

Sardinian

-509-

IDresbachian

524

Middle CAMBRIAN

ICMJEM

Acadian

AC CAMBRIAN

Albertan

11

EE

Lower

ICLI EL

Georgian

GE

Waucoban

I-PRE-CAMBRIAN (P) PE Pre.Cambnan Phases

575

REMARKS

ON "TIME-STRATIGRAPHIC

TABLE" recording system)


(Lyon,

(Names and codes in brackets are synonyms

used only in the conventional

Tremadocian!Salmian): Cambrian by various

Cambrian-Ordovician authors.

transitional

beds attributed

to the

10 11

Subdivision "Gault"

acc. to "Colloque

sur Ie Cretace The "Vraconian" sur Ie Cretace of the Danian

inf~rieur"

19631.

of earlier authors, acc. to "Colloque

is late Albian superieur

in age. IDijon, 19591.

In French usage, Gothlandian and Ordovician commonly grouped as Silurian(OGI. Here, Anglo-American definition of Silurian!SS) ::: Gothlandian is adhered to. Subdivision acc. to "Report of the Commission on the stratigraphy of the Carbon. iferous of the National Committee of Soviet geologists" (Heerlen, 1958J. In WeStern Europe the Carboniferous is subdivided into Lower Carboniferous Dinantian) and Upper Carboniferous (= Silesianl. ('" 4 In Western Europe Namurian(NM) comprises Namurian "A", "B" and "C", When used in its original sense Namurian(NA) corresponds to Namurian and "B", "A" Schenck world: et 81. (1941,.BuII.A.A.P.G., Upper Permian Middle Permian Lower Permian vol.25) proposed a "Standard Permian" of the

12 13 14

Subdivision

franc;ais"

The tim~stratigraphic

position

has not vet been established. on

Subdivision ace. to "Proceedings of the 3rd session in Bern of the Committee Mediterranean Neogene stratigraphy" (19641. Ref. BuII.Geol.Soc.Am., After Stille (1924,19401 1943-1954, vol.53-65. (19471.

15 16 17

and Umbgrove

{ {

Djulfian Penjabian Guadalupian Artinskian Sakmarian into Lower Permian Tartarian). (SakmarianNote'

Ref. Contributions to the Geologic Time Scale f1978, AAPG, Studies in Geology no. 61.

In European usage the Permian Artinskian) and Upper Permian

is subdivided (Kungurian-

For computer-filing purposes some names and codes are only of local value and should be avoided as much as possible, also since often a rock-stratigraphic interpretation is included, e.g, Portlandian(PT), Urgonian(UGJ. Continental or transitional facies, straddling internationally accepted boundaries, often received formal names. Due to the controversial units their use should be avoided as much as possible, e.g.: Downtonian Strunian Autunian Purbeckian Wealden Garumnian Tongrian (DW) (SU) (AU) (PKI (WE! (GA! (TGJ Silurian Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper time-stratigraphic nature of these

The terms Rotliegendes, Zechstein, Buntsandstein, Muschelkalk discarded as they apply to rock-stratigraphic units only. Subdivisions 8 acc. to "Coltoque International du Jurassique"

and Keuper

have been

(Luxembourg,

1962).

The terms "Lias" and "Dogger" do not coincide with "Lower Jurassic" and "Middle Jurassic", respectively. Lias comprises Hettangian-Toarcian, Dogger coincides with Aalenian-Callovian. The terms "MaIm" and "Upper Jurassic" are synonyms, Precise definition of Kimmeridgian and Tithonian is still lacking. Under the presently preferred interpretation of Tithonian, the Portlandian would correspond to the upper part of the Tithonian IHallam, 1966, Earth Science Review!.

Devonian Carboniferous Jurassic Jurassic Cretaceous Eocene

Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower

Devonian Carboniferous Permian Cretaceous Cretaceous

Eocene
Lower Oligocene Ci) 0) ID I\) ... CI) "N

SHELL

INTERNATIONALE

PETROLEUM

MAATSCHAPPIJ

B_V- - THE HAGUE,

THE NETHERLANDS

MARCH

1980

Appendix Gen.2

STRATIGRAPHIC

TERMINOLOGY

Rock -stratig Units


(Litho-stratigraphic Group Formation Member Lentil. Bed. Example: Rotliegend

raphic
Units)

Sio-stratigraphic Units
(Faunal. Zone Subzone Zonule Floral Units)

Ti me-stratigraphic Units
(Chrono-stratigraphic Erothem System Subsystem Series Stage Units)

Geological Units
(Geochronological Era Period SubperiOd Epoch Age,Subepoch Example: Cenozoic Tertiary

Time
Units)

Tongue Layer Examp.le: Group Globorotalia Globigerina Bolivina :3 Zone 12 Subzone 4 Zonule

Example: Cenozoic Tertiary Lower Eocene Lutetian Tertiary

Siochteren Sandstone Formation Lower Slachteren Sandstone Member

Early Eocene

Tertiary

Lutetian Definition: Geological time units are abstract, non- material units used to subdivide the history of the earth into discrete time intervals. Geological time units are defined by time-stratigrophic unita in their type area. Geographic and other names used for geological time units are Identical with those of the corresponding time-atrotigraphic units: the Devonian Systern was deposited during the Devonian Period.

Definition: A rock- stratigraphic unit is a subdivision of the rock sequence distinguished and delimited on the basis of lithological cri teria and its position in the sequence. A formal rock-stratigraphic unit consists of a geo. graphical nome combined with a descriptive lithological term or with the appro. priate rank term alone. Capitalization of the first letters of the composing warda is recommended.

Definition: A bio-stratigraphic unit is a body of rock strata characterized by its can tent of fossils contemparaneous with the deposition of the strata. The nome of a zone. subzone or zonule consists of the name(s) of the characteriatic fossil or fossils combined with the appropriate rank term.

Definition: A time-stratigraphic unit is a subdivision of rocks considered solely as the record of a specific interval of geological time. Time-stratigraphic units are defined by on actual section of strata in a type' area.

( See Time-stratigraphic Tobie, 25.42.90)

The stratigraphic terminology is largely based on the "Code of Stratigraphic Nomenclature" of the American Association of Petroleum Geologists (1970). However, it should be realized that, although widely accepted, this code still contains some controversial points.

I") "CD I") N 0> co (!)

Appendix Gen.3

FIRST AND SECOND ORDER GLOBAL TRANSGRESSION / REGRESSIONCYCLES IN THE PHANEROZOIC

1ST-ORDER CYCLES

2ND-ORDER CYCLES (SUPERCYCLES)

0 100 en a: i:5 >~200


z 0 =:i ..... ~300
~~LU en

TRANSGR.

REGRESSION

PERIODS

EPOCHS
PLIO-MIST MIOCENE OLIGOCENE
EOCENE

-TRANSGRESSION

REGRES.TIONS
!1:rd
Tc

NOTA-

TERTIARY

---

-----------

-Ti!

.TaKb

CRETACEOUS

E M L

Ka J TR
L P

100 en a: i:5 >200 u..


0

JURASSIC TRIASSIC
PERMIAN PENNSYLVANIAN
MISSISSIPPIAN E E
E

E M-L
L

en z 0 =:i .....

300 ::E
LU

::E
i=
~0 ..... 0 LU

~400 2

DEVONIAN
SILURIAN
~ORDOVICIAN

M-L

D-M

::E

i=

400 S:2
L ~M O-S 0 ..... 0 LU

500 CAMBRIAN

E
M E PRECAMBRIAN

l
C-O

500

(MODIFIED) AFTER VAIL ET AL.1977

CI) "' ,.., N 0> II) (!)

Appendix Gen. 4

GLOBAL TRANSGRESSION

/ REGRESSION CYCLES IN THE MESOZOIC a CENOZOIC


(modified ofter ROSS, 1983) ~ ~ CI')
w

GEOLOGIC en en c :r 2..g a: n. ~w

AGES

MAGNETIC
REVERSALS

STANDARD AGES

!
0

() ;:t: >w cr z -< 0...

OUA TERNARY PLIOCENE MESSINIAN I-

w ::Ii :J Z 0

tr

(JV,I ;:~ we %2:

< 0 ~ 0.

"0 <z ~<

TRANSGRESSION

-..
REGRESSION

5
w Z w (.) 0 0 0 i

TORTONIAN SERRAVALLIAN LANGHIAN vBURDIGALIAN ~AQUATANIAN

> . ,I cc

w Z ~W
(.)

0
0

:5

CHATTIAN
RUPELIAN

CJ

~:i
<

PRIABOLIAN w z w (J 0 w BARTONIAN 0 0

18

i
cc c(

LUTETIAN

YPRESIAN

-11=

W Z W (.) 0 c Q.

C( I>~cc cf

THANETIAN

-- I-

14

DANIAN MAASTRICHTIAN

iiii- 27 I~ 30

CAMPANIAN

SANTONIAN

w ... C[

I-

33

...

CONIACIAN

TURONIAN

- 34

en ;:) 0 w (,,) < IW a: (,,)

CENOMANIAN

ALBIAN

APTIAN

>... a: <II(
w

BARREMIAN

HAUTERIVIAN VALANGINIAN BERRIASIAN PORTLANDIAN w ... KIMMERIDGIAN

L =~jii_MID

M5
JoA11

MI5

c ...I OXFORDIAN

.
!!!!!

--

M2J

--1.125

CAllOVIAN

(,,)

~0 0

BA THONIAN

en en < a: ;:) ..,

i
BAJOCIAN AALENIAN
TOARCIAN > .... Ct <C w PLIENSBACHIAN

I . .
I

SINEMURIAN It) ...... CD ,.., N 0> II) (!) HETT "NGIAN TRIASSIC

Appendix

Gen. 5

CONVERSION

TABLE

(AFTER SCHLUMBERGER)

Depth

Temperature
OF 32 50

Pressure

Mud Weight
MPa
0 10 1.1

~m
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200 3400 3600 3800 4000 ~4200 4400 4600 4800 5000 5200 5400 ~5600 5800 6000 6200 6400 6600 6800 7000 7200 7400 7600 7800 8000 8200 8400 8600 8800 9000 9200 9400 9600 9800 10000 1m 0

~ft

2L
C 0 10

sqem 0 100

psi 0

atm
0

JL
ee
1.0

Ib
eu ft 62.4 64 66 68 70 72

Ib
gal 8.345 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 Il.!i 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 .900 17.5 18.0 .950 18.5 19.0 1.00 19.5 20.0 1.05 20.5 1.08
62.43 Ib/ft3

ft .433 .450

1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

100 2000 200 4000 300 400

20 30 100 40 50 60 150 70 80 200 90 100 110 ~800 250 120 130 140 ~300 150 160 170 350 180 1300 190 200 400 210 1500 220 450 230 240 250 500 260 270 280 550 2000 290 300 1800 1600 1400 1100 1200 900 600 700 400 500 200 300

20 1.2

.500

74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 90 92 94 96 98 100 102 104

30

6000

40 50

.550

1.3

7000 8000 9000 10000 11000 12000 13000 14000 15000 16000 17000 18000 19000 20000 21000 22000 23000 24000 25000 26000 27000 28000 29000 30000 31000 32000 33000

500 8000 600 10000

1.4 60 70 80 1.6 90 1.7 1000 100 1.5

.600

700 800

.650 "(j) .e, E Q) '6 (!)


Q)

12000

.700

900 1000 14000

106 108 110 112 114 116 .750

t/J en Q)

16000

1100

110

1.8

.800

18000

1200

120 1.9 130 2.0

ct C> c: '6 c: 0

118 120 122 124 126 128 130 132 134 136 138 140 142

cf/)

0 () .850

1300 20000 1400 22000

140

1500 1600

150 160

2.1

1700

24000 1700 26000 1800 170

2.2

180

2.3

144 146 148

1900 190 28000 1900 200 2000 2100


psi

2.4

150 152 154 156

30000

"2:5 em x 14.22
1 glee

C
of

= (OF =

32) x 5/9

(OC x 9/5) + 32

atm = kg/sq em x .968 atm : psi x .068


psi

= kg/sq
=

Mpa x 145.038

(U.S.) = 8.345Ib/gal psi/ft = .433 x glee

= 3.28

ft

= Ib/ga1/19.27

= Ib/ft3/144

.\!? ~0> CD

(.!)

Appendix

Gen.6

ALPHABET

RADIO CALLWORDS

A B C D E F
G

ALFA BRAVO
CHARLIE

DELTA

ECHO
FOXTROT

GOLF HOTEL
INDIA

H
I

JULIET
KILO LIMA

K L

M N
0

MIKE

NOVEMBER
OSCAR PAPA

P
Q

QUEBEC

ROMEO
SIERRA TANGO
UNIFORM VICTOR

S T u

W -

WHISKY
-

X - X
,.. .... IX)
I') N en ID (!)

RAY

Y Z

YANKEE

ZULU

1. Preparation

For Duties

Appendix

1.8.4

RECO~~fENDED EQUIPMENT FOR A PALAEONTOLOGICAL LABORATORY

I.
II.

MICROSCOPES & ACCESSORIES

LABORATORY MOVABLES & CONSTRUCTIONS

III.

SMALL LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

IV.

CONSUMABLES

V.
VI.

CHEMICALS

MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

VII.

STATIONARY

VIII.

LIBRARY

"IC 10 I'\J a> CD (!)

Appendix page 2

1.8.4

1.

MICROSCOPES

& ACCESSORIES

Microscopes

"WILD" stereomicroscope M 5 A "WILD" stereomicroscope "WILD" stereomicroscope M 5 A M 3

Pol

(for palaeontological picking and cutting description)


polarizing attachment)

NIKON

SMZ-2

(with

or without

ZEISS

Microscope Cold light

lamp(s) source ("schott Kaltlichtquelle KL 150 B") roll film and/or polaroid)

Microphotosystem Object Picking Swing-arm micrometer(s) table(s) stand(s)

(for stereomicroscopes;

(for core

examination)

(,. 01 II) N UI (I) "is

Appendix page 3

1.8.4

II.

LABORATORY MOVABLES AND CONSTRUCTIONS

Bag sealer, Balance, Chemical Core Cutting Cutting Draining Drawing Drying Fire First

electrical, simple store model

for

sealing

plastic

bags

(electrical)

photography machine and

installation

(for

rock machine glass

lapping

rock

board table rack,

slides)

to be installed

above

the

sink-assembly dry a first chemical aid type handbook

extinguisher(s), aid kit, industrial,

a multi-purpose including

Fluoroscope Forklift truck, incl. Battery charger

Fume cupboard,
Grinding machine

also suitable for palynological sample preparation

Hot plates

large (approx. small (approx.

(rectangular) 50 x 30 cm) (square) model

model

for

drying

wash-residues

for

preparing

thin

sections

20 x 20 cm)

Lay-out Light Order Oven Pallet

table table picking truck, dry incl. Battery charger

vacum mover

Photography Plugging Sample Scanning

equipment machine

rock

crusher electron microscopy equipment

Settling tank
Sink assembly Storage racks

Trolley Type

collection cabinet(s)

(Ultrasonic sample cleaner)

~
"cD rt) N 0> <D ~

Appendix

1.8.4

page 4

III.

SHALL Aprons. Basins

LABORATORY acid-proof enamelled.

EQUIPHENT

flat bottom

- diam. - diam. with spout. spout.

12 cm. height 24 cm. height small model 600 cc

3.5 cm 6.5 cm

Basins Beakers Bottles

porcelain. glass.

round

bottom with

graduated

250 cc and

Dropping

- plastic. with leak-proof dropping with snap cap. approx. 50 cc - glass. with pipet approx. 50 cc stopper

closure

and rubber

nipple.

- glass. for delivering drop by drop. approx.

indicator 50 cc

solution chemicals:

Bottles Bottles Bottles


Brushes
Brushes Burners

Plastic. Reagent.

narrow wide

mouth. screw capped. for storing 100 cc. 500 cc and 1000 cc with stopper: 250 cc and

mouth

1000 cc 1000 cc

Wash.

plastic. small

with

nozzle

assembly: (03) and

250 cc and large (12)

microscope. for lenses. - alcohol.

(00). medium

blower with

type wicks

spare

Burners
Casseroles. Coats

Bunsen
porcelain. fire-proof. men's approx. style 130 cc style metal

- laboratory.

white:

and women's

Comparators:

grainsize and sorting: and photographic paper with spout:

plastic

(transparent).

Cylinders Diamond Ejectors Examining Examining Face

- graduated. pointed pencils

10 cc.

100 cc (and 1000

cc)

trays trays

- cutting. - picking. face


: - with

five round

cell model model with

(with spout

emptying

stand)

shields. hole

full plates

Finger

3 depressions. 9 depressions

and

- with Funnels - glass


: diam. : diam.

35 mm and diam. 100 mm 35 mm and diam. 100 mm


approx. 15 x 15 cm

Fupnels - plastic
Gauzes. with

asbestos

centre.

Geological Glass

hammers recommended size 40 x 40 x 1 cm

plates.

G) 0> <0 I\) (>I (XI ...... I\) 0

Appendix
page 5

1. 8.4

Gloves - laboratory,
and acids

"rubber"

resistant

to a wide

range

of chemicals

Goggles
Hand

safety, which can be worn over glasses


lOx, single lensand/or bar and/or rubber model, model, approx. approx. 150 cc 1500 cc English scale double lens type

lenses,

Magnet(s), Measuring Molds Mortars

horseshoe tape,

type with

roll-type: embedding, porcelain

metric silicone

- cutting

& pestles,

-.small - larger

Needle Needles, Picking Pipets, Rock

holders for needle needles measuring chart type, (Geol. capacity Soc. Am.) 10 cc holder

color

Sample Scale Sieves

splitter for geologist - table, (0. Dreher) (20, 35 and 100 mesh), with cover

set of 3 sieves

and receiver Sieves


-

washing:
iron,

20 mesh,
electrical,

(100 mesh)
for repairing

and

200 mesh
sieves

Soldering

Spatulas, Spatulas

double - spoon

end, type,

semi-micro, single

acid-proof

end, micro and figures, to construct stamps

Stamp box, with isolated for stamping labels Stand for Tragacanth, big model - wooden, rods, H2O

letters

and HCI card-board flat, approx. core boxes 18 x 150 mm 5 rom 6 rom of sedimentary

Staplers, Stirrers Stirring

for closing disposable,

glass

- length - length

150 rom, diam. 250 rom, diam.

"Tape worm(s)", guide for lithological description rocks (tape model) by KEMPTER, E.H.K. Thermometer(s) Test Test Test Timer Tongs tubes, tube tube - laboratory, chemical, approx. -10 to 250C

130 x 14 rom

corks racks, wooden, for 12 test tubes

- signal

interval, length

range approx.

0-60 min. 22 em

- crucible,

N "'CD N '" 0> <D C)

Appendix

1.8.4

page 6

Transparancies

of

- distribution

charts

- in meters,

1:2500 & 1 :1000 1:2500 1:1000 &

- in feet, - stratigraphical well (see Appendix 3.3.2) data sheet

Triebel Tripods,

trays for burners, diam. with round top, height approx. 12 cm approx. 21 cm,

Tweezers, Watch

stainless steel, length approx. pointed mouth types diam. fine approx. 60 mID and

115 mID, flat mouth 100 mID

and

glasses: very

Whetstone,

0> ID I\) UI QI ...... I\) I\)

\0-

Appendix

1.8.4

page 7

IV.

CONSUMABLES

Bags
Bags
-

linen, plastic

warp

twisted,

size

15 x 25 cm 8 cm, thickness
15 cm, thickness

(geochemical)

- 12 x
- 30 x

0.1 mm
0.1 mm

Boxes
Boxes Boxes

core,

cardboard wooden multiplex 107 x 33 x 12 cm for 9' core

- core, - photo,
-

Boxes
Boxes Boxes
Boxes

picking slide
wooden, recommended inside dimensions: 460 L x 210W x 320D mm plastic, capacity 100 slides

- sample, thin

section,
residue

- wash

Bulbs

- microscope powder,

lamp grit: 220, 320, 500, 800

Carborundum

Computer input sheets (EPIPAL)


Cover Diamond Filter Grinding Ice cups, Jars glasses, for picking slides

saw blades discs, disc paraffin, wide for preparation with plastic white, white, of Poly cap, blue blue Pol PS 230 size approx. 40 x 20 mm diam. 18.5 cm

glass,
-

mouth

recommended and yellow and yellow

Labels

sample;

- large: - small:

Lables Lens

- slide, tissues stock

self-adhesive,

for glass-slides

Materials

cards

Pellets
Plug bits Polishing Sample Sample powder (Tube SN02' cards sheets, for cutting-, sidewalland core samples REEK)

administration description

(see Appendices Slab trays,


-

3.2.1.3-3.2.1.5)

wooden

Slides
Slides Slides Slide Slide

Chapman

- glass - picking trays, trays cardboard - map form core 60% Sn, 40% Pb, diam. approx. 4 mm

Solder,
N , ~

colophony big

Staples, Wire

~ ~ N ~ ~ ~

netting,

20 mesh,

100 mesh,

200 mesh

Appendix

1.8.4

page 8

v.

CHEMICALS

Aceton
Alcohol, Alizarin Aniline Araldite Barium chloride industrial Red., paint, dry powder

Bees wax

Benzine
Bromoform Canada (3.9

2.60)

balsam

Carbondisulfide Carbon tetrachloride Chloroform Chlorothene Distilled Hardener Hydrochloric Hydrogene Lakeside Methylene Nitric Oleum Poly acid (36%) water

peroxide no. 70

blue

acid caryophyllum

Pol PS 230,

plus

catalyser

Potassium Potassium Quaternary

ferricyanide sulphocyanate O.

Silvernitrate Sulphuric Teepol acid non foaming)

(cone.,

Tragacanth

0> <D f\) VI CI> ........ N ~

CD

Appendix page 9

1.8.4

VI.

MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

Broom
Brushes
for cleaning for cleaning for cleaning table wash sieves basins (1" flat)

test-tubes

Bucket
Can-opener Clothes pegs, wooden

Dusters
Dustpan Dustbin, Dexion & brush with angle lid and pedel & shelves, roll for building storage racks

Extension Flash

flex,

type type

light,

non battery

Kleenex
Magnifying Packing Sponges, Spoons, Sprayers, Tool kit, glass, with handle

paper "scotch plastic for washing containing: samples 1 hammer, nail 1 "waterpump", 1 screwdriver, pulling pliers, small type adjustable bright" and common type

type

1 1
1 1 1 1 1

1 watchmakers

" "

, medium , star-type
screwdrivers set (COLEY)

waterproof emery cloth junior saw, bow type "combination" pliers set of files (small) hobby knife pro pincers

Towels
Tubing, plastic, a few metres

Twine Vim
Wash leather gloves

Working

(\j
"-

en N '" m (!)

Appendix 1.8.4 page 10

VII.

STATIONARY Ball points, black, pocket wallpaper, pencils, red type and deskand blue set type, of 12 small and big and blue

Calculator, Calenders, Carbon Coloured Clips Diary Drawing Drawing Envelopes, Field Files Graphic Glue, Ink Ink Letter Lifax Markers paper Lero, books pins set,

black

fold

back

incl. various

triangles, sizes, incl.

drawing airmail

pen

set,

lettering

set

("Leroy")

Pritt-stick, black

Velpon,

Bisonkit

India,

pad embossing booklets, tool with : (DYMO M-20), alphabets and with refills big + small, yellow and black orange and red spare tapes, black, blue & red

clips

felttip

waterproof, fluorescent: sizes

Note Paper Paper blocks. various (also for cutting machine

closing

wash

residue

bags)

Pencils, Pencil
Penknives, Perforaters Plastic

HB, H., sharpener


scalpel

2H
type, and with replaceable model blades

: 2 holes spray (krylon) 00 and

4 holes

Rapidographs, Razor Ring Rubber Rulers: blades files, bands, steel

02

with

alphabets

and

refills ones

small and

and broad plastic

G) a> ID N 01 CD "N a>

Appendix

1.8.4

page 11

Scissors

Staples Staplers
Stamp pad ink

Tab cards

Tape

self adhesive, common type, Scotch invisible and plastic


(isolation) tape paper

Tracing

Type writer(s) Wax pencils

l"N ..... CD N '" CI> CD 'C!)

Appendix

1.8.4

page 12

VIII.
A.

LIBRARY
Publications

ASQUITH, E. - 1982 Basic Well Log Analysis AAPG, Tulsa, Oklahoma.

for Geologists.

BECKMANN, H. - 1976 Geological Prospecting of Petroleum. (Geology of Petroleum vol. 2). Ferdinand Enke publishers Stuttgart. BLATT, H., MIDDLETON, G. & MURRAY, R. - 1980 Origin of Sedimentary Rocks. Prentice-Hall, Inc., New Yersey. BOLTOVSKOY, E. & WRIGHT, R. - 1976 Recent Foraminifera. Dr. W. Junk b.v., Publishers The Hague. COOK, H.E., HINE, A.C. & MULLINS, H.T. - 1983 Platform ma~gin and Deep Water Carbonates. SEPM. Short Course No. 12, SEPM, Tulsa. J.R. & STANTON, R.J. - 1981 Paleocology, Concepts and Applications. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York.

DODD,

ELF-AQUITAINE - 1982 (REECKMANN, A. & FRIEDMAN, G.M.) Exploration for Carbonate Petroleum Reservoirs. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York. ELLIS, B.F. & MESSINA, A.R. - 1965-1967 Catalogue of Index Larger Foraminifera, American Museum Nat. Hist., New York. ELLIS, B.F. et ala - 1968-1969 Catalogue of Index Smaller Foraminifera, American Museum Nat. Hist., New York. FICHTER, L.S. et ala - 1979 Ancient Environments (Interpretation Burgess Publishing Co. Minnesota. FLUGEL, E. - 1982 Microfacies Analysis of Limestone. Springer Verlag, Berlin, Heidelberg, FRAKES, L.A. - 1979 Climates throughout Elsevier Scientific

vol.

1-3.

vol.

1-3.

of Geologic

History).

New York,

Geological Time. Publ. Comp., Amsterdam.

Q m ~ ~ ~ m , N m

Appendix

1.8.4

page 13

FRIEDMAN, G.M. & SANDERS, J.E. - 1978 Principles of Sedimentology. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York. GARY, M. et al. (Eds.) 1977 Glossary of Geology. American Geological Institute,

Washington

D.C.

GIGNOUX, M. - 1950 Stratigraphic Geology. (English translation edition, by Woodford, G.G. - 1955). W.H. Freeman & CO., San Francisco HALLAM, A. - 1981 Facies Interpretation and the Stratigraphic W.H. Freeman & Co. San Francisco. HAM, W.E. (Ed.) - 1962 Classification of Carbonate Rocks. AAPG Memoir 1, Tulsa, Oklahoma, USA.

from

the 4th French

Record.

HARLAND, W.B. et ale - 1982 A Geological Time Scale. Cambridge University Press. HAQ, B.U. & BOERSMA, A. - 1978 Introduction to Marine Micropaleontology. Elsevier Scientific Publishing Co., Amsterdam.

HEDBERG, H.D. (Ed.) - 1976 International Stratigraphic Guide. A guide to stratigraphic classification,

terminology,

and procedure.

John Wiley

&

Sons, New York, London, Sydney, Toronto.


1976, 1978

HEDLY, R.H. & ADAMS, C.G. (Eds.) - 1974, Foraminifera. Vol. 1, 2 and 3. Academic Press, London, New York. HOROWITZ, A.S. & POTTER, P.E. Introductory Petrography Springer-Verlag, Berlin, - 1971 of Fossils. Heidelberg,

New York.

Ku}IMEL, B. & RAUP, D. (eds.) - (latest edition) Handbook of Palaeontological Techniques. W.H. Freeman & Co., San Francisco and London. LOGAN, B.W. et ale (Eds.) - 1970 Carbonate Sediments and Environments. AAPG Mem. 13, Tulsa. LAPORTE, L.F. (Ed.) - 1974 Reefs in Time and Space. SEPM Spec. Publ. 18.

N , ~ ~ N $ ~

Appendix

1.8.4

page 14

LYNCH,

E.J. 1964 Formation Evaluation. John Weatherhill Inc.,

Tokyo.

MAJEWSKE, O.P. - 1969 Recognition of Invertebrate Fossil Fragments Thin Sections. E.J. Brill, Leiden, The Netherlands.

in Rocks

and

~~TTER, A. & TUCKER,

M.E. - 1977 Modern and Ancient Lake Sediments. Blackwell Scientific Publications,

Oxford.

MAYER-GURR, A. - 1976 Petroleum Engineering. (Geology of Petroleum, vol. 3). Ferdinand Enke Publishers, Stuttgart. MONTY, C. (Ed.) - 1981 Phanerozoic Stromatolites. Springer-Verlag, Berlin.

Case Histories.

MOORE, R.C. (Ed.) 1952-1981 Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology. Part A-X. of Kansas The Geological Society of America and The University Press, New York. (Office International de Librairie, Avenue Marnix 30, 1050 Bruxelles). MORKHOVEN, F.P.C.M. van - 1962-1963 Post-Palaeozoic Ostracoda. Their Morphology, Taxonomy and Economic Elsevier Publishing Co., Amsterdam.

Use.

Vol.

I & II.

MURRAY, J.W.

1973
Foraminiferids.

Distribution and Ecology of Living Benthonic Heinemann Educational Books, London.

PAULING,

L.

1949
to Descriptive Chemistry

General Chemistry. An Introduciton and Modern Chemical Theory. W.H. Freeman & Co., San Francisco.

PAYTON, Ch.E. 1977 Seismic Stratigraphy applications AAPG Memoir 26, Tulsa, Oklahoma.

to hydrocarbon exploration.

PETTIJOHN,

F.J.

1975
New York.

Sedimentary Rocks. Harper & Brothers,

PIRSON,

S.J.

1970
Texas.

Geologic Well Log Analysis. Gulf Publishing Co., Houston,

Q ~ W N ~ m , ~ 0

Appendix

1.8.4

page 15

POSTUMA, J.A. - 1971 Manual of Planktonic Foraminifera. Elsevier Publishing Co., Amsterdam, POTTER, P.E. et ale Sedimentology of Shale. Springer-Verlag, Berlin. PRAY,

London,

New York.

L.C. & MURRAY, R.C. - 1965 Dolomitization and Limestone Diagenesis, a Symposium. Soc. Econ. Pal. & Min. Special Publ. 13.

PURSER, B.H. - 1983 Sedimentation et Diagenese des Carbonates Institut Francais du Petrol.

veritiques

recents.

RAMSAY, A.T.S. (ed.) - 1977 Oceanic Micropalaeontology, Vol. 1 & 2. (Vol. 1 includes: "Mesozoic Planktonic Foraminifera, a world-wide review and analysis", by MASTERS, B.A.). Academic Press, London, New York, San Francisco. RAUP, D.M. & STANLEY, S.M. - 1971 Principles of Paleontology. W.H. Freeman & Co., San Francisco.

READING, H.G. (Ed.) - 1978 Sedimentary Environments and Facies. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford, Melbourne.

London,

Edinburgh,

RECKMANN, A. & FRIEDMAN, G.M. - 1982 (ELF-AQUITAINE) Exploration for Carbonate Petroleum Reservoirs. Elf Aquitaine. REINECK, H.E. & SINGH, I.B. - 1973 Depositional Sedimentary Environments Terrigenous Clastics). Springer-Verlag, Berlin, Heidelberg,

(with Reference New York.

to

RIGBY, J.K. & HAMBLIN, Wm. (Eds.) - 1972 Recognition of Ancient Sedimentary Environments. Soc. of Econ. Palaeontologists and Mineralogists. Special Publication no. 16. ROBASZYNSKI, F. & CARON, M. (Eds.) - 1979 Atlas de Foraminiferes Planctoniques du Cretace Moyen et Tethys). Cahiers de Micropaleontologie, 1 & 2 (1979) Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique, Paris.

(Mer Boreale

SCHAFER, C.T. & PELLETIER, B.R. - 1976 First International Symposium on Benthonic Foraminifera Continental Margins Maritime Sediments, Spec. Publ. no. Nova Scotia.

of 1, Halifax,

f"I') ...... CD I<') N 0> W (!)

Appendix

1.8.4

page 16

SCHOLLE, P.A. - 1979 A Color Illustrated Guide to Carbonate Rock Constituents, Textures, Cements and Porosities. AAPG Memoir 27, Rodgers Litho, Tulsa, Oklahoma. SCHOLLE, P.A. - 1979 A Color Illustrated Guide to Constituents, Textures, and Porosities of Sandstones and Associated Rocks. AAPG Memoir 28, Rodgers Litho, Tulsa, Oklahoma. SELLEY, R.C. Ancient Science - 1970 Sedimentary Paperbacks

Cements

Environments - A Brief Survey. Chapman and Hall, London.

SELLEY, R.C. - 1976 An Introduction Academic Press,

to Sedimentology. London, New York,

San Francisco.

STAINFORTH, R.M. et ale - 1975 Cenozoic Planktonic Foraminiferal Zonation and Characteristics of Index Forms. The Univ. of Kansas Pal. Contr. Article 62. SYKES, J.B. (Ed.) - 1976 The Concise Oxford Dictionary University Press, Oxford. TOOMEY, D.F. (Ed.) - 1981 European Fossil Reef Models. SEPM Spec. Publ. 30. VAN EYSINGA, F.W.B. (Comp.) Geological Time Table. Elsevier Scient. Publ. - 1975 Co., Amsterdam.

of Current

English.

VAN HOUTEN, F.B. (Ed.) - 1977 Ancient Continental Deposits. Benchmark Papers in Geology, 43, Dowden,

Hutckinson

& Ross.

VISSER, W.A. - 1980 Geological Nomenclature. Royal Geological and Mining Society of the Netherlands. Martinus Nijhoff, The Hague, Boston, London. WALKER, R.G. - 1980 Facies Models Reprinted with revisions from a serie of papers in Geoscience of Canada. 1976-1979, published by the Geological Association Hamilton, Ontario, Canada. WELLER, J.M. - 1960 Stratigraphic Principles and Practice. Harper & Brothers Publishers, New York.

Canada,

Q m w N ~ ,m ~ N

Appendix

1.8.4

page 17

WHALLEY, W.B. (Ed.) - 1978 Scanning Electron Microscopy in the Study Geo Abstracts, Norwich, England.

of Sediments.

WHITTAKER, A. (ed.) - 1985 Coring Operations. Procedures for Sampling and Analysis of Bottomhole and Sidewall Cores. D. Reidel Publishing Co. Dordrecht, Boston, Lancaster. WILSON, J.L. - 1975 Carbonate Facies Springer Verlag, WRAY,

in Geologic History. Berlin, Heidelberg, New York.

J.L. - 1977 Calcareous Algae. (Developments in Palaeontology and Stratigraphy, 4). Elsevier Scientific Publ. Co., Amsterdam, Oxford, New York.

ZACHARIASSE, W.J. et al. - 1978 Micropaleontological Counting Methods and Techniques - an exercise on an eight meters section of the Lower Pliocene of Capo Rossello, Sicily. Utrecht Micropalaeontological Bulletin nr. 17. Loonzetterij Abe, Hoogeveen, The Netherlands. ZENGER, D.H. et al. (Ed.) - 1980 Concepts and Models of Dolomitization. Soc. Econ. Pal. & Min. Spec. Publ. 28.

B.

Unpublished EP/13

Company

Reports

& EP/24 - 1975 (EP-43731) REGEO : Computer Handling of Regional Geological (Additional Corrections: January 1977).

Data.

EP/12.1 - 1984 (EP-61150 I & II) EPIPAL User Documentation Part I : Data Preparation Guide for EPIPAL Part II : Species Tables and Data Display Guide

for Palab.

MEYER, B.L. & NEDERLOF, M.H. - 1976 (EP-47649) Recognition of Source Rocks on Wireline Logs. MOORE, P.F. & GIGON, W.O. - 1964 (EP-33671) Terms and Symbols for the Description of Carbonate Rocks.
SHELL INT. PETR. MIJ. - 1976 Standard Legend. Exploration & Production

Departments.

WAGNER, C.W. - 1964 (EP-36421) Manual of Larger Foraminifera, Stratigraphic Value.

Generic

Description

and

~ , m ~
N ~ ~ ~

Appendix

1.8.4

page 18

C.

Periodicals Alcheringa; Bibliography Cahiers Catalogue an Australian and Index Journal of Palaeontology

of Micropalaeontology

de Micropaleontologie of Calcareous Nannofossils

Contributions AASP
Cretaceous Research

Facies
General Geobios; Grana; Handbook Journal Journal Journal File of Fossil Spores and Pollen Paleoecologie

Paleontologie Int. Jrn.

Stratigraphie

of Palynology Calcareous Research

and Aerobiology Nannoplankton

of Cenozoic Foraminiferal

of Micropalaeontology of Palaeontology

Lethaia
Marine Micropaleontology Rijks Geologische Dienst

Mededelingen

Micropalaeontology Newsletter Newsletter Newsletters Palaeobotanist Palaeogeography Palaeontographica Palaeontographica Palaeontologische Palaeontology Palynology; Pollen Review Revista Revue Revue Rivista Stereo Utrecht AASP Palaeoclimatology Abt A Abt B Palaeoecology Amer. Assoc. of Stratigr. Palyn.

Chitinozoa on Stratigraphy

Palaeozoologie-Stratigraphie Palaeophytologie

Zeitschrift

et Spores Palaeobotany Espanola and Palynology

de Micropaleontologia

de Micropalaeontologie de Paleobiologie Italiana Atlas di Paleont. Stratigrafia

of Ostracod

Shells Bulletins

Micropaleontological

Q m w N ~ ,m ~ ~

Appendix 1.8.5

SKETCH

OF LAYOUT

FOR

A SMALL

GEOLOGICAL

LASORA TORY

TABLE

SINK

~ ~

TABLE

-- """....
"4

SHELVES

TABLE

D
Aid

SAMPLE DISPLAY TABLE

CUPBOARD

CUPBOARD

First

Kit

DESK

BOOK CASE

,
"
\
, \ I

a
FILING CABINET

TABLE

DESK

a') J<) ......

Scale: approx.1:25

CD ,., N a> <D C)

DRILLING
Information Final Mud p'rovided: (target) depth type details info. numbers reservoir

PROGRAMME
Hotel/casing Cement, Logging sizes type/volume required

Appendix

1.9.1

Completion Subsurface Account

pressure

estimates

Procedure:

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12)

Hove in, rig up drilling


Make Drill Prepare Log; Flange Drill Log, Flange Flange Drill Log; run up next run up up up bit and on kelly, hole, for

equipment
in drill casing

- drive/wash

in

conductor

spud adding

make

collars

and

drillpipe

singles

hole

logging cement head section cement hesd test

and

casing, casing hole

housing,

BOP's,

test

casing, casing BOP's, to

spool,

install

"X"

bushing

ahead run

total and

depth complete, or abondon

casing

MAJOR COMPONENTS

OF THE

DRILLING

RIG

(SEE APPENDICES 1.9.2 - 1.9.5)

Derricks, masts and substructures

Mud

System Mud tanks mud Duplex, T~iplex, pumps, mixing and pumps, double single reciprocating acting acting for equipment

Hoisting equipment, Drawworks Crownblock


Travelling block

Circulating a) b) Centrifugal Mud

auxiliary, treating

Hook
Links and elevators

Solids separation equipment Mud-Gas separators

Swivel
Wire Dead rope line (drilling anchor line) Bulk Mud

storage, guns,

bentonite, jets

barytes

&

cement

bottoa

Auxiliary brakes

Lightning mixers (paddle-type) Instruments,

Pipe Handling Equipment, Weight indicator Air winches


Pressure gauges tachometer torque meter

Rotary table Slips Tongs Kelly spinner


Master bushing and kelly bushing

Rotary Rotary

Multi-channel recorders
Tong torque indicator rate counter recorder (Geolograph)

Penetration Prime Movers, Independent Diesel-electric; ilc engines Ward-Leonard Smith-ring Thyoristor Gas turbines system system system Pump Mud Pit Mud Gas stroke flowmeter level weight detectors flow

recorders recorder

Annular

detector

Power

Transmission, Drive Direct group, drive, diesel engines clutches

Well

Control

Equipment, bag-type)

Blowout preventers (ram-type, Hydraulic accumulator Control unit

twin-disc

Hydraulic couplings Torque converters


<0 !<)

Choke (back pressure), manifold


Remote controlled tank and kill line valves choke

"CD rt'> N

Air Link
API

clutches
belt
rubber

chain

drive
drive

Trip

<0 '"
C)

vee-belt

Standpipe

Appendix

1.9.2

DIAGRAMMATIC VIEW OF ROTARY DRILLING RIG


LEGEND LEGEND

A. ~ve-Shea.e B. Four-Sheave C. Hook. D. Swivel E. Kelly. F Standpipe

Crawn Black Tra.eIlTng Black.

E. Kelly. H. Ratary Machine. J Ratary-Machine K Vibrating L. Outletfor Drive.

Mudscreen. Drill ing Auid Section of Drilling Aoor. Operaled Operated Blowout Preventer. Blowout Preventer (.Mastervalve,J and Chakes,for Drilling Auid

and Rotary

Hose.

R. Cut-Out

G. Derrick Floor.

S. Hydraulically

H. Rotary K. Vibrating L Outletfar

Machine Drive fram Main Transmission.

Hydraulically

J. Ratary-Machine

U. Outlets,provided

wrthValves

MOOscreen. Drilling Auid.

when Upper Blowout Prelienter is cla.sed.

Surface Casing (.Canductor.) between Casing and Bore-Hole Wall.

MDrawwori<s. N.Main Engines. (Engines to Drawworks and to Pump)

W Cementbond X. Drillpipe.

O. Main Transmission

Y. Heavy ,Thickwalled Z. Rollerbit(for

Pipe (.Drillcollars.)

at Bottom

P Suction
Q.Pump.

Tank.

Hard Formations). Auid shown thus.-

of Drilling String.

Aow of Drilling

R L

s
U T

\\

\<-

1:
.

DIAGRAMMAllC SECTIONSHOWING EQUIPMENTBELOWDERRICKFlOOR, THE BORE HOLEAND DRIWNG STRING.

G H J

..... ,., ..... CD '" a> '" CD (!)

RIG

MANPOWER .
RIG

Appendix 1.9.3

OFFSHORE CONTRACT IlANPOIfER


CONTRACTOR

QQ!!ill!
Co.pany a) Rouatabout Crew Rouatabout Puaher rrlfe 2.!! Barge Engineer la tcbatander I.) Crane Opt 'r( 0) Radio Opt'r(o) T. P.

Rillt Manallter I Tour Pusher( Day Shift Nillth t Shift

Dri !ler hsiatant Drlr Derr1ckllsn Floormen 3/4 Motorman Rig Mechanic

Petroleum Engr. lIudlof,ger( s) lIud Engr. Cementer Divara (5) Directional Engr. Schlumberger (3)
Geologistl Strat 19r
apher (Palaeontologht/Palynologist)

6-10 .an

etc.

(5 to 17 men)

Sub-eu lIan haiatant Sent or Mechanic Senior Electrician Weldar(a)

ca~e~~~g Staff

On Board I

50 to 90 me"

MUD TREATING
MUD-GAS
SEPJ.RATOR

EQUIPMENT

\,

HO I "'XING Pu..

UNIT

,-. :9C12':~~I~~L~~:S

:I:l

M'.

-"'''(0 MUD

!!.2!.1J.. I
I 8urlvI[ 'AHIC.. .nll LJIIiKI "'''''luP OIIITTIO '011 C""."Y. OIIIT'I'IQ, . III ,,"Itlane 100 a..

CfllflllfUGf

I'OWfR .oMIt

SKID UGfNO

. ,..It CLI , ~(R.AU.

SAC.ED

MUD I'I1IIIIIMOUII.

1. UKtw'K.8&&

TMf "" .(1' 01 ft. OUTLtN...

. '.'D. ONfell'01 ,.-. ... ONLY INDlCATfD

. .-

--

'(I:DUfft' - ;."\11" IO-tO "".NOW t(""."""&LPuMPS

f.Ur4l'

CASING SCHEME
CASING

-, HOLE

SIZES CASING 'j DP\J)II. HO~E SIZES


KVn.OI'M.

S"I'OYI "PI

10'/>.' DMVIH

10'/..,

,.,.",.

10'/..,

SoIWAa

13 1,.-/ fT II,.

10 'I; / 14 'I."

CASlW

'~../tZ

8j.-

CD "., "-

C\I C11 CD (!)

~ON

STRING

7-/.

'1.8

.'/.0/0'

Appendix 1.9.4

MUD CIRCULATION

KELLY HOSE

STANDPIPE

SWIVEL

KELLY

TABLE

---MUD

FLOWLINE

RETURN

...;,

,.., N C7> U) t!)

CD

EG.347

Appendix 1.9.5

DIAGRAM
;

OF SELF-SUPPORTED PLATFORM

j
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. D.C Af.. generators A.C generators Air compressor (die~e!) Air compressor (el!'clroe) Excitl'rs DC. switchboard A.C. switchboard Dr,twworks Rotary table Swilchboard Sand 'eel Koomey closing unil Dog house Walk way Moo pumJ's Cenlrifugal pumps Switch~ard lB. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23 24. 25. 26. 27. 2B. 29. 30. 31, '32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 3R. 39. 40.. Active mud I~n'" Trealing mud lank Re!WIrve mud slorage DriliinA wdler tank Hydrophoo,s F,~h water prtlssu,e sel Sail water tank Salt waler pressure s.et Dr;nking water tank Drinking waler pumps Hydrophoor Boilers Eme<gency A.C.generaling s.e1 rire fighting water pump (dine!) Fire fighling water I'ump(ftlectric) R_II'8 mud slorage Distillation unit Workshop Workshop Switchboard Warehouse Baryte or cement silos Fill tank

41. 42. 43. 44. 46. 46. 47. 48. 49. 60.

SurAe lank Cementing unit (electric) Air compressor Switchboard AUK. pipe rack Derrick Cran.. Well logging unit Livino quarters Heliport

-.,

c
~

-~--

,, .'J~,I

/-~ ~~';)-,(~~~
:/

~..

-I
,I i 0 rr
-_u.-.J

I
';

.-

':n,"..i;'
'~rg ) i

'

..'

-t CD
e

If) (\J C1> CD

l__~'

I =zr

~ -~~-

,/.,

1 .I'8~"I( ?'. 1 t, Ir~ 1 . ~ 'I"~ I.~ f ::t! IQ:1~li~; _ .. 'Jt ' P/! ."'J!,~,~I ~I 1.,..1
I

~! ) I' ~ r -" i.of': Z.j": ' .s


\

. 0-'--

fO'

1 I '

..~
1
2

I,

J~I

JJ

,("'~IJ CT'

i r"';j' (~'
I~"J

61 62 53

Fuel tanks Deep well pwnjJ8 Tool racks

'f.,' ~

,I" I',;;
4-

2.

ock Sa

pie

andling

Appendix 1.2J

EXAMPLE OF WELL PROGNOSIS

LDMPANY: RIG to NTRACTD R :

WELL:
CO-ORO. :

TERTIARY

. .. . .-. _8 .-:-:-::. .,.. . .. y .. i6"

E~T. DURATION:
I

16 Y:t" hole 4tQm


+

650

CRETACEOUS

iOOO

H70

III I I
=;=

1 U i 2.'12 hole

ilK. . Re~\edor

f4BO

TR\ASSIC.

~750 iB~O

..... ..

-r ~:. .

iO%1I t550

zooo

.1!e;;~J 9 0/1 P hole

PERMIAN
1 76/s.2S00m

b Y2 n

t hole

. OBJECTIVE

CARBON IF.

3000. ._.
~O80 .

.,.. .....

. . ..

..24J1C!dor
UQ8

.. . "T'"

0 PQ~SI8L! O&JECTIVE

TD 32QOm

CD

"CD
I') N 0> co C>

EG.620

Appendix

1.8.1

CHECKLIST OF RECOMMENDED WELLSITE LABO~I.9RY (In case

EQUIPMENT AND__C.9NSUMABLES will normally

a mudlogging
part of the

unit necessary

present, items)

this

contracter

supply

Stereomicroscope Hicroscope Hotplate Bulbs Lens Picking Tweezers }1icroscope Ejector Diamond Spatulas Glass stirring plates examining examining tray glasses slides slides for pointed for tissues needles (flatbrushes lamps

(with and

polarisation Transformer

outfit)

microscope

lamps

and

pointed (small/OO,

mouth) medium/03 and large/12)

pencil

rods

Fingerhole Cutting Picking Triebel Watch

trays tray

(one

and

five

cell

model)

Chapman Picking

Coverglasses Glass Slide Sample Sample Sample Slide Picking Thin slides labels bags boxes labels trays slide section

picking

slides

(self

adhesive

for

glass

slides)

(cardboard) box box boxes description sheets sheets

Wash residue Cutting SWS/Core sample

description

0> ....... CD ~ 0> co C)

Appendix

1.8.1

page 2

Computer input sheets (EPIPAL)


Glass plate (approx. Powder 30 x 20 x 0.5 cm) (grit 220, 320, 500)

Carborundum Hortar

& Pestle & Rack tubes (for SR detection flat bottom by pyrolysis) 12 and 24 cm)

Testtubes Pyrex Basins, test

enamelled sieves sieves

(diam.

Set Washing Set Tables Brush Plastic Bottle

(20, 100 and 200 mesh)" (set of 3 sieves table sieves (50 cc) with nozzle assembly: 250 cc with cover and receiver)

for cleaning dropping - wash,


-

bottle plastic

Funnel
Alcohol Handlens

plastic: burner (10 x) tape comparator comparator Chart

diam.

100 rom

Heasuring Grainsize Sorting Rock

(metal

and plastic)

Colour

Tape-worm Felttip Alzarin Nethylene Lakeside Tragacanth (Hydrochloric Stationary coloured acid, 10%) carbon paper, pencil sharpener, a set waterproof red S blue No. 70 markers, big, red and black, to mark cores

(incl. pencils,

envelopes,

self adhesive

tape)

Dictionaries Glossary of geology

Manuals
Small toolkit (incl. a watchmakers screwdrivers set).

S? ..... CD fC') N $ C)

Appendix

1.8.2

LIST

OF RECOMMENDED

EQUIPMENT

AND

CONSUMABLES

FOR

PALYNOLOGICAL

INVESTIGATIONS

AT THE WELLSITE

1 pce

Microscope for transmitted complete with transformer,

light, max. magnification 1000-1250x, lamp, spare bulbs and immersion oil.

Make Wild Heerbrugg 1 pce 1 pce


Colcormet, colour

or Leitz.

comparator.

Centrifuge, make BHG, type Z 364, 220 V, 330 W, complete with head for 100 cmss tubes, 4 reducing sets for 15 cmss tubes, and spare fuse. Hand centrifuge, with
10

1 pce 1 pce

glass Lab.

tubes, Instr.,

cap. model

15 cmss

to fit centrifuge. 25 W,

Turbo Mixer, make Techn. with spare nylon fork. Hot plates, make EGO, cables and plugs. Transformer, Electric Nickel
metres

14, 220 V, 50 Hz,

2 pces

220 V, 1500 W, type RK 18715.00,

complete

with

1 pce 2 pces 2 pces

220/127

V, 750 W, complete 4-6 metres, with

with

cable

and plug. sockets and plugs.


15

cables, microsieves
(mesh no.

length

multiple

in stainless
806), make VECO.

steel

setting,

hole

diameter

micro-

2 pees 1 pce 1 pce 1 pce 1 pce 1 pce 1 pce 1 pce 1 pce 8 pces

ditto, 20 micrometres
ditto, Metal 30 micrometres burner nail

(mesh no. 635).


(mesh no. 403). spirit.

for methylated pulling type.

Hammer,

Plier. Baco.
Screwdriver, ditto, ditto, Nickel Picking Glass size size size 1.6 x 9 x 200 mm.

1 x 6 x 150 mm. 0.6 x 4.5 x 150 mm. size 5 x 180 mm.

spatulas, needles. stirrers,


(6

3 pces
10 pces

4 mm, length 150 mm.

"
\!)

CZ) ,.., N

9)

Appendix

1.8.2

page 2

3 pces 2 pces 3 pces 2 pces 1 box


1 bottle

China

markers,

make

Blaisdell, 100 cms3

different tubes.

colours.

Brushes ditto ditto VIM

for cleaning for 15 cms3

tubes. laboratory equipment.

for washing

cleaning

powder. detergent.

500 cms3 Kleenex Easyfix Rubber

liquid tissues. labels,

2 boxes
1 booklet

size

19 x 25 rom. size 8~-9 size 54. Check with concerned palynologist

2 pairs 1 pce 1 pce 1 pair 4 pces 4 pces 2 pces 10 pces 2 pces 8 pces 2 pces 2 pces 12 pces 8 pces 2 pces 5 pces 1 pce 1 pce

gloves,

type Marigold, white, cotton,

Laboratory ditto, Rubber "Tea

coat,

grey, safety

acid-resistant, boots, size

size 54 10-12.

towels".

Towels.
Floor mops.

Small Rolls

"work-towels". self adhesive steel tape. capacity 500 cms3.

Stainless Porcelain Measuring Plastic Nickel Plastic ditto, Plastic

basins,

mortars, beakers, beakers,

0 15 cms, with pestles.


capacity type TPX, capacity 1 litre. capacity 250 cms3. capacity 1 litre. 600 cms3.

crucibles, bottles capacity funnel,

with

spout,

500 cms3.

0 160

rom.

ditto, 0 120 rom.

~
.......

.... N 0\ CD
<.!>

CD

Appendix page 3

1.8.2

10 pces 10 pces 10 pces 10 pces


200 pces

Centrifuge ditto, ditto, ditto, Residue Cardboard Plastic ditto Plastic Box with

tubes,

type Makrolon, 100 cms3. 15 cms3. 15 cms3.

capacity

100 cms3.

glass~ plastic, glass, tubes,

capacity capacity capacity glass,

08

rom, length tubes.

45 rom, with

corks.

2 pces 2 pces 2 pces 2 pces 2 pces 5 pces 2 pces 2 pces 2 pces 5 pces 3 pces 1 pce
200 pces

boxes stands

to fit residue for 100 cms3 centrifuge capacity

centrifuge tubes.

tubes.

for 15 cms3 buckets,

10 litres. paper, glass,

100 sheets

filtering slides,

0 185
make

rom.

Box with 50 microscope size 76 x 26 rom. Box with


ditto,

Menzel,

"cleaned",

100 cover-glasses,
32 x 22 rom.

make

Chance

no.

I, size

20 x 20 rom.

size

Wooden

box

for storing trays

glass

slides.

Cardboard Wash

for slides.

basins,

plastic. paper.

Booklet Analysis Locks Sieves

pH indicator sheets.

4 pces 1 set 2 pces 1 pce 2 pces 1 pce 4 pces 2 pces 2 pces

to fit 2 material for cuttings size (3).

boxes.

Tweezers, Safety Tubes

120-150

rom.

mask. calciumgluconate calcium pens, ointment.

Tube with Ballpoint

tablets. different colours.

Text markers, Pencils;

black,

water-proof.

type HB.

CD "
N "" 0> Ii) (!)

Appendix 1. 8.2 page 4


1 pce 2 pces 1 pce 3 pces 4 pces 1 pce 2 kgs Stick Jars Bottle Bottles Jars, bees-wax, approx. 50 grs. approx. approx. 10 cms3.

glycerin-gelatine, glycerin, nail-varnish, glass, with 1000

100 cms3. transparent. grs Zinc Bromide (dry).

Densimeter,
Sodium

capacity

up to at least

s.g.

2.2.

carbonate.

Separate

Chemicals

(to

be packed

in

separate

boxes/tins

of

or

1 litre):

15 litres
5

1 1 15 5

"
" " " "

Hydrochloric acid, 36% Hydrofluoric acid, 40% Nitric acid , 60% Ammonium hydroxide,25% Alcohol, denatured Water, destilled.

.,. U) "I<) N en \0 CI

Appendix 1.8.2 page 5


DESIGN FOR PORTABLE PALYNOLOGICAL LABORATORY Box Nr. 1
Large wooden box with hinging lid and padlock; made of marine plywood 1.8 cm thick. Measurements outside: 94 x 94 x 61 ems.

inside: " Weight (empty)


e

90 x 90 x 55 cms. approx. 50 kgs.

i -j
to

" ","'" '

""

".
,

Takes most of the laboratory material, serves also as cupboard and undercarriage for fume-cupboard in the lab-room.

,~f,,/
/

j - .J ,,~-----I

..

~
I ~61
I

..' I em---eo:
I

Box

Nr.

Simple wooden box, made of plywood. Measurements outside: 92 x 92 x 40 cms.

Weight (empty) )-- -----

: approx. 12 kgs.
and as work-

Takes the folded-in fume-cupboard some small lab. items; may serve bench in the lab-room.

-1

'

40cm---..

.,
E
'.)

i
:-Z6cm

/I -j) -l
I

:> ...

I t

l
!

-r

:.-:'-;:: 1,/
:\

I I,,, ,"': I '\ I v ...""" I y"" 1 , " "f J... I I Pt ,'T... J ~


~

':

::~,-;;

(/
I

J.
Fume-cupboard Consisting of made

I L -.; 15.5;
I.

J
",'

T
.

~
I
,~
I

I'" ~

' ~-~~:a

"

'...,

I I

/I

'-..:

:::':::' '" -.!I

"

I
I

,
I

I ,I

II , ,
~ ..
\

""

''''~''''

, !

1) base 4 mms

plate, thick.

of white panels,

plastic made of

2) folding-in !

vertical

I 1
I I I I 1 I I I ,

. . . ..
~

~_.-:

.!
I

1
.

transparent plastic,S mms thick; fan in rear panel, make ITHO, type VR 20/1, 220 V, 1 phase, 50 Hz, 70 W max. 3) covering panel with made of transparent hinging plastic front lid, 5 mms. thick.

I
!

/:~::~o:-.:-_-c~::=::::::~::::::::::~====::=:
//~/

--1

_: - -7.~1 /1I
"1"

4) exhaust tube, plastic, fits rear of fan; length 80 cms, inside diameter

'e"

21 cms.
5) spare fan, as above.

-E ...... CD ff) N .C]> CD (!)

':t!~

83cIII

, -I

Appendix 1.8.3

EXAMPLE OF WELLSITE LABORATORY

GEOLOGICAL SECTION
rr '-'-'I~ -'. ~:.~.. ~..

: :.

Geological section identical for standard and TDC logging units

GEOLOGICAL SECTION
~ "CD ,.,
N en ID (!)

1 . Sink/Cuttings 2 . Drying oven 3 . Fluoroscope

processing area

4. Working area for samples analysis with microscope,


VMS, manocalcimeter

...

5 . Mud logger desk for masterlog drawing

GEOSERVICES / EG. 355

Appendix

2.1.1

EXAMPLE

OF SAMPLING

PROCEDURES

Cutting Samples

Samples frequency

Surface - objective: at 3 m intervals Objective - TD : at 1 m intervals


Number of sample-sets/amount of sample the collection material of at least the following sets of

Depending on requirements samples is recommended:

large bags (500

gr): Set A - for lab. at base camp


Set B - for OPCO Set C - for Government Set D - spare set for exchange

purposes

small

bags

(100

gr):

Set F - working/reference set, to be kept well-site till completion of well

at

Set G

for lab. at base camp

The samples making-up the above sets have to be collected at each sampling depth. The 500 gr samples are to be drained (not washed) and put into plastic or linnen bags. The 100 gr samples have to be washed, dried and put into plastic bags. Set G to be sent to base camp with every available transport for detailed investigation. All samples should be put into boxes which show set identification, e.g. A, B,C etc. Sample identification well name, depth (in mbdf, corrected

All samples have to be labelled with for time lag) and set identification. Sidewall samples

In order to ensure full stratigraphic information it is recommended to shoot SWS at an average spacing of ca. 25 m (these SWS should be shot in addition to those selected for petrophysical and geochemical purposes). Depth and number to be selected on the basis of wireline and litho logs by the petroleum engineer and the stratigrapher (and agreed upon by the base). Each sample to be labelled (with waterproof marker) with well name, depth and shot number on the glass container and depth and/or shot number also (to be scratched) on the metal cover. Core samples programme. basket samples possible.

See Drilling Bit-, junk

sub- and junk

Should

be collected

whenever

Transport and Stora~


All samples (except set F) to be sent to base whenever transport facilities are available. camp for safe storage,

~ "CD f") N en U)
C)

Appendix

2.2.1

EXAMPLE OF

MASTERLOG

C :::I

a IO~ <
...

z:

LL.
~ 0 -I 0 :=1
:I:

..J
\,!]

z: ..J2 <I\J~
-ILJ ~ct: 00. ~ct :x:uJ
...1-

uJ~ I-z: <1.oJ a::c..

:z: ,..J

-'v) 0;< O~
~1 and C2. % 0 2-

-z: 1-

L\THOlO6\CAL

DE.SCRIPTION

m/hr
20 I!I 10 5 0 0

TOTAL GAS ~O
400CI.

3500 m

0-0.4 C; . C4 :
9'4)

100

............ ~:::z:..........
~,..,.,.
,...,.., r<w ,.....,.. ,.,." ,......,

Marl",qroy

,,-.-

LimQ~rone, arqilla CC!outa, qr~y.

"~-,...,.,
,--

,....,

,......

........

.35sa
I

,...""", .............

LimC!!>~oncz,white.
I I

T.

:?IbCO

. .,. . . ... .. .. . ..,..


.,... . .

. . . .- .

5ond5.~onC!.. ~inQ", $orted '"

friab\a

li<3ht gray '"

Shel Q

dark gray.

~~,.....,
~,."...,.,
.......,

~........,
"3b50

Marl,9rczy.

,...".", ,....,

~""""'
,..... I I I
I'

,...." ,....,. I I

- "'.,...

L imC!s~ana,ar9illa cl!aus J grey.

.::;:: ::;::

5halC!

darK 9ray-brown.

::;::
3700

::;::

- ::;=

--

--

......

m
II) \:)

N '" 0>

. .... -r . .... . - . . .... . . ... ... ... .. . . .. .. ... .. . .. . . . . . .. ... ..

::;=

'I

~hQla "bi~um',"Qu~.I b\Q~\( J p'yri~ic.) carbaoac.QQU~ Fra9mQn~s. 5and5~onC! bmadium" ~r}ed, 9rey- light rown.

5h~\e

black

EG.628

EXAMPLE
m
:c

OF CONTRACTOR'S
'TI Z ~

Appendix

2.2.2

MASTERLOG

~ ~

:c

I/) "
I

i 2I i ";:;~ . :
"" ~
III

0000 ~ i ~ ;! ~ 3 ,zI 3 $ 3 It :t

0 ~~~d~~ ~ I/) 3~~i~a s~S!.i~& C) 0


!i :P

-i~ci'~ coos c. r0 a.. :Jt') '=t C !t .


':fft

i~ L~ ~ ii

i~

0 e>nt;> y -I

h~H -i~.":"
88
ii!~

B "I
I

:t

'Eii ~ :U m
;U
!!j

::D r-

0 C) fJ~~ I/) ~8$3


~

~~;
!I
51!

n i ~i:~~~~ ~.. R I~! . ~

;
.

UsE HP !> ~ni U" g"ii~:IIg


~~~~-~f'
r ,

::e'

rr-

0 0

~ z 0-<
;::: ):. e5

I:

~ ~ ~
&
-~

~~
..

I 000

! .:
j

, ~ I I

~
'

c.. ~

,,~
:
!
!

~~~ ~.
..

ji
.

i':~~~~ ~"I:,li ~ Ii! ~ I


;<;,

7' w I\)

~ C/)
Cd

MUD
W \\c~N ~J V 'V.~~I\i-t:.e", J.>v :\.~I) IC"~I y Pt4::'I~ Y~1.J p.)w\l .n..:a.i\l.\1t1, G GeI.I;):.'OJh I ,. i.L. Vi~lcl "'...~ I'; Me U..,g ~c u..""n, n Cr~6Ckt'unl"nl:.&pymi F-n h,Or~n pVltmh., R:n M...o I :a.h f) tro ,,,.on;1 NT.. ..".,...,hat.,. '1.;:..1;.111, 1.-. m ;ml LC l~1 o;-'"~
I "'I.~

'

DRILUNG
NB Nt:...bli RR Rurun IMt OBD_bit T8 T.JI'b,Jdn" C8 CUI. LId

I UTHOLOGY

f!

Ii! Ai! I I I i I I I I F!I

I ,
CORES

WOaW.,;'.. onbot f
fWu pp Rut.alCln 1G Tnu~
CIG C.,JflntICa.oo
i'I<.~":r.J ., 0I!II'w8lon

r-.~~-~~'~~!~!

PU'''P~cuur.1
OM

,rpm)}

I
J

-;Con9k>morawo f ~.:~~Ume'1Ono rc,~~:u~",,",,-. tis..nd t~:~Oo6IDc1Im811On8[:-~r=--'0Ck6 L. [.,~~:~:;StInd5lone r~;qDoanntt r:':.~~r:=focM

I
T

Ctc.:.vc:,~', r~ tl*.:."nr~"'J .. ~CGf.

TESTS
OST i!~~I,.."".rlIetl

L
loUI'Wy

t~ 'j~:~-:-ll.\arl
r"~~:S4I-IlU'tone t -:.~iW

LljP>'"
fZ~G88UCOftM

.Fir ~RFT

"'.Ja~~ ~ ..'

F0,JOuonz""

F":;;;)~

[~.....

")".1'/':",;"

I..:.t";~

1Muog..AII
AATEOF
PEHE1AATIOH
"011...1...0(

[_J ~

...

:c c
~

-;UorH8 ,.~ ...


1

L
!
'II..

Ll~ t"3~~t_CoII~te
UTHOLOGV CUTTINGS "

.1

z CAJI80HA TE Ii: ANALVIIS

~8 g ~

n-in_1I 0 CJ
HVDROCGAS , ,.......

(DF._.e
.o.,"-J./d'U# OGM(~/.'.I
ICAU : I/~" _8I""'-~",-,

ODr1

',J
$

:;Zi;;~~'-

~:;:~~'---'~-'

r'
a

'.

---""liS'. I.

a :

..

6)

..

-:; '.'

'.

.~,,~..
I I

: . ,..
"

is
_l2Of

--11_'
OaI8c~'."

DUCNPTIOH

I.!!!!!!!!!!t-,--

lID""
~ 242

__,'2"'!_~ _n. --"."W"Ocrp< ,

""

~===:=-~_.- ..--

alO'imL 1llIiOI""'~.II06.tg

!!!!.~...'
I!!!II!2!L

-",.....

~"''''J.8K8IoI~, fllllt*J. ------

...' ---

-.''''', -- _7311

::::.u=~~
,~ I
""'.I/ItIOI pt:llflMr.

"""1) ..-..._-~...
M""

~.

.."..,

ID D&IrA.

--'
7425

i . '

_a-

""',

It .

7_t=~~~
7fllQOIbII-7eSl&-",811

J;

i -

~~~-;~~
IIIr.__.

---, -

OW

~11I""""'''' $0.8_""

i . . Q" IX) "It) Q> '" CO I!)

18_--' 7 ...........
II1II""""'--..7581 ~,.:::::.=-.:=,

,I
.

I
2

---

(i

Appendix page 1

2.2.3

RATE OF PENETRATION

CURVE
(SEE

(DRILLING SPEED LOG) TERMINOLOGY


FIGURE PAGE

2)

Certain specific SHALE

responses terms

?n the ROP curve are listed

are referred

to with

which

below. over long sections

BASELINE:The

trend

of the ROP curve lithology

of a predominant line.Deflections reflect other

is used

as a basecould then

from that baseline lithologies than

the major the shale as in a

lithology. trend

In a sand/shale as a baseline sequence

sequence where

is used

carbonate/evaporite trend DRILLING BREAK:A is mostly break used

the limestone

as a baseline. increase in the more

d~illing

is an abrupt considered the baseline

ROP. It is usually times


.

to be two_or average. changes indicate that in

greater

than

Drilling lithology, sudden

breaks

usually they

indicate may also increase

althoug~

formation

pressure when

might

be encountered
REVERSED

a fault

is crossed.

A reversed_drilling
BREAK:in the ROP. They oceur when

break is an abrupt decrease


lithology cemented changes intervals but are

DRILLI~G

can mean strongly

also

penetrated. DULLING TRENDS:Bit wear and consequently progressively less as that

penetration uniform slope DRILL-OFF

can show up on the ROP curve in the drilling response

decrease away

from the baseline. trend is a gradual, It usually zone" usually indicates where pore uniform, a

A drill-off increase "Pore

TREND:

in the ROP.

pressure

transition

pressures

are increasing.

~ CD
ft) N 0> II) C!)

EG.624

Appendix page 2

2.2.3

COMPACTION

TREND:

As the overburden age of the rocks rocks This generally compaction

pressures increase become trend

and geological with depth, the

more

compacted. be seen

can sometimes

by observing the
J: to.

ROP curve

over

long

intervals.

\ \ COMPACTION

TREND

\,

!
DRIL.L.ING BREAK

SHAL.E

BASE

LINE

REVERSED DRIL.L.ING BREAK

TREND

DRIL.L.-OFF

TREND

FAST

SL.OW

10 <t
"-

~ 0> '" II)


<!)

ROP

CURVE

TERMINOLOGY
EG.625

Appendix 2.2.4

EXAMPLE OF CORRELATION DRILLING

BETWEEN

SPEED LOG AND MUD LOG

DRILLING

SPEED (ROP)

LOG
0

MUD LOG

%
20 40 60 80 100

. ..&..~~""'''''..L.-'--'-~..L-'''' ~

~.L:~~~:::~:::'" ,

:~..:

'-~..,:'''

SLOW

----------------- -------------------GI-~
J
~ CI)

...""'..A..~~~""""...:'- ~""' "'...~ """..-' L.""' ""~""~-'-~~"""""",,~ ~-&.~.A.~""'~"""~:::: ~.A.~'" ~ ..&.. ~...L.~ ...""'-L""'..& L.-'--'-""-'-~I:'. -,--' -'-..,L.""""""" ~ -' ~ ~"' ""

Claystone Top of the


'

L.""'~~....

';:i:;

--------------------------------------

-----------------

~-

.....-

Shale

~ J --~-----~-Bit Worn

-----------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0____-----------------------------------------------------------. ,

---------------------------------------

Very

Low

of

Sand

in the Cuttings. Lithology Drawn as According to the Drilling Rate

Increase

in Rop

:. Greater % Silt
Cavings No Slow Down on the Drilling Rate Sandstone

--~::::::::i::::::

...... Q) I<)

0> '" co C)

EG.615

Appendix

2.2.5

TIME LAG

Time lag can be defined as the time required to travel from the bottom o~ the hole to the Time lag should be known hole in order to assigne are sampled at the shale Two methods are available

for the cuttings shale shaker. of a which

at any time during the drilling correct sample depth to cuttings shaker. to determine time lag:

TRACER

METHOD

- When a drill pipe connection is made tracer material is placed in the open end of the drill pipe and after resuming the drilling operation the time/number of pump strokes are recorded for the tracer material to arrive over the shale shaker. As tracer material literally anything can be used which will not plug the bit and which can be recognised or detected in the return mud. ( e.g. cellophane, paint flakes, dye, rice or gas producing tracers (Calcium carbide

2 CALCULATION

METHOD In this method it is neccessary to calculate: - the annular volume (between the drill pipe and the wall of the hole) - the - the volume in the drill rate of circulation pipes and drill collars derived from the
.

pump output.

!!!!.

The total volume of the mud (in drill pipes/ drill collars + annular volume) is divided by the pump output to arrive at a Total Circulation (1)

The drill pipe/drill collar volume is divided by the pump output to obtain Downhole Circulation

(2)

The Uphole Circulation Time (Time lag) is obtained by subtracting (2) from (1) this can also be expressed in Number of Pumpstrokes (see example)
,

IX) """ C\J '" 0> (!) '" EG.809

Appendix

2.3.1

DEPTH

CONTROL

DURING SIDEWALL
(modified after

SAMPLING

NAM)
the following procedure is given. The the depth

In order

to ensure

proper

depth

control

a. Run a GR (or GR-CCL section should show

in cased hole) over the section concerned. some detail to facilitate correlation. with the reference log and calculate

b. Correlate the film obtained discrepancy (if any).

c. Depending whether the log reads too deep or too shallow, add or subtract the depth discrepancy from the depth read on the depth counter. Set the depth counter for corrected depth. d. Relog the section. Both logs should match. REFERENCE GR CORREL. GR

-rEPTH-D~~REPANCY(XI
DEPTH. (-0)

- ~

~ ~

Example: Present log reads (x) m deeper than the reference log. Therefore to be subtracted from the depth as read from the camera. "True" depth (D) relative to reference log is now (D) - (x). (x) m has

CD ~ ...... CD I<) (\I 0> CI) (!)

Appendix

2.4.1

WELL-SITE CORE HANDLING (modified after BATJES, 1981)

1) Introduction Extracts taken from Petroleum Engineering Manuals of larger OPCO's are presented below to serve as a guide for Exploration geologists on core handling at the wellsite. The PE is responsible for ~his in first instance, but the assistance of the stratigrapher is appreciated. 2) Preparation of core-boxes and other equipment The following items should be available in sufficient condition when the core is taken out of the barrel.

quantity

and

in working

2a)

Core-boxes, with fitting lids. Boxes are usually of wood. Suggested interior dimensions: length: 110cm, width: core diameter + lcm. NB: Some (larger) OPCO's use a set of clearly numbered and marked (Top/Bottom), so-called "derrick-floor-boxes" to collect and clean the core. Lenghts of pipe, cut in two, clearly marked and having stoppers at both ends, can also be used. After cleaning (normally carried out with damp rags), the core is then transferred to the final boxes. Other equipment rags, claw-hammer, nails (3-5cm), plastic bags, large and small, labels .to mark boxes as well as samples and sample-positions, marker pens, indelible, black and red, stapler and staples, packing tape, rulers (of which at least one 50 or 100 cm long) or measuring (roll-type) ) for "sealed" tins with lids ) petrophysical aluminium foil ) samples. crates to transport tins needed for core-description: oil-show detection: UV box, chlorothene, acetone, rock-description: core-description sheets as well hammer, Tapeworm, handless, HCl 10%, etc.

2b)

tape

2c)

Items

test tubes etc. as: geological

3) Lay-out space Prior to recovery make arrangements for cleaning and laying-out undisturbed, safe, well-lit and if possible roomy space.

of core

in an

4) Core-retrieval This may take place on the derrick-floor or on the pipe storage space. Just before core reaches surface, transport the numbered and marked core-boxes to the retrieval area and stack them in a safe place and out of the way. Box-tops should face towards core-barrel. Have one man ready to feed the boxes in the right sequence with tops towards the barrel. Box No.1 is the first to be fed in. It will be filled with the bottom part of the core. Have one man ready to receive the core out of the barrel and for putting the core in the right sequence in the core-boxes or trays. NEVER let this man get his hands or feet underneath core-barrel or core.

CD "' f<) 0> '" \D <!)

Appendix

2.4.1

Page 2

See to it that the driller never lifts the core-barrel more than 30-50cm above the derrick-floor. Heavily mud-contaminated cores may be hosed down with a gentle stream of water before they are put in the boxes. Watch core for HC-manifestations and open fractures as it is retrieved. Make sure that core segments remain in the right sequence and the right

way up.
Transport the place permitted the boxes after the core-barrel has been emptied one by one to where they will be finally processed. (A basket is also but NEVER use a pallet).

5) Core sampling

and description Measure core recovery. If this is not 100% try to establish which part is missing and record the evidence. If you can't tell assume the bottom part lacks. Mark core-fit and orientation as per figure 1 (of this appendix) Note the core-depths, top and bottom, of every core-box (i.e. Bl =

m, Tl (=B2) =

m, T2 (=B3) etc.) and mark toe

core-labels and/or boxes. Wrap the labels in plastic bags and staple to prevent them from getting wet. Insert the labels, one bottom, one top, in each of the boxes. Carefully sample small pieces of core at regular intervals for lithology, porosity and shows. Avoid core damage. Alternatively, to facilitate the description especially of cores from carbonates, sand a strip along the outside of the core with a small hard electric drill with a sanding disc (medium grade) attachment. The equipment might be barrowed from the rig mechanic. Where core is sampled for petrophysical, stratigraphical or geochemical purposes, clearly mark in the core-box where which samples were taken. Record depth/depth-interval as well as size of these samples. Place labels and preferably wooden blocks, otherwise rags, in places where samples were taken out. Examine and describe the core, and make a reproducible drawing on a suitable scale. Indicate sample-positions. Stay to the point: lithology porosity,

shows, bedding and dip.


The detailed on in office sedimentological or lab. aspects of the core will be examined later

6) Transport Have the core packed tightly for shipment. Check box-numbers, core-depths and addresses. Prepare manifest specifying what is being sent (to whom/what for) and remember once more that PE remains responsible in first instance.

~ m ~ N ~ W ~

Appendix page 3

2.4.1

CORE

HANDLING after

PROCEDURE S~ANSON, 1981)

(Modified

1.
2. 3.
4.

Prepare adequate number of boxes, have rags. Set up joints of drill pipe, etc., as required to lay out core.
Supervi se core lay out to insure correct orientatian and order.

Wipe core clean with clean dry rags. Fit core. Space rubble between ends of core. Put rubble in sample sack and mark depths.

5.

Fit Core

Core
..~....' .;":,;,,.:.,.q.-'~ ~ ',""",. ...:''''''.'.

Rubble

Core
.

-'. . ;--, . ,..."'t"-. ,,';,:.,. ..; ;, ';~~. " ",'''':'', ..~ (.1..:~-~': ".1'.:.""':~'..~'.. .' ":..~'::";"..
Mark core

..

A
I.
2'~

-" jl ;"~~:'i'.i.~::.:'"','~:,.:~f~l:J.

. tI.',

e',.

.. '.

fit if other than" good" Good Fit

.
. ..

{---::.: '~..;-,.-,.{ ::~.~;: ;..~.:i::;.~1


,.~.

.~.:~~. ~ ~. ~~"'~"'~dJ'~ "-. ..', '.:':':':'".-. -. C'.;. '~''''''-L.T'';;'::

Poor Fit .. . '. ..~ .:. r:~~;'~~ ...~~'.)' @ :.. /; J' f:~ I.' ~'~!: "-'~~"

r ._~

No Fit ~~;~~I~ ."'I:::r...~.ft


on each

,) .-=:-"'."-.;): ,..:.;.; . <r.o. ::'';''>:'. -,"

No marks

necessary

One chevron

each

Two chevrons

side of break

side of break

6. Strap corej unrecovered interval understood to be at bottom unless known otherwi se.
7. Scribe core with reference lines and depths, using felt marker pens and straight edge. Black line alwavs to left, red to right. It is often helpful to mark top of core portions with T, and base with B.

Bottom(-::~'~~H~~'_:::-=:"~:~-:>?~'~

r~)E ~~~':~~"::~".~~rk:::~~.~~
No Fit Good Fit

~f>;;;
Poor Fit

~.:'~~..f{f!}

Top

8. Describe core and shows. 9.


Box core and mark boxes.

'~he red is to the right when the core is the right way up". This is SIPM practice. Shell Oil; however, mark their cores the other way around, see SWANSON, 1981.

r(') N U1 '" (!)

PNTH/5,

Nov.

1981

Appendix 3.2.1.1

PERCENTAGE CHART OF A ROCK TYPE IN A TRAY OF CUTTINGS


<JQ

000 0 0 000
Q

OQD('?O 0 \)Q

()O

0(7

~CJ QO

D vC;

&) 0 OC;r;ODO
00 0

ODD
~OJ

~QP

Q o~ODO

O~OoD ~Q O'o~d C? 0 '{J Do 0

CC1

00

~a~O DOG

C/ 0

'bDO~
~o\J
C)oOO

Q~D
C00P2~

~0 Do ~0()
C/O 0 ()

D~Oo\j
00

(JD

0
()

DOOo~~O

DOo
0

oOoa~Oo
0 aD

Q ~JI '''0
0 C>

aGoG
\)'70

~0 (JQ~

~<gOo DoO~ 0 \)0 0 ~~oD: o~ 0. 0 0 D a 080"" 0


0

tb OO(j 00 pO 0 00

5
dc]
Q~ ()
~OOO
~o

10
(JD

15
~

0
O

Qo

00000
0

Q
0

Q f>

~0
C

CO~o~o oo~Q (JoG


0

JO~OO@g O~ O~~o () Do () ~ O~D oW4o 000 \) 0


O!?A O~
0
~

DO~~ \J 0 D~ ~~o 00 0D O V

O'i>

d~'

\:>O()Oooo~
0

~GOo~

o(Jo
0

~ JO~a4~ Oo~~o o~\) \) 0 ~"O


20

OOooDcs
<!/J

O f&

O 000
0 ~

f) IW'

~B.ooooO~o 0

o~~'Wo

~Q

O~OO~O 30
Q

CJ~ o~Q

ceo G

~~~o 0 ~o~ooo
40

00 0 Wo

OOPAo

~Oo o~\~~ D D~"oV.O

o,oo~\)~
a~O~DOb 0
0 0 (fA UQ

V9

C::::>

OD

~ o~.

O~ 000 ()

0 o&J f1
D

C/o;,fa ~ a <30 W 0 Gqo~~O~ ~oo o~D 0 0ODQ~ ~ "Y/@tJ~ 00 OOQ'D p~$O~O ~o


Do

c::> al> 00 0

~~o 0 <) L.--' 0 ~ 0 ~ wq@oo ~@


f'\:

C)Q
0

C)~

oOoC)~O{)Q~

OVO~O 0 0 ~ 0.O~o\)
50

D~

~ o~~~.~Q ooC:JoQO~ ~
o~~
0

()ti?no~O~(}(//7A~

'0

~l{;D

o 0 (J o~o

DO

000

@a~o~o PoO:O

,\I 10 "II)

60

75

N '" (J\ CD C)

Appendix 3.2.1.2

GUIDE FOR

LITHOLOGICAL (modified

DESCRIPTIONS ofter KEMPTER occording

OF SEDIMENTARY ROCKS
a BENJAMINS 1981)

( I APEWORM. )

Symbolsond obbreviotions

to STANDARD LEGEND, July 1976

NOTES

ON ABBREVIATIONS are
the

Abbreviations and after

presented
(f)

in "informal-abbreviations"
"computer-codings", e.g. for

oblique 1ST

siltstone:
When rules using is

Slst

abbreviations recommended:

adherence

to

the

following

Initial Letters

of Abbreviations

The same abbreviation is used for a noun and the corresponding adjective. However, nouns begin with a capital letter, adjectives and adverbs with a smatl letter. No distinction is made between and the plural of a noun are not used after abbreviations otherwise arise. the abbreviation of the singular

Singular

and Plural

Fullstops

(J

except

where confusion

might

Comma U

Used after a group of abbreviations to indicate the end of the group Example sandstone, grey, hard, coarse grained, ferruginous: 55t, gy. hd, crs, fe (;) Used to separate various tYpes of rocks in one description, e.g. when the main rock is intercalated with other components Example shale, brown, soft. with sand lavers. fine grained, Sh, brn, soft; S Lyr, f, glc glauconitic: Used to indicate the range of a characteristic Example fine to medium, grev to dark grey: gy gy f m, dk Used as an abbreviation' for "and" Example shale and sandstone: 5h + 5st (::tt Used as the abbreviation for "more or less" or "approximate" Example shale with approximately 25% sand: Sh!25%S of an abbreviation is used to indicate Examples very sandy!
well bedded;

Semi-colon

Dash

(.)

Plus 1+)

Plus-minus

Underlining

emphasis

M
ill adjectives (s) or adverbs and indefinite colours

well sorted:

Brackets

Used to indicate diminutive Examples slightly sandy' bluish grey

gy 1bIJ

- For written litho-descriptions


to and use symbols for sedimentary e.g. Lime carbonate particles,

on drawings it is advisable
features/structures, bioturbated Packstone benthonic becomes: fossils

Pkst, +~

foraminiferal

pelletoidal

ORDER OF DESCRIPTION CARBONATE ROCKS a Secondory


admixture(s)

GENERAL A. Moin rock type rock lype(s), importont


or qualifierls)

SIUCIClASTIC

ROCKS

(p.2-7)

odd DUNHAM type


and particle or crystallinity symbol

C. T ex1Ure

(p.8-131

add grain size


soning roundness sphericity

odd ARCHIE symbol

..

D. Porosity ond permeobility E. Colour (p.161

(p.t2, 15)

F. Accessory minerals (p.1?) G. Fossils (p.17, 181 H. Strotificohon (p.19-23)

I. Posl-deposilionol feotures (p.23 , 241


J. Hydrocarbon indications and content (p.25 , 26)

~
~ N 0> CD C)

Standard lef1-right

sequence

for presentation

of alternations:

Evop I Doi-Lsl-Mrll

Sh-Clst-Ssl-CgII

C/Vo-Ig-Met

Appendix

3.2.1. 2

SIUCICLASTIC ROCKS

MAIN ROCK TYPE

ADMIXTURE

STREAKS. LENSES

MAIN

ROCKTYPE

ADMIXTURE CIs!/MS Cloystane

STREAKS. LENSES

CJ
c:=J

L=:J
Cl/CL
Cloy

} 1:::-:::-:::1

org/CL

argillaceous

L:=J E=:J

} 1:::-:::-:::-:1

~~~;H ~~-=~} ~::/SJ


slightlysandy

E::J

(s)/(SA) r-:-l S /SA Sand

EJ c::J
L---' J

I~

H...I

~:it~\.(.,~T

Ld
L::J
.;"TO

EZJ

s/SAr:-:-l FI sandyL.: J ~ s/SASA r-:::-l


very sandy

[::-:::::.1 ;~~~;ne

Ed
1<>

Grv/GV
~Gravel

CJLJ
r=J~

'~

Cgl/CG Conglomerate

G'" -68

Brc /BR ~I Breccia

(f Brc/ BR I~ CJ D~1 Breccia


CONSOLIDATED

ESJ ;to
2

UNCONSOLIDATED

SILlCICLASTIC ROCKS MAIN


ROCK TYPE 1''' / / 0

COAL AND PRIMARY

BITUMINOUS

ROCKS

ADMIX TURE TII1/TI Tillite. Diamictite


%

STREAKS. LENSES

MAIN

0' 0' 0'

L:J
Ed
II

~ ~

I~~I

Gwke /GK

Greywccke

~Ark/AK ~L-J I......J Arkose


Ii I!

..
L.....J "LG
I

ROCKTYPE
/PE Peat

ADMIXTURE

STREAKS, LENSES

rccccl} C/Co Coolcarb/COre--! rcc--l


cabOrKJceousL---EJ ~
U9/LG

[[=:] L;]
[[=:]LG 1- -ILG
LJ LG ~ LG

/TF ~Tf
Tuff
Ag,vo/VA volcanic

~ES;]
\III Oil

II c:' II ~(ilj II~

Ugmte; Coal Cc Cc Cc ci LG } Brown CCgl/COCG


Coal Conglomerate

Agglomerate

~
EXAMPLES OF COMBINED SYMBOLS

L.:.:...:J

[CJ
1111(:"':"";):',.L.IIJI

CI,slt+S Strk /CL SJ.SA SR silty Clay with Sand streaks S,IcI(fld!+Tf Strk/SALCFD+TFSR lithaclastic and slightly feldspathic Sand with Tuff streaks Sh,~,cgl /SHSACG very sandy and conglomeratic Shale

111 AI

RtBd/RT
Root bed

~
~

PItRem/PL Plont remains

bit/BT bituminous

~~
3

EXAMPLE OF COMBINED SYMBOLS .. I'" Sh,bit ISH BT .1 :;: bituminous Shale, Oilshole

MISCELLANEOUS SEDIMENTS MAIN

IGNEOUS

AND METAMORPHIC

ROCKS

ROCKTYPE
rv~~~vl

ADMIXTURE

STREAKS. LENSES

MAIN ROCKTYPE r+++1 L..:t :t.J


jxxxxxl

Chf/CT Chert Phos/PP Phosphate ~Fes!, FG Ironstone

L=:;J
r:::::J

Ivv

vvl

In, Piut/IN Intrusive., Plutonic rock


Ex, Vo/EX Extrusive-, Metorn/MM Metamorphic ~azt / MMaT Volcanic rock

p p p ElllJ

~fe/FG FG ferruginous

IMMMMMI

~.. Glauconite
~Glc/GC
EXAMPLES OF COMBINED SYMBOLS F-::Fol

rack

."""f":."."M

Quartzite

~Morb/MMMB

Marble

~
~

Sst,gtc, fe/SS GC FG glauconitic and ferruginous Sandstone Chk,cht/CKCT

rggj + +

Gns/MMGS Gneiss
PYROCLASTIC ROCKS

Iv!!l

cherty Chalk

-VC

DESCRIPTORS AND SPECIAL TERMS crypfo, crypfo/CY crystalline: xln/X


apllitic, ophit/OT porphyritic: pc/PC weathered: weath/WT

IIIIII Tf/TF II II Tuff

FIi"Tl

crysfolline,coorse,sucrosiC, xln,crs suc/S

Tf,weld/TFWX welded Tuff, Ignimbrite


Ag,

11011 0110

vo/VA
volcanic Breccia

Agglomerate;

4
0> II) UI '" m ..... (II ~

Appendix 3.2.1.2

EVAPORITES

MAIN
ROCK TYPE

ADMIX-STREAKS.
TURE Gyp/GY Gypsum Anhd/AH Anhydrite ./SL Salt in general (saliferous) LENSES

rl
~
[""A7l

~~ ~~

./BI ./CN -/KA ./KI ./PH

Bischofite Carnallite Kaini1e Kieserite Palyhalite Sylvinite Tachydrite

Mg C12.6H20 KCI.Mg C12.6H20 KC!.Mg 504' 3H2 0 Mg 504.H20 K2Ca2Mg(504J4.2H20 KCI.Na CI Ca C12.2Mg C12.12H20

r==J EJJ
[S]
s. s.

~ ~ Iffij
EXAMPLE

1****1
~ ~

-/NA
Halite. Racksalt

./KM
K and Mg salts in general
OF MINERALOGICAL COMPOSITJON

./SV -/TY

i+!+!+1
I:t:tfjjj

SV CN

KMg salts composed of Sylvinite and Carnallite

Gypsum :Ca504.2H20 ;density 2.32. Monoclinic cleavage ;scratched by fingernail. Turns white if held over flame. Floats on bromoform of $.9. 2.5 Anhydrite :Ca504;density 2.90-2.98 .Ortharhambic cleavage ;nat scratched by fingernail. Remains cleor if heated Sinks in bromoform of 5.g. 2.5 5

CARBONATE MAIN
ROCK TYPE

ROCKS MAIN ROCK TYPE ADMIXTURE STREAKS. LENSES

ADMIXTURE Lst /LS limestone calc/LS

STREAKS. LENSES

~ ~
~

calcoreousL

=.J ~

MIXED SIUCICLASTICS-CARBONATES

Dal/DM Dolomite
Dol Lst /DL

~E;J
~ L
~

1-----I

Mrl/MR Mart
I

E:::J EJ

~
~

Dolomite-Limestone
(~equal mixture or nol determined)

=.JI

:z::I

I~> :;:

]+=+~+ }
p::;:r;::q
1

Mrlst, Lst arg / AL Marlstone. argillaceous LimeS10ne

E;J
CJ
SYMBOLS

!-sl,s/SC
sandy Limestone
OF COMBINED

~ ~

Chk /CK Chalk uncons lime/LM Unconsolidated Lime (e. g. calcareous Ooze)
CARBONATE ROCK

~[S]
1==1
TYPES

b:::::i:::::::d

EXAMPLES

MIXTURES OF

Sh,calc.MrI Strk/SH LS + MR SR calcareousShale wi1h Marl streaks


Mrl,~/MRSA

~ ~
E2@

Dol chk / DM CK chalky Dolomite

Wkst,chk/LS
chalky

CK W Lime-Wackestone

[[J] ~

very sandy Marl


Sh, dol dolomitic DL + AH SR + Anhd Strk/SH Shale with Anhydrite streaks

DoI,calc/DM LS calcareous Dolomite

IDENTIFICATION

OF CARBONATE

ROCKS

REACTION WITH 1011: COLD HCI ~Lst /LS ~Lst,doI/ LSDM ~Dol, calc/ DM LS ~Dal/DM Limestone (90-10011: Caco3J dOlomitic Limestone (50-9011: CaC03J calcareous Dolomite (50-1011: CaC03J Dolomite 1011: Caco3J
Instant. violent. specimen floats and U Moderate. but continuous.

dissolves within 5 minutes. Acid frothy.

:r:

.~."' ~,~,,~
up reaction.

m'...,. J

Nilto veryweak; beads form slowly during up ~ 10 1/2 hour. Acid becomesmilky.Heating speeds} co
Vi
and ail impregnated Lst/LS may react slowly.

Nate: Lstarg, STAIN TEST.

Lst anhd/LS

SH, LSAH

1 minute reaction time

.
It> It> ....... ~ N C1> CO C)

Red Mauve Dork blue to purple


Reagent: 0.211: HCI

Calcite pure ferroan Calcite Fe 2+ poor


ferroan Calcite Fe 2+ rich

~~h~t~~~=~oise

Darkturquoise
K-ferricyanide

:-

~~~c:~e~:ne
Ankerite
(~)

0.211: Alizarin

red S + 0.511: saturated

Appendix

3.2.1.2

CARBONATE
\J

PARTICLE

TYPES PARTIClE TEXTURE AND SIZE TYPE

SKELETAL PARTICLE

PARTIClES TYPE

SIZE AND TEXTURE unspecified foss.(blodastS},cngulor foss.(bioclosls),rounded


coated

Foss/F

6
R5

Whole

fossils,

Bel, ong/SF R2 ~
BCI,rnd/SF

Unspec.broken Unspec.broken Larger Pelagic

~ ~
<D
<II>

1/16

-4mm
>4mm

-/FLCO

1/16

- 4mm
>4mm }

Muddy internal texture

foraminifera.

-/SF FP@

foraminifera.broken

NON-SKELETAL

PARTIClES fragments. Uthoclasts aggregated particles

~ ~
e @
ABBR. Peld/PT Micrpeld/PM

1/16 - 4mm
>4mm 1/16 ComposIte . . Internal texture

4mm

Lcl/LC
Lel,oggr/LC Psoo/PS

0
AG <YJ 0

Angular

>4mm

}
1/16 - 2mm <1/16mm

Lithoclosts, Rounded

SYM.

SIZE AND TEXTURE TYPE

GpSI IPS AG CD

Rounded aggreg. panicles (Grapestone)

9
'*'

Pelletoid
Micrapelle10id

2)

\JSee also page 9

21 For definition

see page 9 B

CARBONATE
OOATED PARTIClES

PARTICLE

TYPES

EXAMPLES

OF COMBINED SYMBOlS

Oo,spt! 00

-0

Superficial

aoid (single-Ioyer)

In general add horizontal bars to any particle cooted with one layer. (See also Fl CO page 8)

00/00 P,so/PD
Onk 10K

0
@

0
@

Onkd/OK

Ooid 11/16-2mml Pisoid 1>2mml Multiple-layer cooling Onkoid 1I/16-2mml Onkoid } 1>2mml

~ ~ ; ~
.

hTWl.

Wkst,peld,bcl/LS PTSFW pelletoidal and bioclastic Lime-Wackestone Lst,chk,onk,suc/DLCKOKS r Dol dolomitic Limestone
chalky and onkoidal. sucrosic

G 0

Grsl,oo,porirex/LSODGX oolitiC, panly recrystallized


Lime-Grainstone

SKELETAL PARTICLES have the some bask symbol as used tor fossil content ~ supplemented with signs indicating fragmentation, rounding and/or coating. ISee pages 8 and 181

The term PELLETOIDhas various definilions. Loosely defined it is used to describe Lime-Mudstone (faecal) pellets in general. More precisely defined it is a non-layered. rounded non-skeletal particle with a micritic internal texture, between 1/16 and 2 mm in diameter. As such it is a subclass of CD.Silt-sized similar particles ore termed micropelle1oid. 9

CARBONATE TEXTURAL CLASSIFICATION (Dunham, slightly modified)


T EXT U R E Bdsll B Grsll G Pkstl UME P Wksfl -UME UME - GRAINSTONE N A M E

ORIGINAL COMPONENTS BOUND TOGETHER DURING DEPOSITION LACKS DEPOSITIONAL ORIGINAL TEXTURE RECOGNIZABLE COMPONENTS NOT BOUND TOGETHER GRAIN SUPPORTED MUD CONTAINS MUD >10%

UME

BOUNDSTONE

PACKSTONE

DURING

MUD SUPPORTED

~E -'::\. ~o
I-(\J D..

W Mdsll

- WACKESTONE

-----------DEPOSITIONAL TEXTURENOT RECOGNIZABLE

DEPOSITION

~A

M
<10% aph!

UME - MUDSTONE
aphanitic

A
FINE RECRYST ALUZED TEXTURE COARSE xlnl X suel S

crystalline

sucrosic 10 G') Q) II) ~ CII '" U1 "C1>

Appendix

3.2.1.2

TEXTURE

- GRAIN
RANGE

SIZE (Wentworth's

scale. slightly

modified)

NOMENCLATURE

mm 256

I'm

Phi 2J VISUAL -B

CARBONATES(Crystal size)

Bld/BO Boulder

>256 mm 64 - 256 mm 4- 64mm 2I 4mm 2mm

2S

LIJ CbI!CB I-

Cobble Granule very coarse coorse


medium fine very fine Silt Pelite

0::: ~Pbl/PB Pebble

64
4 2 I
1/2 1/4 1/8 1/16 1150

-6
-2 -I 1000
500 250 125 63 20

ro~

. }.

coarse crystalline

~xln/ill xln/.
crs xln/S mxln/Ixln/X !xln/!xln/microxlrV-

I.&J crs/C
IZ ILl 0:: c:t m/M f/F !/V w

ill/R

500 - 1000 I'm 250 125


63 20

0
1

very coarse crystalline coorse crystalline medium crystalline

500fJ.m 250fJ.m

2 fine crystalline 3 4 5.65 very fine crystalline extremely fine crystalline 1) microcrystalline

125fJ.m
63fJ.m < 20 I'm

t-

SIt/SJ

i= ::I Pel/PI ...J

11 Use Chk!CK (.Chalk)!or


2J Phi

porous type with earthy


in mm

(chalkyl

appearance

= -Log

diameter

11

ARCHIE MATRIX 1/1 TEXTURE

CLASSIFICATION

(at

10 x magnification) POROSITY TYPE


No visible Vugs Vugs Vugs vugs mm - 2 mm

Compact crystalline ;often "feather-edge" appearance on breaking Friable. dull, earthy or chalky appearance; particle s~ze < 20fLm;often exhibits capillary Imbibition Visibly particulate, granular or sucrosic appearance ;breaks along particle faces

A/A B/B

< 0.125 0.125

11/2

C/C D/D

> 2 mm < 1O~ > 10%

m/3

d/N d/N c/Y

~Vugs.disconnected. ~~Vugs . disconnected.

EXAMPLES OF COMBINED ARCHIE SYMBOLS

-j;

VugsI connected, Vugs1connected.


Matrix porosity
Matrix porosity

<10% > 10%


<10%
>10%

6OUB3d+40mc"e /60 2B3N+40 3 C5Y 60%.lype 2; 3% Ivoll of this type is disconnected B-sized vugs.
40%.type 3; 5% (vol) of this type is interconnected

e/Y

K
I II

C-sized vugs.

70 I-UA+30mB2d

Dte/ 70 t2A+30 3 B2N DtY

70~ =type 1 to 2 which forms matrix with no


visible porosity. 30~ =sucrosicwith 2% discomected B-sized vugs and 1~ interconnected D-sized vugs. 12

TEXTURE
ROUNDNESS (~efen 10 modal size ctass)

SPHERICITY (refers to modol size class)

~/RI ang /R2 (ang)/ R3 (rnd) / R4 rnd / R5 rnd / R6

Very angular Angular Subangulor Subrounded Rounded Well rounded SORTING

<0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.6 >0.B5

~/Ol elong/ 02 (elong)/03 (sph)/04 sph/05 sph/ 06

Very elongated Elongated Slightly elongated Slighlly sphericol Spherical Very spherical

<0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 O.B>0.9

0.6 0.7 O.B 0.9

(srt))/SI (srt)/S3 (srt)-srt/ 54

Very poorty sorted; unsoned Poorly sorted Poorly to moderately Moderately well sarted Well sorted Very well sorted SU Unimodally sorted 13 Bimodally sorted well sorted Note: Ranges
can be indicated by using two digits e.g. R24 = angular to subrounded

srt /55 ill/57 ill/59 unimod srl/ bimod srt / SB

fIt) II) "C\J '"


CT> CD (!)

Appendix 3.2.1.2

~-ni

=:::'.::1

-:?~~~~ ~=;'~f

g,

: ...-

:;

;i
....

.
~~~
'

(,:~.~,~~:;;:,'~:,;,~~:~:~,Tm~:,::,~',T:~~::...
PrePII,.db,M (PO"""I(!o~l~edPtl'Olo9~,V21pp_I!7-119,19S3)

t
0,85

""S!

~ ~

010

0.20

0.30

040
'.

0,60

'\;':"~ ,~,

fi"

.- ~'~

II 1f1 II !
~_.
~~
L ~

~-=-

..

~~~

-;;~

11
,"

.::fl~ ..",!!: ~
.45
.~';"""""",,"LM

,~- ~~ .._~ :~ <:::::;J <:) D 0 0


N ~

~ ~ Q 00 c::::::;c) 00 0 3~() 0
.85
Iph

~1 ::
.
..1'-

'~--:~c::.:::::, c:::::::> C) Q ~1(~ ~ c:::::) C:::J 0


~~"~:,6~.:~f:: .55
.Ieng

0 ::-; 0 ::
.95 ~I

.b5
(e!ong)

.75
IIph}

~-

permeable

.4

POROSITY FA8RIC RELATED POROSITY TYPE

AND PERMEABIUTY PERMEA81L1TY (Qualilalive)

inlgran/IG

X
~

Intergranular (porticle size >20,um)


I

imperm/KI

Impermeable, tight

lintpar/JP
inlxln/

Fineinterparticle (porticle size<2i,umJ (perm)/K3 Slightly (poorly) permeabie


Intercrystalline Intragranular lntraskeletcl Intracrystalline (perm)-perm/K4 perm/K5 Slightly permeable Moderately to permeable (Iairly) permeable;

IXc::J

introgron/VR

intnosk~I!VS inlraxln/VX lroc/F


P

..
=1=

perm/K7 Highly permeable

..

A88R.
nonpor/P1

POROSITY

(Qualitative)

Fracture
Non
porosity

- porous

dense

Primary

Secan~ary porosity

added to the lelt of code and symbol

(par)/P3
por /P5

Slightly (poorly) porous Fairiy porous; porous

Example: PIG=PX=Intergronular, primary porosity


MISCELLANEOUS cav/CV leoch/LE Covernous Leached TERMS

por/P7 Highly porous

res/RS Residual sal/SX Solution 15

repl!RP Replacement

vug/ VG Vuggy, vugular

COLOUR Colours are described

DESCRIPTION

by means 01 the Rock Colour Chart based on the Munsell System and issued by the Geological Society of America

COLOURS

MODIFYING ADJECTIVES

buf/8F blk/8K blu/ 8L brn/8W gyl GE gn/GN arng/ON

buff black blue brown grey green orange

alv/OV pk/ PK pu/ PU red/ RE wh/ WH yel/ YE

olive pink purple red white yellow

dk/DK 11/ LT mad/ MD mtl,vgl/ VM

dark lighl moderate, medium mallled, variegated

II possible, colours should be described by code, e.g. 5G 5/2 with names optionally added, e.g.greyish green. When using informal abbreviations, weak and modifying colours (-ish) are placed betw~en brackets. Vivid or strong colours con be emphasized by repeating the code.
EXAMPLES

(gy)gn/ (GE) GN- greyish green


ATTENTION: Wening rock surfaces decreases

red/RE RE -vividly red value liightness) of colour, but does no!


saturation),

change the chromo (=colour

16

( en ID I UI a> ..... (II a>

Appendix 3.2.1.2

ABBREVIATIONS FOR MINERALS

Anhd/ AH Biot/BI Calc/ CA Chlod CI Dol/ DM Fld/ FD Glc/ GC Gyp/ GY

Anhydrite Biotite Colcite Chlorite Dolomite Feldspar Glauconite Gypsum

Hrnb/ HO III/IL Kao/ KL Lmn/ FG Mic/ MC Mtmo/ MO Musc/ MV Olv/OV

Hornblende Illite Kaolinite Limonite Mica Montmorillonite Muscovite Olivine FOSSILS

Orlh/ OR Plag/ PG Pyr / Py Px/ PX

Of1hoclose Plagioclase Pyrite Pyroxene Quartz Selenite Siderite Sulphur

Oz/ az
Sel/ GX Sid/SD Su/SU

Foss/F

Fossils
I

in general

foss/FF

~
h/

For broken fossils


see page B

fossil hash, etc.,

Underlining of symbol FossFm~~ and repeating of code Foss bent/

6M

Fossils, marine
Fossils, benthonic

means rich occurrence


Fossils , fresh water Fossils. brackish water

(foss)/(F)

(6)

Brackets indicate scarcity

s'~~F6f FOSS,b~0~ 6e

Fos

Foss,pelg/0 F PEI.2J

'F BE~

Fossils, pelagic

17

FOSSILS

Acrt/ AC Alg/AG
Amm/AM Blm/BE Broc/BP Bry/BZ Chor/CH
Chtz/CZ

Acritarchs Algae Ammonites Belemnites Brachiopods Bryozoa Charophytes Chitinozoa Conodonts Carols

Ech/EM Fish Rem/FH Faram/FF F"fg~ /FL


F,\""~011 /FS

~Echinoderms r><:::> Fish remains {J, Foraminifera. in general Foraminifera. larger Foraminifera. smaller ~F benthonic
oram., smaller. smaller.

Nanptk/NP g~;tVOG Osl/ce Pit Rem!PL Rad/RA

@
@)
@ 0 :!:&

Nannoplankton, calcareous
Oligostegina Calclspheres Ostracods Plant remains (see also page 31 Radiolaria Rudists Sponge spicules Sporomorphs Stromatoporoids Tintinnids Trilobites ~Vertebrates Wood, silicified IB

#
rJJ

7
""'V

$
.{J,s

Yl
Q)J

Fa~:;;/FB Fa~~/FP Gast/GR Grap/GP Lbr, Pelcp, Biv/ LB Lbr,pelg/LP Mpl/MP

Rud/RD
Spic/SP

y
--.,..

F oram.. pelagic

:r
7?

~Gastropods

Spr/PN Strom/SM Tin/TI Tril/TL Vrtb/VE Wd,si/SW

(1)

Con/CD Car/CR Crin/CS Diat/DT Dinll/DF

I
IJ

Graptolites Lamellibranchs

Is',
(5 fQ1

(3

(Pelecypods,Bivalves)
~Lomellibranchs. pelagic

-C::. Crinoids 0 Diatoms

Microplankton Molluscs

Dinoflagellates I

Mal/ML

BED CHARACTERISTICS BED THICKNESS mm-bd/BB cm-bd/BC dm-bd/BD m-bd/BM tn-bd/BJ tk-bd/BK vr-bd/ BH Millimetre bedded
Centimetre Decime're bedded bedded

STRATIFICATION (shown to the right 01 the litholagicol column) CHARACTER OF BASE OF BED Abrupt or sharp Gradational Erosional surface CROSS BEDDING ~Cross-bedding ( non-directional) ~F Festoon cross-bedding
~p

< Iem t-10em 10-100cm > tOOcm

-/JA -/JG -/JE


Xb~t Xb~Ji~

Metre bedded

Thin bedded Thick bedded


Variable bedded

~-,rt
Xbgx~ xbd -c/ BXC~ xbg)i~~ -L!2 /

Planar crass-bedding

BEDDING APPEARANCE unbd,m~~S/ (bd)/B3 bd /B5 !1!!/B7

~RRipple-drilt, climbing ripples

~
(=)

~~s".'i~rent bedding, Slightly (poorly) bedded Fairly well bedded; bedded in general Well bedded Very well bedded ( see also LM, poge 20 1

Cross-bedding, chevron type


Cross-bedding. with angle indicated Cross-bedding, directional ( azimuth N BO. E 1 Well bedded, centimetre thickness Planor cross-bedding, to-100cm beds, N 25 E

x~x~8s%'BO..L

EXAMPlES OF COMBINATIONS cm-!1!!/ B7C

M/B9 Ii) ..... ID .... N 0> CO (!)

===cm
Pdm

dm-xbd-N25/ 2O-L BXDN25

19

Appendix 3.2.1.2

: STRATIFICATION BED CHARACTERISTICS


BED STRUCTURE

LARGE

SEDIMENTARY FEATURES

grd-bd/BG canv-bd/BV

Graded bedding" f'LConvolutebedding Slumped, conloned bedding


Drag folds (sedimentary) wavy bedding

Wdg/ WD
Len/ LN

::::><=> 'CJ

Wedqe-shaped loyer,
Lenticular [ayer, lens

tongue

slump,can~Sbd/

6/

- /SCF

Unit with concave flat top (channe!,

bottom and wash-out) infill infill

Drgfld,seg~

/SCFH

~Asabove, horizontal

irg-bd/BI ::::::::::::::: Irregular, Crtnk-bd/ sz=

- /

SCFF

'Z27

As above,

foreset

Crinkled bedding Vn,Dyke/VN,DY

~Unit with convex

top and flat bottom (add bedding attitudel ~Vein, sedimentary dyke

MISCELLANEOUS TERMS blky/BO Blocky Iis/Fl flg/FY flk/FK Fissile Flaggy Flaky lam/LM
Laminated 21

Ollsth/

OH

~Olistolitht slide. rockfall


~Olistostrome moss
t

OIiSlr / OL

flow

pap/ PR Papery slb/SY Varv/VV Siabby Varves

EXAMPLE OF COMPOSITION

Lst Olisth/LS OH

Limestone

oJistolith

1)Turb/TU=Turbidite 21See also ~/B9

20

SEDIMENTARY

STRUCTURES column) ON BEDDING PLANES Symmetrical ripples

(shown to the right of the lithological LINEATIONS ON BEDDING Parling lineati o~ Streaming . lineatIon Shell. Plant PLANES

RIPPLEMARKS

part-Lin/ -==:.. ~~

YP

strm-lin/ YS -==fass-L~16Ptt-L~1-Qgnain-Un/ yQ pbl-Un/ YR . -

primary current trneotion

Sym-R~~ ---~
intf-RP~ asymR~I~
---'1(....-/

Interference ripples, "tadpole neSIS' Asymmetrical -'- C X ripples in general

fossil lineation fragment nneotlon

..

caoc-Rpl/ ZC
canx

Lunate, barcha,no'id , crescentic npples (steep sIdes concave) Linguoid ,lobate ripples (steep sides convex) Planar, parallel ripples

Sand grain lineation


Pebble lineation

- R~I(
. .~~-'L ~c::

-=-

Plan-RPi~ adh-RPi~

AdheSion npples

21

SEDIMENTARY

STRUCTURES calumn)

(shown to the right of the litholagical

SYNDEPOSITIONAL MARKS AND STRUCTURES

flut-C~~--v--stri-~-vgray - ~~ y-load-Cs/ XL ---c.sprad-Cs/ XP--y-

Flute costs

pbl-Imb/ XI

C2-

Pebble imbrication Geopelal fabric; floored cavities

S Striation casts 2mm wide) G Groove casts (>2mm wide)


Load costs
Prod costs; bounce

-/xc

--

Directional features can be indicated by adding an arrow-head to the symbol and a numerical value corresponding to the direction(s). EXAMPLES ~(1201 IBO flut-Cs,NIBOE.(NI20E) / XF N1BON120

casts

rain - Imp/-v-uXR
Mdcrk/XM~ salt-Mid/XX Psnod/XN - /XT -/XO-L~

Raindrop imprints; gas, air or spring pits Mudcracks Salt moulds or hoppers phacoids

0
@ /:;,

Flute casts, directed N 180. E, secondary direction N 120. E 25 stri-Cs,N25E+prad-Cs,N40E/ XS N25. XPN40
40

Pseudo-nodules; Tepee structure

---V--S

--w--

Pull-over, flame structure

Striation costs and prod casls, directed respectively N 25. E and N 40. E 22 CO) CJI 10 I\,) toO (II ~

Appendix

3.2.1.2

BIOGENIC

STRUCTURES

POST

DEPOS!TIONAL

FEATURES

-/TR
- /VT
BurIBU
BarI BO

<=:::--;
/ ""''''''

Trails
trace

I .wormtrocks', fossils

'0l
-4J--VH
-+-

Vertebrate

tracks

~~~~~i~~I; H=horizontal Borings cnd animol tubes Bored surface ~Churned. bioturbated Faecal pellets. coprolites

CJ c=:J Cd
b:::J JL:]

GENERAL uncons,lse/Ci
Unconsolidated,
loose

(cons), Iri IC3 Slightly consolidated. friable cons, em! IC5 Consolidated. cemented, hard
2!!., cml IC? Strongly cemented. jt/J Jointed highly consolidated

Sri, bar I SF BO--.bloturI CB Pel,loe/PT Pit Rt IRT Alg Mal ISM Alg DamISM DO FE J...

(V=vertico!;

H=horizontol)

Plant root tubes IJ Algol mats D


~
1

=
=

stromatolites

sL:] ssL:]
~

flt,frae,sks/F, SK Disturbed; laulted, fractured, slickensided !!!,frac,sks/ FF, SKSK Highly disturbed weath,leach/WT,LE Redbd/RB Red beds 31 bed 2J

Algal domes

stromatolites

II See also Rt Bd IRT ( RootBed), page 3 2) Drawn across symbols for lithology 3) Con be drown across other lithological symbols

DID Weathered,leached; soil [Z2J


-/CS 3) Caliche

23

POST -DEPOSITIONAL DIAGENETIC STRUCTURES

FEATURES CONCRETIONS

-/BN

--.....r-v--

~Boudinage; ball cnd flow structure Pull-apart structure ~Collapse. solution breccia

ro-l L..9

Cone, Nod ICC,ND Concretions, nodules,

geodes

in genera!

- IDV
BC,solI BRSX Rauhw I RH. -/CI
-Iso -/SE -/HT -I BY

==:I.0;;:::::
[]

Bo)(workstructure,
Rauhwacke Cone-in-cone ~Stromatactis

A
-----.JoN'--

~ r=;J ~ ~
ro-lppPhos L..9

Cole Conc/CC LS Calcite concretions


ChI Cone/CC SI Chert concretions 1)

Anhd Cone I CC AH Anhydrite concretions,

scattered 2}

Anhd Cone, campr I CW AH Anhydrite concretions, compressed

Stylolites ~Horse-toiling

Canc/CC PP Phosphatic concretrons or nodules

---<=>--

Birdseye structure, keystone vugs

ro-Iso L..9

Sid Conc/CCSD SIderiteconcretionsor nodules


Fest Cane/CC FG FG . Ironstone concretions or nodules 24

for Chert; see Cht ICT type 21 "chicken-wire"

1)

page 4

<z>

HYDROCARBONS SOURCE ROCK TYPE TYPE OF ORGANIC MATTER

-/SR -/SRM -IOSR -IOSRM -/GSR

F9
q:Y)

Source rock Source rock. marginal ~Oil source rock

(~)

Oil source rock, marginal Gas source rock Gas source rock, marginal
A

-/H -/MH -1M -/MK -/K

Humic Mainly humic Mix1ure


Mainly kerogenaus Keragenous

F
(FJ

HYDROCARBON

INDICATIONS

-I GSRM

B Bil Bit

SOUD HYDROCARBONS
Bitumen

#
A

....

....

Asphalt Large asphalt seepage, asphalt lake


Mineral wax

= Surface On red) 1 group of indications = single indica1ion 2 = (well logs) B = Subsurface

. . Q)
v

.
C

.........

Asphaltite 25

CD ..., N

<

~ C!)

Appendix 3.2.1.2

HYDROCARBON A 2 'J) B GAS


Smell in genera!

INDICATIONS B A J 2

OIL
Smelt in general

0 rv (\))

0>
V

Q
OH,S

F oint smell Strong smell Smell of H2S

0 6
(6)

1\ \)

Seepage in general 0 Weak show, stains


Strong show

\' (V) V V \!

i
rOH'S

??
gas show

Gas seepage,

Poor seepage Strong seepage

(~)

Weak seepage

!!

Strong seepoge, show


Inflammable gas Non-inflammable gas

&-

.
6

4'
;,<

Heavy, tarry and dead oil ~Interpreted as oil productive Interpreted as oilorgas productive
Oil productive

:::

Blow-out

T
as gas productive

!co,

! CO2 Gas predominant CO2

l'

Interpreted

Y '?

Gos productive Condensate productive

A = Surface (in red) I = group of indicotions 2 = single indication B = Subsurface (well lagsl Regea codes; see Standard Legend 02.35.01-02.38. J3 26

GAPS AND UNKNOWN FORMATIONS TYPE OF GAP Gap in general; origin and cut-out unknown Tables

ITITIl ~
.OOm

Stratigraphic cut-out 600

gap in general; m

0ffiJ
~ f23J
? 27

Non-deposition,

hiatus

Erosional

gap, angular

(U)

200m

or non-anguladD);

cut.out

200 m

Gap due to faulting; cut.out 120 m

Unknown formation, no outcrop, no samples

STRATIGRAPHIC

BOUNDARIES GENERAL Stratigraphic

ON MAPS
Cenain

Uncertain

Exp18n8tOry

eection

boundary

~
Disconformity, hiatus Angular unconformity

~~,~/}~
--U--

=:= ==:==}~bl
-u-

~J } ~u"""- ~~u-~ ~

28

(II <D N (II CD ..... (II N

(i)

069238/63

OPCO:

COUNTRY:

CUTTING SAMPLE DESCRIPTION


WELL: FROM: TO: DESCRIPTION BY: DATE: PAGE NO:-

DEPTH

(in metres)

DESCRIPTION

OF

EACH

CONSTITUENT

~I COLLECTED CORRECTED AT FOR


TIMELAG I
I
I I I I I I I I f I I I

I I , I I I

.
I
I I I 1 I I I I I I I

I
I

I I

!
I I I I I I I

I
I I I I I

i
I I
I , .

I I

'

~I
~If C . ,n t a CJ,

TRACES

OF

NATURAL SOlVEN1 SOlVEN1 1lCET00E REACT. OIL STAINING CUT FlUOft. FLUOR.

REMARKS (i... FORMATION.

FAUNA TOPS

etc.)

'--1 J> '0 '0 (1) ::J a. x' UJ

:.-.

G69238/l

OPCO:

COUNTRY:

SIDEWALL SAMPLE DESCRIPTION


WEll: DEPTH OF HOLE: DATE TAKEN: DESCRIPTION BY: 0 RUN NO: PAGE NO:DATE:

z ~DEPTH

RECOVERY

HYDROCARBON INDICATIONS LI THOLOGY


NATURA FLUOR. FLUOR. CUT REACT. Oil STAINING

0 :I: (/)

REMARKS/FAUNA/FLORA

MM

,..---: "0 "0 C\) ::J a.

'

x.

()J N ~lEGEND: MF: misfire lB:

lost bullet

t EB = em pyb ull e t

OPCO:

I
Described by:

Well:

I
%

Core No.1

Appendix

- -

3.2.1.5

CORE DESCRIPTION
Cored from
Formaticn:
DEPTH
mbdf
SEDIM.

to__Recovered:

m.

Date:
STRUG.

Core lize: Core head :

Sheet:
EST.

of
REMARKS

HYDROCARaINDlc. FOSSILS

LITHOLOGY

LITHOLOGICAL

DESCRIPTION

FEATUR.

~
0/0

~~z~

~i ~g !;~ !;c! ~~

vi UU CIt:

~ II)

.n

t<) N 0> CI) (!)

Appendix3.2.1.6

ROUTINE

SEDIMENT
EXAMPLE

DETERMINATION
A

SCRATCHES

ON GLASS NO

CONTAINS
SANDSTONE SILTY

QUARTZ
SIL TSTo.NE

CLAYSTONE XTALS, CHERT.

OUARTZ

COLD '0 ~ HCL ~~~E


l'
EFFERVESCES CONTAINS

':

r
I

AT

~
NO

NO OR HESITANT

REACTION

CALCITE

RESIDUE YES

/'"

ARGIL.LIMESTONE (MARL)

LIMESTONE

CHALK
CALC.CLA YSTONE

DOLOMITIC

LIMESTONE

PLACE

IN HOT

1 0 ~ HCL

EFFERVESCES <..

AT ONCE

NO REACTION

CONTAINS DOLOMIT!
DOLOMIT!
CALC.DOLOMITE

CHECK FOR: CLA VSTONE/SHALE


'" ~

Hote:

ALIZARIN RED ~TAtN TEn can al~Q b. u~d to diFF ntlat. between Lim.stone and Dolomite Colcite : will~oin red Dolomite: not ~oin.d SE APPENDIX 3.2.1.16

OYPSUM
'"

"'ANHYDRITE

"'ROCK --COAL

SALT

"'OLAUCONITE "'TUFF
"'FELD SP A RS/MICA/PYRITE

~ ~ N
$

I!)

EG.375

Appendix 3.2.1.7

ROUTINE Step no.

SEDIMENT

DETERMINATION

EXAMPLE B

Test Scratch with need Ie a)

Res u It hard

Conclusion chert, quartz, quartzitic sandstone or quartzite

Next step

1.

microscope

b)

gouges swell does not swell Iclay Idominant Ishalel if steps

2.

Drop in cold
10'/0 HCL

a) b)

2-c.i, 3-ai, 4.a +


band 5 are negative c} effe rvesces
Icalcite present

at once i) no residue ii) leaves residue


d)

I
record amount 4 3

Ilimestone I

no reaction
i) no residue ii) leaves residue

3.

Use hot
10'70HCL

a) efts rvesces
ldolom ite

I
.

record

amount
'4 5

b) 4 Crush with glass roo a)

no reaction breaks readily into angular pieces, eventually powder resists and scratches noisily flakes a) clear, fractured b) clear to cloudy, cleaved c) opaque j) brewn in gre~n iiD other gypsum or anhydrite

record

b)

silicon sand/silt present

:) 5. Wash free of acid

silicon)clay

record

Iquartz I
IIe Idspar
I

-I. II) I<) N Q> CD CI

siderite glauconite chert and rock fragments

IPK No.m-sl

G69238/68

CD

U ~C .... u <I; ~I.IJ loLl ~:z: II: u 0 c -' &' U) 0 ~r CJ) <I; a:: r I.L z '" u 0 0 en z .... <I (I') (I) u ~J: ~r .... + I LLI 3:

c ~'" %
:r

0
Z 0 :J:

@
z
0 i= 0
<I

:r
Z ~0 0

....
3: JU)
a:: 0 <II '" Z c :z: U II: :) 0 Z 0

0 ....
<I 0 ~.J 0 u O Z

t
3: z 0 ..J 0 %

,.
z 0 r u ..J u :I: 0

- -

u a <I ..J I.IJ 0

r I.&J 0 a: <I III 0 8: z

Z 0 I-

<4 r
LLI

t- W u a:: c:( 0 0: '" Z

<I;

..J

a: u

a: :z: + I

0 (.) <I +

c a:: :;) a::: 0 ...J - 0 N <I U J

~;:::J

i= <I; 0 a: ~:;:) Z i&I 0 0 ..J ~" ~..J '" z Q.. 0 0 ~~u u 0 U 0 z Z LLI a: 0 I z ::t i= o ..J <5 <I C % 0

~z ~~:z:0 ~- 0
~tc a:

0 -J
u.. 0 LLI en z z 0 0 ..... Q.. r

@
:J: 0

@
taJ

0 U

r
en t&I r II: I.&J .... c I.aJ r U) <I; III :I C

t-

;::

Z 0

(J

0 ..J :z:
Z

:J

~8: <I

en a I&J a

3:

~.....

..J

:I ::t u oC( a: LIJ <I

0 r ...J 0

a: CD en

a:: ::a ~0 ...J 0

....J

<t t(fJ ,.. a::

LL

:I It:: 0

REMARKS
TESTS DIAGNOS TESTS DIAGNOS
TEST

LI MESTONE/ CALCAREOUS DOLOMITE/ DOLOMITIC CASING


CEMENT ROCK SAL T

+ + +
+

+ VIGOROUS NO RESIDUE + WITH WEAK RESIDUE ACID

+
NO RESIDUE

+
PI NK

SALTY

YELLOW

SOLUTION

VARIABLE

RHOMBIC

IC

+
NO RESIDUE

VARIABLE

IC

~0 ~0.
CD

+ TURNS
-

:::tI

YELLOW

+
-

+PINK

+
PINK

DISSOLVES

LIGHT

GREY
WHITE

OFTEN

CUBI C

DIAGNOSTIC TESTS

0 () ~

OR VIOLET

TRANSPARENT

RED FIBROUS PLATY

00 DIAGNOST,C
TESTS
DIAGNOSTIC
TE S T

GYPSUM

+
+-

( Ma y b.

co Ic) (May b. dol)

BE COMES OPAQUE

WHITE I

TURNS MILKY TRI'NSPARENT WHITEI SOLUTION TRANSPARENT TURNS MILKY GREY

0 0
..
0

3: z fT1
:::tI

'"

r
Q ....... 0

ANHYDRITE

(May b. calc) IMay b. do I)


-

(May b. dol)

+ -

BURNS

D I A G N OS T ; C

G)

III .., fT1

LIGNITE

+
SHALE +

~(May b. calc)

SWELLSI FLAKES IN S HALE S SWELLS IF


CLAY DOMINANT

RED

GLOW -

BLACK BRGWN VARIABLE

0 DIAG"IGST:
TEST GRAIN SIZE

-t
()

p ""T1
!:i 0 Z

~CLAY/

A LOT 0 F

II LOT OF

1/256-

mm

DIAGNOSTIC

MARL

CLAY RESIDUE CLAY RESIDUE

VARIABLE

TESTS DIAGNOST~IC GRAIN


1/256

00

SIL T

TRANSPARENT

- 1/16...m DIAGNOST! C
TESTS

SIZE

-t ~)

en

fT1

QUARTZ

TRANSPARENT 0 PIIau E
WHITE, BLACK,

AMORPHOUS
CONCHOIDAL

(0

CJ)

-t

CHIIRACTERISTIC TESTS CHARACTERISTIC

CHERT

(~ @@
}> -0 -0 (II
::J 9: )( ~ N

BROWN, RED
PI NK

FRACTURE

FELDSPAR

WHITE

if,' TESTS @ " CHIIRAC TER'ST!C

MICA

of coorsely lucrosic

LUSTRE,BROWN BLACK, WHITE FLAT SILVER, TRANI' PL AT E GOLDEN YELLOW CU BI C

-, (to: TEST @ ~CHARACTER :ST I C

'-

PrRITE

been erroneously

d'icribed

as well serted

TESTS ~(11) CHARAC T RIS T'ii

:...,.

lampl.. SidewaU

dolomite hove occalionally

sand.tone.

00

Appendix

3.2.1.9

CLASSIFICATION OF SILICICLASTIC ROCKS


Three main mineralogical groups are distinguished: 1. 2. 3. quartz sandstones containing less than 107. feldspar and 10% lithics (percentages of bulk volume solids arrived at by point counting); Arkosic sandstones with more than 10% feldspar; lithic sandstones with more than 10% unstable lithics.

Further differentiation into arkosic-lithic and lithic..arkosie sandstones is possible, and is indicated in the diagram. Lithics can be further subdivided into metamorphic, volcanic-plutonic. and sedimentary components. Three textural groups are distinguished based on clastic matrix counts (matrix defined as clastic material less than 60 micron in diameter): 1. 2. 'arenites', matrix; which are clean. grain.supported less clean, but grain-supported sandstones with less than 15% sandstones with 15-20/35%

'psammites', matrix;

3.

'waekes' . dirty, only partly-grain-supported sandstones with 20/35-75':b matrix.

Application of the criteria results in 9 main sandstones types, each pertaining to a certain mineralogical and textural class.

TEXTUR~.L ~",~""""""'~, """

MATURITY """""""""""""""""~

QUARTZ
(F<IOO/O.L<IOO/O)
3:

Z QUARTZ n WACKE QUARTZ PSAMMITE

QUARTZ

ARENITE

rT1

ARKOSIC (F>tO,L<IO)
ARKOSIC-LITHIC
(F>L , L>10)

:u :to r 0
G')

n :to r 3: :to

LITHIC
(LI;.IO, F<IO) LITHIC-ARKOSIC
(L>F t F>tO)

-f

C :u

-f -<

t
-< IE) 'rt) C)

MINERALOGY

.
SANDY

TEXTURE

--+75"10
I

(greywocke)
Poorly to ex tr.m.ly
poorly sort.d S$ t.

WACKE

PSAM MITE
MATRIX
FILLS PORES

ARENITE
15.'" GRAIN
1

100"10

MUDSTONES

Mod.rat.ly to ..11 sort.d sst.


SAND

Well to extremely well sort.d s st.

0/,

MUDSTONES AND CLAYSTONES

PARTLY GRAIN 20-35"10 SLiPPORTED I

SUPPORTED

0> '" II) I PK.NO.E'-2.20/

Appendix 3.2.1.10

CLASSIFICATION

OF CARBONATE ROCKS

TEXTURAL

CLASSIFICATION

(after DUNHAM,slighty modified)

Depositional

Texture

Recognizable Original components were bound together during deposi-

Original Components Not Bound Together During Deposition


Contains mud (particles of clay fine silt size)

Depositional Texture not Recognizable Crystalline Carbonate (Subdivide acoo~1ng to classifications designed to bear on physical texture or diagenesis.)

and

Lacks mud tion

as

and is
grainsupported

Mud-supported

Grainsupported

Less than More than

10% grains

10% grains

shown by Intergrown skeletal matter, lamination contrary to gravity, or sediment-floored cavities that are roofed over by organic or questionably organic matter and are too large t.o be interstices. Boundstone

Mudstone

Wackestone

Packstone

Grainstone

Mdst

Wkst

Pkst

Grst

Bdst

Lst,

xln

~M~

~
ADD

~
APPROPRIATE

~
PARTICLE SYMBOLS

~~

f xln

crs xln

Lst, aph < t% particles

COMPOSITION
0
10 50
I

1 00 010 Dolomite

IMES10NE

DOLOMITIC LIMESTONE

CALCInC DOLOMITE

DOLOMITE

Lst
100 90

~}.
Lst, dol Dol- Lst Dol, colc

~~
Dol
10
0 010 Celelt.

50 Dolomite

II I I I Ilchalk

sucrosic

00

c~alky Lime-Wackestone
* Dolomite Limestone
(:t equal mixture or not determined)

chalky DOlomite~

oJ ,... ....... CD I<') (IJ 111 CD C)

For the Archie classification of matrix texture and pore-size and pore-distribution,

see Appendix3.2.t.18

Appendix

3.2.1.11

CHECKLIST FOR CARBONATE

ROCK DESCRIPTION

DEPOSITIONAL Mudstone Wackestone Packstone Boundstone

TEXTURES

SKELETAL PARTICLES Charophytes Blue-green algae Gastropods Lamellibranchs Molluscs Ostracods Stromatolites "Favreina" Benthic forams Echinoids Fish remains Calc. wormtubes Codiacean algae Calc. imperf. forams Calc. perf. forams Rudists Calcispaeres Dasycladacean algae Monogeneric shell banks Trilobites Tentaculites Bryozoans Brachiopods Crinoids Tubular algae Cellular algae Corals Hydrozoans Stromatopores Aeolisaccus Calc. sponges Planktonic forams Radiolarians Pteropods Ammonites Silic. sponges Graptolites Tintinnids Filaments Part.dissolv.calc.foss. High diversity of organisms Low diversity of organism~

NON SKELETAL PARTICLES Pisoids Ooids Oncoids Aggregate grains Pelletoids Faecal pellets Cortoids ("coated grains") Lithoclasts Terrigenous particles (e.g. sand) Authigenic Minerals (e.g. Pyrite) SEDIMENTARY STRUCTURES Caliche Hicrokarst Mudcracks Dessication flakes Root marks Tepee structures Collapse breccias Undulating algalmats Zebra-fabrics Fenestral fabrics Birdseyes Hard grounds (with borings) Bioturbation Stromatactis Slump structures Turbidites BEDDING Cross bedding Irregular rom lam. Massive bedding Wavy bedding Lamination (gen.) Even mm bedding Flaser bedding Graded bedding Lenticular bedding Med. thick bedding
Regular

Lst-Mrl
Small scale coloured/ Multicoloured bedding
MINERALS Salt Anhydrite Gypsum Dolomite Silica Glauconite "Clay" EARLY DIAGENESIS Dessication crusts Asymmetric cement Interstitial evaporites Dol fenestral fabric Fibrous cement Aragonite cement Micritization LATE DIAGENESIS Irregular thin calcite veins Zones with red and orange colouring Cm-sized fissures filled with non-carbo Vadose pisolites Recryst. particles Leaching/Dissolution Internal sediment Even cement Recryst. micrite Granular cement

1m)

even bedding

Coarse wavy bedding Coarse irregular lam. Convolute bedding

......

"CD I<) (\I 0>

(!)

'"

G 69238/7<.

PARTICLE OF ANY SHAPE WITH BROKEN FACES


41(

ROUNDED MORE OR LESS EaUANT PARTICLE


NON.SKELET AL COATED PARTICLE MORE THAN LAYER IRREGULAR

D2 IoU

SKELET

AL

NON.SKELET INTERNAL

AL

AGGREGATE OF PARTICLES OR MOUNDED LAYERS OF MUD

D2 u
mm .020

to-

SHAPE SPICULE & ROD

TEXTURE

NOT ETERMINH SKELETAL

INTERNAL

TEXTURE

NOT DETERMINED ONE LAYER REGULAR


SPHEROIDAL OVOIDAL DISCOIDAL HEMISP~EROIDS LATERALLY LINKED STACKED ONE

BLADED TABULAR

PROLATE & EOUANT

MUD

COMPOSITE

FURTHER

MUD

COMPOSITE

FURTHER

Mlcroblocl8.tlc SILT

h.sh

NB: Further subdivision o' particl..


00

0' silt IIz8 II not warranted

""'cropenetolc

\1'

'*'
P.II.told
<> c:>

00

~~/.
~~/ Superficial
Oold

~~%/
/
'/ Oold

~/ '/. '/.
~/ %
/:% '/. Onkold

~~~'/
/

~/.//
/ /.

~~~%
/. /

-.063

SAND
IoU

ii . -:;;.
2.0 -:~
]1

."

Vi
GRANULE 4.0

~ ~.!D. ~: ~/(J

. ~
e

Fuzzy outline Firm outline ncl..rcemen


P.eudoold

~'/

~~/
/. /.~
/

Clot

.'. "...'

-0~~~~Add "wing,"

0
Onkold

'i/.
Gr.p..tone /. "/ CD /. /

a..:1 <C( VI

.; :I
~

~
(2) <D

e
1 5.03.65

~
Sub,tltut. any fOIlI' symbol

~toany

particle

Pl,old @

0
Onkollle, SS @)

//.~
/
/. "/ //'///

~.;-:
'l/
Stromatolites

/.

PEBBLE

Mudstone P.bbl.
41>

Grainstone etc. P.bbl. I /

LLH ~~LINKED "

SH

STACKED

CLASSIFICATION OF CARBONATE PARTICLES OTHER THAN WHOLE FOSSILS


(modified after MOORE, GIGON and DORSMAN,1964) :t>
"0 "0

ro :::J 0X ~ N
:..... N

Appendix 3.2.1.13

CHART

FOR ESTIMATING PARTICLE PERCENTAGES

# ..

.
. ..
,
#

.4

"",'

,.
.

"" ~

,
.. ~
IX) "ft) N 0\ CO CI

.
,.

. .

.
,.

KEY TO IDENTIFICATION

OF SKELETAL

GRAINS IN THIN SECTIONS

Appendix 3.2.1.14 poge 1

( ofter FLUGEL, 1982)


Keys to the identification of skeletal grains. which are usuatly cut quite randomly during thin-section preparation. have been designed by Horowitz and Potter (1971). Fuchtbauer (1974: 212). and Majewske (1969. especially for pelecypod shells). Milliman (1974) has published a Key for identifying Recent carbonate particles in transmitted and direct light. The following Key to Identification. was originally developed to serve the practical needs of the microfacies courses in the Paleontology Department of Erlangen University. It was found to be quite necessary. especially for beginners. to reduce the confusing mass of possible thin-section figures to a few basic forms. thus simplifying the first introduction to the problems involved. The sizes listed in the Key represent only the most common values. and hence must be regarded as just rough approximations. The Key to Identification considers only two-dimensional "thin-section figures" and reduces them to the following major shapes and structures: A. B. C. D. E. F. Circular and elliptical U and V shaped Curved. . Net-like Layered. . . Chains of segments. Key Nr. I 12 16 23 31 34 not be very well defined; sometimes a dark dot in the center (axial structure). Microstructures (of septa) like .bundles of fibers ("herring bone structure") or with dark lines down the middle . . . . . solitarycorals (Rugosa and Scleractinia) Large central opening; thick shell wall usually recrystallized; longitudinal sections show cylindrical figures containing partitions with a singlepore in the center.. . Nautiloidea Large circular figure indented on one side, with an element somewhat thicker towards the center. Shell usually recrystallized or cross-lamellar . . gastropods (oblique section of columella) Circular figure with poorly defined wall exhibiting vermiform structures . . . . . . . . . . .. calcareous sponges Subrounded particles; very fine meshwork. dark brown to black in transmitted light; often differentiated into a thick peripheral part and a gauze-like central part (spongy material), phosphatic . . . . . . . . . . remains of vertebrates Subrounded micritic particles without any distinct internal structure; diameter generally < I mm .. .. . . . peloids Generally a few circular figures or segments of circles linearly arranged or in spherical aggregates. Chambers round or angular, often with spine-like ornamentation. total diameter 0.5-1 mm, sometimes larger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . planktonic foraminifera Circular segments with matching protuberances, lying contiguous to each other as mirror images - corresponds to ,WOcalcite plates which extinct at ditTerent positions. . .. . ophiuroid vertebra Circular segments and kidney-shaped figures often growing linearly along a rod-shaped element; sometimes in groups; diameter ahout 0.05 mm. Wall not differentiated . Globochaete Symmetrical linear figure. Round chamber in the middle with concentric chamber segments becoming larger towards the ends Microscopic sizes . foraminifera (planispiral and trochospira/) "" Macroscopic sizes . . . juvenile ammonites and gastropods Unsymmetrically arranged chambers: Microscopic sizes encrusted foraminifera Macroscopic sizes serpulids

d (2c) lOa

. . . . . .

b (I b) II a

. . . . ..

..,...

The letters or numbers in parentheses should aid in retracing your original steps in the identification process. A. Circular and Elliptical Ia b 2a a, Scattered figures. . . 2 II Interconnected figures. . . . . Several openings of more or less the same size: Subrounded micritic particles, diameter about 0.15-0.50 mm; regular pattern of points which are actually cross-sections of canals. sometimes filled with sparry calcite . . . Crustacean coprolites Large opening with an outer ring of smaller openings Characeae One central opening No central opening. . . ... recrystallized sponge spicules (rhaxes) which cannot""'" be more closely identifIed. radiolarians. planispiralforamini(era or calcispheres. or. JO Diameter <O.lOmm: Calcite rings without microstructures, together with U and V shaped figures. .. oblique sections of calpionellids Diameter generally < 0.50 mm 4 Diameter often> 0.50 mm . 5 Diameter usually several mm . 6 Diameter> I em, up to several em . . . 7 Microcrystalline or sparry circular figures; original inner boundary often very indistinct. outer houndary sometimes obscured by jagged edges . caldtized radiolarians Often circular sections with unclear periphery. wall may consist of various kinds of layers; sometimes with fine radial pores' , calcisphaeres . . . . .. Large central opening: Thin calcitic wall elongated to regular pointed spines; sometimes spiral structure and outer ring of smaller openings; diameter about 3 mm . . ... . Characeae-Oogonia and gyrogonites Transparent. often yellowish; sometimes spiky outline around a circular ligure; maximum diameter I mm . . foraminifera. e.g., Nodosaria Very complex geometrical pattern of radial and tangential elements around a central opening, sometimes ornamented, sometimes finely perforated single crystal . . . . . Echinaid spine Central opening with walls of varying thickness, which are often transversed with pore canals which often appear dark. The pore canals may be of uniform width, or may taper either to the outside or the

(1 a)

d dl d, e el e2

a, b

(2b)

3a

B.

U and V Shaped

b c d e (3 b) 4 a

12a

(l2b)

h (3 c) 5a

b 13a h (13 a) 14a

d (13 h) 15a

inside boundaries

g h (3 d) 6 a

b (3 c) (7 a) 7a b 8a

~ co "N '" en <D (!)

(7 b) 9a

Large central opening, dentate outline (outside ornamentation); diameter up to about I mm . tentaculites Sharply defined circular and elliptical figures with very small central opening. calcite or SiO,; usually together with rod-shaped figures; sometimes with a pointed end; without any internal structure , sponge spicules . . .. Calcitic circular and ' elliptical figures with a narrow central opening; wall with lamellar microstructure. . brachiopod spines (e.g. productids) Calcitic phosphate. often dark-colored circular figures; diameter mOl-sized: sometimes irregularly elongated to an elliptical form; often together with "shepherd's crooks" - see 21; . . . trilobites Large. calcitic figures of encrusted shells; microstructure divided into two parts: outer concentric lamellar structure, clear inner layer; figures usually in clusters .. . . serpulids (see 22 c) Large calcitic ligures. microstructure divided into three parts: differentiated prismatic middle layer and clear inner and outer layers; figures often overlap each other like the tubes of a telescope. scaphopods Central opening very small or absent 8 Central opening large. . .. .. .. 9 Small central lumen with various "shapes (circular, pentagonal. etc.). surrounded by very fine meshwork; often yellowish single crystal . . . . .. ... crinoid plates Large circular figure (diameter'" 3-10 mm) with very small (or absent) central opening. surrounded by alternating layers of light- and dark-colored rings and/or large radiating prisms of calcite . . . . . . .. . . . . .. belemnite rostrum Large central '" opening with radiating elements which usually do not extend to the center; varionsly differentiated walls which mayor may

.'

Dasycladaceae or Gymnacodiaceae

Length generally < 0.20 mm; U and V shaped figures sometimes with flange or constriction near the open end; sometimes with thorn-shaped elongation. Wall calcitic or with dark-colored (organic) lamella calpionellids/tintinnids Length generally> 0.50 mm . 13 V-shaped figures. . . . . . . . . 14 Broad U-(and V-)shaped figures. . ... 15 Narrow V figures. sometimes serrated outer edge (ornamentation), sometimes also inner ornamentation, sometimes Usegmented", Length in mm and em range . . . . .. ten/aculites V figures stacked inside each other, edges extended (Upper Jurassic/Cretaceous) ..' "Bankia" striata Broad V shaped figures with symmetrical bulbous thickenings at the hase or along the sides, single crystals,often smaller than 14a . . .. pelagic crinoids """'" V shaped figures with narrow V shaped inner Long. relatively narrow cavity; wall of inorganic (calcitic) and organic (dark-colored) lamellae; diameter up to em size . . . belemnites Large central opening, distinct wall with pores which are uniformly thick or taper towards the inside or the outside (oblique longitudinal section); in tangential section circular pores may also be visible; sometimes clearly segmented . . dasycladaceans Serial associations of barrel-shaped or ovoid segments, generally thin walls with numerous very fine pores which radiate obliquely outwards. Inner space wide, usually filled with sediment or sparite; rarely primary longitudinal structures . . . gymnocodiaceans

C. Curved

16a h 17a b (17a) 18a


( 16a)

Generally solid. . . . . . . . 17 Generally hollow. . . . 22 Slightly curved. . . .. .. 18 Very curved. recurved, and coiled. . .. .. 19 Very thin (about 0.03 mm); relatively long: often deposited parallel to each other and in great abundance. Lamellar and fine prismatic microstructure . .. "filaments" b Thicker, sometimes corrugated; often various microstructures within a shell (lamellar, prismatic. crossed-prismatic) . ... . . . pelecypod valves Thick jagged convex edge. . . . . . Aptychus d Curved shells; lamellar microstructure; calcium phosphate (brownish, very low hirefringence); shell thickness to 0.20 mm . ... .. .. ... . ... inarticulate brachiopods Thick. often very curved and bent elements with (and without) dark-colored vertical and oblique pores (diameter about 0.03 mm), and conspicuous fine lamellar microstructures ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . articulate brachiopods Calcitic; generally slightly curved elements with peripheral inner structures (pores in the cortex wne) and generally strong recrystallization; coarse sparitic central wne . . "phylloid" algae (Squamariaceae?)

Appendix 3.2.1.14 poge 2


g (l7b) 19a b (l9a) 20a b Half-moon elements. single crystals. . . . . . . . . .. .. arm plates of crinoids or dorsal and laleral shields of ophiuroids Spiral. . . . . 20 Bent at one end. . . . . . . 21 Unpartitioned spiral. center often thickened. Crossed-prismatic microstructure usually destroyed . . . gastropod cross-section Partitioned spiral: mm-sized: wall and surface elements variously foraminifera differentiated .. ." Partitioned spiral: cm-sized; partitions with an opening; walls usually , . . recrystallized. .. juvenile ammonites .' "'"shepherd's crook, prismatic microFigure bent at one end like a structure. generally distinct dark-colored edges . trilobiles (Ihorax segments) . ." "" Thin valves or shells. edges recurved: size 0.5 to I mm; fine prismatic microstructure .. ,., ostracods Very small (diameter 0.10 10 0.05 mm). short and curved tubes usually occurring in clusters; often embedded in micritic layers; sometimes linked in chains which may be intertwined . . . . . porOSlrOmalealgae (Cyanophyceae, e.g.. Girvanella) Slightly curved. longer. sometimes simple bifurcated tubes with microgranular wall: diameter usually about 0.10 mm; often occur in clusters; frequently together with reef builders (Late Triassic)
. ..., ' ' Microtubus

(25 e) 28 a

b (24b) 29a

Shells with "cellular-prismatic" structure. very regular rectangular and . radial pattern. Prism size approximately 0.05-0.1 mm .. rudisllamellibranch shells . ... '" Shells with "honeycomb structure" in tangential sections, diameter of the prisms to 0.10 mm pelecypods (Inocerams)

(19 b) 21 a

b (16 b) 22a

Colonies of stacked hemispherical cysts: sometimes witb spine-like columna I elements. .. . . . . stromatoporoids b Cystose structure containing short vertical tubes with horizontal bryozoans (tube diameter generally < 0.50 mm) elements. ..' or tabulale corals (tube diameter generally> 0.5 mm. often several mm) Vertically arranged cysts. outer periphery of the total structure very . ... distinct . .. .' peripheral and longitudinal seCliollsof corals and sphinctozoan sponges Wormlike elements in a micritic matrix which is usually dark-colored: often whole structure may appear as a circular figure . , calcareous sponges b Flat fragments or conical figures with irregular network of darkcolored elements; sometimes distinct chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . .. reticulaleforaminifera (e.g., liluolids) Sessile colonies: irregular network structure consisting chiefly of vertical and horizontal elements: often star-shaped channel systems and tabulate tubes of various widths. . (Mesozoic) hydrozoans d Fragments of calcium phosphate, brownish or black-colored (low birefringence); meshes of various sizes remains of bones

(23 b) 30a

Well-defined curved or coiled calcitic tubes; often cemented; microstructure divided into 2 parts (inside: parallel lamination: outside: cone-in.cone lamination); mm-sized. tube diameter about I mm serpulid., D. Net-like
. 23a Regular well-defined meshwork. b Irregular meshwork of various shapes. (23a) 24a Meshwork rectangular. square or polygonal . . . . . . .. b CyslOse meshwork. Meshwork . . extremely . . regular.

E. Layered 31 a b (31 a) 32a b Encrusted. planar distribution on the substrate . 32 33 Non-encrusted particles... " Irregular. micritic laminated fabric with spar-filled cavilies parallel to the bedding plane: mm sizes . . . . . "algaill/als" Structures made up of micrite and sparite curved in various shapes: sometimes with terrigenous accessory elements (e.g., quartz) and overgrowth of sessile benthonic organisms. Basic geometric form. comparable to a hemisphere: cm- to m-sized . -'troll/atoliles (May be confused with "caliche" layers) Irregular nodules and spherical particles. Outline often lobular: irregular layers not parallel to each other. sometimes overlapping (usually micrite, algae. foraminifera),surroundingbiogenic or inorganic "nuclei", mm- to cm.sized . ollcuids (May be confused with "caliche oncoids") Phosphatic Regularly outlined (often rhombic) particles with distinct very concentric lamellar structUre: usually dark in transmitted light fish scales . . . . . . .. ...' ..""'" or light gray colo~: distinct Toothlike. often irregular outline. dark lamellar structure in various orientations. Total size between I and 3 rom conodonts

. '

24 30 25 29

very fine: single crystals'

(24a) 25 a Network structures. . b Open meshwork of thin rod-shaped

e (25a) 26a

. echinoderms .. . 26 '" elements interlocked at distinct sponges angles (SiO, or calcite) . . . . . .. .' Bifurcated "tubes" whose angles are all the same within a "colony" porostromale filamemou-, algae (Type "Caveuxill ") Colonies of tubes more or less parallel 10 each other 27 Shells composed of prisms lying parallel to each other. .. 28 Very fine net structure of generally rectangular cells, which appear black in transmitted light. Differentiation into areas with larger and smaller meshes; sparry-filled circular figures embedded in the net (sporangia). Cell diameter about 5-15 microns

(31 b) 33a

b b,

b,

. .. Corallinaceae """'..., b Cm-sized colonies of long thin vertical threads: horizontal elements, if present. may he irregularly or regularly spaced (zonation). No other differentiation. Mesh diameters between 10 and 30 microns . Solenoporacean red algae . . .. .. ."'" Fragments with a line net structure of various-sized cells in the center and cyeiic alternations of cell sizes on the periphery. Cell walls sometimes quile thickened: sometimes with carbonized organic suhstance. sometimes mineralized by infiltration ofSiO" FeS, , CaCO, 0 . . . . . .. ..,... ... remains of wood d Fragments with networks of sometimes line. porous, very distinct "horizontal elements" and connective elements that are either closely or widely spaced: usually microgranular fine structure; often serial assOciations of chambers . . . Fragmen/J of Larger foraminifera Larger colonies with net structures of horizontal, sometimes undulating elements (laminae) and vertical pillars and spines of various lengths; extremely differentiated microstructures
stromatoporoids

F. Chains of Segments 34a b (34a) 35a b (34 b) 36 (35a) 37a Uniserial . . . . Biserial or triserial Microscopic. .
Macroscopic. Small chambers Small chambers .' becoming becoming successively "" larger. successively larger;

35 36 37 . .. 38 . . . foraminifera
uniserial.

(25d) 27 a

Colonies or fragments of colonies of uniform or various-sized tubes containing flat and curved transverse plates. Colony shape often ramose (with tubes leading obliquely outwards). Tube diameter generally < 0.5 mm. Wall structUre lamellar, rarely fibrous . . . . .. . .. ,. . . . . bryozoans b Reticulated colonies of uniformly large, angular meshes (in tangential sections sometimes with radial elements or septa) or vertical tubes with transverse plates, sometimes wall pores. Fibrous microstructure sometimes consisting of groups of radiating fibrous bundles. Tube diameter usually> 0.5 mm. often several mm . Colonial corals and chaelelids

. .. . ' .. ... . foraminifera b Basin-shaped segments stacked within each other. with central pore (Late Triassic) ... .. Cheilosporites (35 b) 38 a Straight chambered shells, em-sized; transverse elements with pores (sipho) . . . . . . . .. ...,... "orthoceratids" b Ladder-like structure with slightly curved transverse,elements . ,. tangential sections of ammonites . Arched, overlapping segments, sometimes with perforated roofs; sometimes vesicular structures in the segments . . . . . . . . . . . . .. segmented calcisponges (Sphinclozoa)

It) I'...... CD If) N 01 CD (!)

3. Investigation

&

eporting

Appendix

3.2.1.15

page I

KEY TO IDENTIFICATION OF NON SKELETAL GRAINS


(ofter FLUGEL,'1982)

Microfacies particles in carbonate rocks. For the most part the netic character. Ooids and oncoids are listed together as "coated grains". intraclasts and extraclastS. which can not always be dearly distinguished and foraminifera-(algal) oncoids belong to the skeletal oncoids, as defined Category Definition Modes of Genesis Subcategories Skeletal grains Hard parts of organisms appearing in thin.sections Biomorpha Syn: biosomata Monty (1963) Bioclasts

categories have a descriptive character, whereas the subcategories have a gePeloids, oncoids, ooids and aggregate grains may all be called globoids. The from one another, are listed under the lithoclasts or limeclasts. Algal oncoids by Riding (1977). = first definition

Discussion Origin Characteristics Non-fragmented hard parts (e.g. bivalved pelecypod shells), almost whole fossils (e.g., coral colony) Biological. mechanical and chemical destruction. Allochthonous or par. autochthonous deposition Excrement of sediment and plankton feeders (e.g., crustaceans, holoth urians, gastropods, fishes). often produced by endobiontic organisms (peloids together with bioturbate structures!) Hard part fragments (e.g., crinoid ossicles) and broken, partially rounded skeletal grains ( sphaeroclasts),arrondids (Paulsen, 1964: 9); size: sand- and silt-sized Elongated micritic particles: often conspicuously black due to much organic matter, often in clusters, "good sorting". Some exhibit sievelike structure (cross-section); (e.g., anomuran coprolites; size: 0.02-0.50 mm. Ratio width/breadth = 112 to 1/4,) Subrounded micritic particles, sometimes indistinct algal structures stiU visible (filamentous algae). often togeth. er with calcareous algae. Size: 0.05-0.20 mm Subrounded micritic particles, very finegrained Brown (1964) BrOnnimann (1976) Bandel (1974) Skupin (1969.1970)

Peloids (= pellets) Syn: Pseudooid Borne. mann (1886). chondroid Monty (1963), cryptolithe Catalov (1970). Schlammkomer Fabricius (1966)

Micritic, sub rounded particles, usually without any internal structure. Outline usually elliptical or circular. McKee and Gutschick (1969)"

Fecal pellets

Algal peloids

Spherulitic carbonate encrustations around bluegreen algae or decomposition products of various algae Reworking and rounding ofTof consolidated calcareous mud or aggregates of aragonite and calcite crystals. Partially coincides with very small intraclasts Bioclasts or ooids totatly micritized by boring algae. fungi. etc.

Friedmann et a1. (1973) Wolf(1965b)

Pseudopeloids Syn: "small intraclasts"

Fahraeus et at (1974)'

Bahamite peloids

Aggregare grains Syn: "Komaggregatklumpen". "Traubenklumpen" Samtheim (1965), botroidi Sestini (1964). bothrolite, (chondrolite Monty) (1963), collodasts Sander (1967), tuberoid Fritz (1968: 77) "Bahamite" auct.

Irregular lobular aggregates of particles agglutinated by sparitic or mi. critic cement or by algae. Panicles: generally only a few strongly micritized ooids, bioclasts. and pelaids. Less cement than particles. The transitions between the categories distinguished here are flexible

Recrystallized panicles, e.g., rounded otTbioclasts arrondids) ("'" Gra pestones Cementation of hard car- Grape-like duster.; ofpartides Syn: bothryodal generally cemented together bonate particles in areas lumps Wilson with very low rate of sedi- by sparite. Often together (1967); compomentation, good water with micritized particles site grams circulation and changing and algae. Size: -0.5-2mm levels of agitation. The intergranular cement formation is strengthened by synsedimentary algal encrustations Algal lumps The particles of aggregate Similar to grapestones, Syn: Algen. however, more interaction grains are agglutinated by algae and/or sessile foraminifkltimpchen POm- of organisms. Often in pin (1965) protected environmen ts era (e.g.. lJacanella. Lilhocodi(lagoons etc). Micritic urn). The single aggregate grains are often bound toparticles with algal engether by a~gal encrustations. crustations found togethFilamentous algae dominate er with inhomogeneous (e.g. Cayeuxio. Zonotrichites) micritic fabrics can be called algal intraclasts Lumps. Similar to grapestones. Particles bonded by micritic Syn: amorphous but > 50~ micrite as cernen t lumps Wilson bonding agent. Many of (1967); cryptothese are micritized and crystalline grain~ recrystallized grapePurdy ( 1963) slOnes Pelletoids

Subrounded and angular micritic particles often together with bioclasts or cortoids micritized to various degrees Subrounded micritic panicles generally without internal structures

Beales ( 1958) Purdy (1963) Gygi (1969) Blatt et al.


(1972; 422)

Paulsen (1964) Illing(1954: 30)" Sudgen (1963) Roberts and Moore (1971) Winland and Metthews (1974)

Caliche lumps

Cementation within the vadose zone

Similar to marine lumps, but usually found together with pisoids. laminated crusts. etc. No scattered panicles, generally in sediments without fossils The algae responsible for the Gasche (1956) formation of oncoids are pre- Babic (1969) served as fossils. Algal Ihrion and MUlier (1968) groups: a) Cyanophyceae (e.g.. porostromate algae such Riding (1977) as Girvonella. microstromatolites). b) Rhodophyceae (e.g., Corallinaceae). which form "rhodolites" The teslS of the foraminifera Johnson (1946) grow upon micritic oncoid Pery! (1977) laminae. Examples: "Sphaerocodium" from the Carnian. some "Osagio" from the Late Paleozoic

Oncoids Syn: Biopisohth Catalov (1970). Mumies Steinmann (1880). "algal biscuit"!

Irregularly formed particles with non concentric, panially overlapping micritic laminae. derived from biogenic deposition around a nucleus (e.g.. organisms) by algae. foraminifera. etc. mm- to cmsized. A. Heim (1916)*

Algaloncoids

Biogenic coating by algae around a solid nucleus; often em-sized

Foraminifera (algal) oncoids cD "" CD rt) " N en cD (!)

Biogenic coating by sessile foraminifera (and algae) around a solid nucleus. Often em-sized

Appendix 3.2.1.15

poge 2

Category

Definition

Modes of Genesis Subcategories Micritic oncoids Syn: Einfachonkoid MiillerJungbluth and Toschek (19691: circumcrusts Wolf(1965b) Origin Biogenic coating by algae (and bacteria?); possibly also thick micrite envelopes formed by boring algae. if so. then indistinct boundary between nucleus and "envelope" Characteristics Micritic coating of a solid nucleus. generally without distinct biogenic structures

Discussion

Ooids

Regularly fonned generally spherical 10 elliptical particles with a nucleus surrounded bv concentric laminae sometimes displaying radial structures. Kalkowsky (1908) *

Superlicialooids (Einfach-Ooide) Syn: Proto-Ooid. Rinden-Ooid Kremer (1953); Mantel-Ooid Schmid, (1961)

One or only very few laminae In relatively low-energy environments or in areas of various thicknesses around with an excess of large nu- a large nucleus clei. whose diameters approximate the critical size of marine ooids (generally < 2 mm). Formed by an interaction ofinorgan~ ic and organic processes In high energy shallow waters supersaturated with CaC03.lnorganically formed with interaction of organisms (blue~green al~ gae). Ooids having radial structures appear to prefer waters deviating in salinity from normal marine conditions a) "Pelagic ooids". formed by blue-green algae. which may Irap planktonic particles or b) micritized normal ooids . Inorganic formation with fresh.water influx (vadose zone), sometimes caliche formations (subaerial, arid climate), sometimes ca ve pearls Generally many concentric laminae around a nucleus. diameter usually between 0.20 and 0.60 mm. Upper limit often 1 mm. "Ooid~aggregates" (Ooidbeutel. elc.) often occur. Sometimes deformed by synsedimentary fragmentation or compaction or tectonic activity (distorted oolites) Concentric laminae ofmicrite, diameter between 0.20 and 0.40 mm

Hling ( 1954)

..

Ooids (NormalOoide) Syn: true ooids Wilson (1967)

Bausch (1963) Bornemann (1886) Carozzi (1963) Usdowski (1963) Fabricius (1967) Schloz (1972) Haage (1970) Loreau and Purser (1973)

Micritjc ooids

Jenkyns (1972) Purser (1980)

Pisoids Syn: diagenetic ooids Siesser (1973)

Conspicuously regular concentric micritic laminae. large particles (generallv > 2 mm) often broken up. Sometimes vadose silt in the outer laminae; nuclei usually rock and pisoid fragments. Repeated in situ brecciation during growth and formation of caliche crusts Rounded bioclasts, lithoclasts. and peloids with thin micrite envelopes, "boundaries" between "nucleus" and "envelope" indistinct: tubes in the periphery of the nuclei ei~ ther empty or lilled with micrite (diameter often about 5 ~m) Synsedimentary resedimeots often with inclusions of other panicles. mm- to em-sized. generally poorly soned and not well-rounded < 0.2 mOl, often hardly distinguishable from peloids. Folk (1959) *. Plasticlast ( colloelas!) = Sander (1967)

Kirchmaver (1964) Donah uo (1965) Gradzinsky and Radomski (1967) Dunham (1969) Siesser (1973) Adeleye (1975)

Conoids (= grains with micrite envelopes). "coated grains"

Bgring Cyanophyceae. Chlorophyceae and fungi produce tUbules filled with micrite in bioclasts, etc. The repetition of this process leads to "micritization" (destructive genesis). Constructive genesis is caused by early cementation of lilamentous algae.

Bathurst (1966) * Swinchatt (1969) Lareau (1970 a) Rooney and Perkins (1972) Sibley and Murray (1972) Friedman et al. (1971) Goluhic et al. (1975)

Intraclasts Svn: EndoclaSI ManlY (1963)

AlgallmracJast

Reworking of weakly con- Micritic panicles usually with Folk (1959) * solidated lime mud by inclusions. generally waves or currents dislurb~ < 0.5 mOl. Composition is the iog the bottom ("mud same as the matrix pebbles") Only slightly separated micritReworking of lime mud covered by algal films ic particles of various sizes, with porostromate and spongiostromid algal structures Separated pieces of sediment whose boundaries still fit, as in jigsaw puzzles

Autoclast ( = pro- Early diagenetic move~ tointraclast ment of sediment. toBosellini. 1964) gether with submarine or subaerial dehydration of the sediment Sediment burrowing by Pseudo-intraclast endobiontic organisms Caliche-intra~ "Pieces" of caliche formaclasts tions. diagenetic structures ExtracJasls Svn: Allodast Folk (1959). LithoclaSl s. str. Folk (1959). exoclast Monty (1963); gravelJes; calclithite fragments Postsedimentary resediments, carbonate and noncarbonate rock fragments. often angular; particles (e.g., fossils) con~ tained in the fragments often truncated. No compaction features. Often polymict. mm- to em-sized Folk (1959)* e.g., clay minerals. terrigenous quartz e.g., glauconite, authjgemc quanz. pyrite Erosional debris of harder (earlier) rocks, which were eroded by subaerial or submarine processes

Sander (1936) Rosellini (1964)

Bioturbated, sometimes separated pieces of micrite Together wilh crusts, pisoids. etc.

Wobber (1965: 685)"

Wolf(1965) *

Terrigenous panicles
A urhigenic minerals

Minerals carried into the sedimentary basin Formation of new miner~ als within the sediment

........

r:

CD Jt') C\J C1> <D C!>

Appendix 3.2.1.16

STAINING TECHNIQUES

FOR CARBONATE ROCKS

Preparation of Alizarin Red S staining solution. The staining solution is prepared by dissolving 1 gram of Alizarin Red S in 998 ml distilled water and 2 ml concentrated hydrochloric acid. Procedure.

1)

Immerse briefly in then

the rinse

chips in in a

to

be

stained water.

momentarily (Dipping

in the

acid, chips, with

then held

distilled spot plate

tweezers, one

depression water is

filled an

acid way.)

filled

with

distilled

effective

2)

Apply a drop or two plate or impervious for 45 seconds. Remove tilled

of Alizarin Red S to the chip on a spot surface (or place the chip in the stain)

3) 4)

chip and wash off water. Let stand

excess staining until dry.

solution

with

dis-

Examine chip under microscope. Calcite will mite and other minerals will not be stained.

stain

red,

dolo-

NOTE:

Stain will come off if mineral oil (Nujol), clove oil, or glycerine is applied to samples. It may be removed from samples or thin sections by scrubbing with warm water and a mild soap. The concentration of HCl in the stairting solution is extremely critical. variations of a few tenths of a percent will give different contrasts between stained and unstained areas. It is recommended that each time a new solution is mixed, it has exactly the same HCl concentration as the solution being replaced. 0.2% HCl gives a good contrast between stained and unstained areas.

Preparation

of
must

samples
be

for

stai~ing.
and, dry before stain is applied.

1) 2)

Samples

clean

Stain boundaries are intensified by polishing with 1000 grit and on a felt lap with stannic

the sample oxide.

3) Samples containing

a high density of pores less than 1/2 rom in diameter do not stain well because the solution soaks in, coating the walls of the pore with stain, and pore differentiation is difficult. This type of rock is best stained if impregnated with plastic first. In this case the matrix is stained and the pore space is void of stain. If the sample does not take a good stain with the first application, repeat the procedure for sample preparation.

4)

SCHEME FOR STAINING


modifi.d oll.r

CARBONATES

B D. Evomy. t963

STAINING

REAGENTS Fe2+ free colcite sensu stricto

CALCITE Fe2+ poor orodino 10 Fe2+ rich Fe2+ free doIomile sensu ,Iricto RED DARK BLUE DARK BLUE nol 'toined nol 'toi,ned not 'toined

DOLOMITE Fe2+ t arodinv 10 Mg2+ < ferroon dotomite not 'toined arodinv to Fe2+ Mg2+>t onkerite not ,toined

Compositions given in weights %

ferroon RED LIGHT BLUE

colcile

-----

0.2 % hydrochloric ocid" 0.2"1. olizorin red S" 0.2% hydrochloric ocid" rongin~ from 0.5"1. to ferrycionide 0.2 % hydtochloric ocid" from 0.5 'Y. to rO"9i!;a ,alura ed potassium ferrycianide 0.2 'Y. olizorin red S.
CrilicollOlulion lirenotll "

RED not 'toined

B ,oturo ed potosslum

arodino 10

LIGHT DARK arodin9 10 TURQUOISE TURQUOISE LIGHT DARK Orodlnvto TURQUOISE TURQUOISE

RED

MAUVE

PURPLE

II) ... ..... II) rt) N tB C!)

Appendix 3.2.1.17

PREPARATION

OF THIN

SECTIONS

FROM DRILL

CUTTINGS

(modified after SWANSON 1981)

Equipment Hot plate Glass slides 70 thermoplastic cement (broken to approx. 1/8" pieces) stone, or

Lakeside Glass

grinding plate, 300 or 400 grit powder

1/4" x 10" x 10" (or carborundum (fine) silicon carbide paper) 220, 300, 500

Carborundum Tweezers Water pan

grit:

Procedure 1) Melt more cement on glass slide selected cuttings. slide from hot plate on hot plate and drop into it one or

2) Remove

and allow

cement

to harden

by cooling.

3) Wet grinding

surface and hone a flat surface on the chips. Keep grinding surface thoroughly wet by either dipping slide in water pan or sprinkling additional water on surface. Either glass plate and loose abrasive method, or wet stone or paper may be used. Clean and dry slide and place on hot plate. the honed surface of chip

4)

5) Using
when

tweezers or probe, cement melts.

turn over

6)

Remove from hot plate and press the chip against slide as cement hardens. thinness

(honed

surface

down)

7) Hone the chip down to desired


or paper (as in Step 3).

on glass

plate,

wet

stone

NOTE
All that is necessary is to make the rock reasonably transparent. Therefore, check frequently by examining under the microscope. Wet the surface while examining.

"'{) .... ..... aD I<) N 0\ II) C)

G69238/80

Classification
ARCHIE'S CLASSIFICATION OF POROSITY IN CARBONATE ROCKS

Of Carbonate

Porosity

Types

I FABRIC

SEL~
INTERPARTIClE

I ~TFABRIC SELECTIVE

The Archie classification consists of two parts: one refers to the texture of the matrix, including grain size; and the other to the character plus frequency of the visible pore structure. As the classification provides a means of estimating the gross petrophysical relationships of a carbonate rock, its Inclusion as a part of the description on all lithologic logs is recommended. The classification of the matrix gives lithological information on the minute pore structure (not visible under lOX magnification) between the crystals, or carbonate grains. Below is a tabulation of the three matrix classifications. Class (Texture of Matrix) I Compact, Crystalline Appearance of Hand Sample Crystalline, hard, dense, sharp edges and smooth faces on breaking. Resinous. Appearance Under lOX magnification Matrix made up of crystals tightly interlocking.or fully cemented grains, allowing no visible pore space between the crystals, often producing "feather edge". concoidal appearance on breaking.

The visible poreslvugs. are classified according to size: Class A : None visible. Class B : Visible poreslvugs greater than 0.02 but less than 0.125 mm. Class C : Visible poreslvugs greater than 0.125 mm, but less than 2mm Class D : Visible poreslvugs greater than 2 mm. The large poreslvugs show secondary crystal growth on faces of cuttings or "weathered-appearing" faces showing ev1dence oTfracturing or solution channels. At xlO magnification.

[fi]
""'"

~~fRACTURE

INTRAPARTIClE

INTERCRYSTAl

[E

CHANNEL.

IIOlOIC

I n conjunction with qualifying the pore sizes, their frequency or amount is denoted by affixing to the pore size classification a figure denoti,ng the per cent of surface area of the cutting or core taken up by any specific pore size. e.g, 82 C5. (see App. 3.2.1.19) Description of cuttings. Often more than one Archie matrix type of carbonate is present in a sample of cuttings being examined. In such cases it is necessary to estimate and report the percentage of the total sample represented . by each matrix type. See also "To Approximate matrix
POROSITY 10 ,& IN

..
B
Clas5 Crystal or Grain Size (:-hcrons) .c 1~~6 2':>0 ~L25

~:'-~1 fENESTRAl
SHElTER
GROWTH

I~J

VUG"

U
CMI'INIIor "uf

~CAVERN"

I FABRIC

fRAMEWORK

'co",," GRIll.. to ",,~-w.d ,1'IQp8'


SELECTIVE OR NOT
~BORING

Of lor""

,or..

of

BRECCIA

If. "

~BURROW

Ll:TI
P(lf(:'.'I1!I\.

SHRINKAGE

II Chalky, Earthy

Dull, earthy or chalky Crystals, less effectively appearing, hard to soft. interlocking than above, Crystalline appearance absent joining at different angles. because the small crystals Extremely fine texture may or carbonate particles are still appear "chalky" under less tightly interlocked, thus this power, but others may reflecting light in different start appearing crystalline. directions. Grain size for this type Is less than 0.02 mm.
Crystals less effectively interlocked, fracture generally along individual crystal faces giving a rough or sand appearance. Generally more space between crystals. Oolitic, and other granular textures fall in this class.

eworm" (App3.2.1.2) pages 12615


porosityPERCENTAGE 2.0 2.S

in ptrr"c.enleiqe.
ApproxJfI1.Jto!

observed in Middle East Carbonate Rocks


0 .::50 35 U;.ual Appe,uancc (Luster)
Res i nou~

M.:Jtrlx P<Jrosity ~~ Not Visibl~ (l2X-l8X) A

ty Visible Porosi (i~ of Cutting Sud.lce)

Siote or
0,02

0.115-2.0

>2.0 ME AtC l.7

e..g.1D

e.g.1.>

~2

III Sandy or sugary appearing. Sucrosic or Granu lar

i--xr~ Li

lo

CO:npdCt CrySta lline

62 20
Vitreous
CU.Jrscly S\Jcro~ ic (;rdnuJar to [xtrl:r.lely ri.ne e.g.lO c, g.lS

e..g.IO

e.~.15

1<; I')

20 20

III Sucrosic Granular

-10(1\) L-.t!L-12') Y..E ~


-2~ SI Li

o..!.g. to e.g.. I)

':>\10 2')0 :,2 'iJ


, ..

1; -"

Type I.

When examining carbonate rocks it is common to find rock types that are gradational between the three Archie:.types. For example, Archie Type I is often found In association with Type III. Rocks in this category can be denoted as 1/111with the dominant type given as the numerator. This indicates a rock gradational between Types I and III, andlor a close association of the two types, but closer to or dominated b

fotO"Tf':

fLZ2Z3

1: A

TO It:~TIt1AH:S PEQtEH1AcaE ~HOVLD e~

O&TAlti

~nA L __J1O:4

VIH"'l POR0.5ITY VU:O/VOIO PORO~ITY -IF PRE5EIiTAbD~D

2: ~
~
(I) " -t

II Chalky
TWhere cuttings

Chalky

+
in appe.HJIKt",

IS

c,g.tO

c.&.15

25

30

arc

bet

cen

'ltrcuus

and 2,0

chalky

designate edge

as

1/11

01" II/I. sub-caverl1ous large por s. pore:,

pore-oS .are gre.ltcr "'.!here aTT:ount of such porosity

th.m about is indicdtcd

r:r1, .Jnd then!fOl"e by'. of cutti.ngs in

occur.1t an interval ; z,),

(e.g., of cutti~gs showi.ng eVldence of

'0 '0

Symbols.
III r-BlO Finely '" ,lbuu[ Chalky total <'ucro.:;j(' 11'. to vitrc0US, p<)rosity about vl'ry WI.. filiI.: texture (therefore, (therefore, m.,ltJlK p~)ro~.ty .Jbolll

-------

f'T1

...isible

porosi.ty

olbout

10%,

lOl.a1

pOrt)Slty

{)oj
r.JJtrix pOl"oslly .}l>oul If;.), Ill) visible 1'I"L'Sity,

n> ::I 0.. ><

(li/t)vr-A:>

I'\J

:.*:IodtfiNI aft~r to .20 t1icrons Arch it.' (19.52) by ChiH1~itlR to Wentworth and chal1 in matrix oroliit of Class ,izp scale, III fron lOt lowering upper limit of Clas!> II d ta to n; based on new em ideal CD

Appendix 3.2.1.19

CHARTS FOR ESTIMATING


. ",. .
.,.

POROSITY

.,'. I. .
I

..
I.

..: io10:':::,
~

." .:

..
~
i~~?~~t~~f;~f~

',,' . . .' ~'" '. , ". . I' ..

lit

.'

):

i~~~':?f~\~/~:~~::~

. ,..:~. ". .". ',;, :.: "..J . ~.: ": :,., .: "

.. .' .
. .' . . . .. . . . ' .

..

. .

..
. f . . -. .., . .-

-.
,
. . . . .. . . . . .' .' . .

.I
.

1111

. . . ,', " .'''' . . . ,'.. :".; .' . I, '.

. .

. .' 8 ...., .... , .


.

..

,
. ".

-. "I,., . .,," ',' .. . .'" . " ,'.. . .,-. . .. .. " : ',-',.-.. . .. . .'. .1 .. , ,..'" '..
. ." .-

"'. ~. ',"

,I'. " .

... .

J "...

., ." .'

. ""'. . I'. . .'.

.' :'"\' . ., . '. .t '-' ... .. ,-,...:. ., . -.:. . '.... . '.


~ , :.
I

'. '"..

'.

. ~ "'.I' '~ I- ' ",.'" 10'" ';.., -,.," ..


",e

. ., -., -, .,. "",'\'.'.:-.


.

. ;';"'.' . .~

,-. .

.. .'. . ...' -'.


...'.

'... .. .'~
,

. . .... .. -..
'. .

..
.

..

. .'

" .
.

. .

'

"

.i .:\ :' .. ". . .' t ".., .., . . . ,. ... ...,,,,. '" . . "
..--~

. '.'

.~ .. ": .,.~.":,..~... . --r . . .". -it,'. , , t;' ~ . I:'. '. .", .. '.- .
-

,- ",8 I. ':.'': . 8'. r 'i~', ,~ ',-''''


-..

~ 8 : "'..J .." " "'.:.!- -.- . ." :: -,,, .,-.. . ".'.1: . -:.. "'. . '.:. .' '. . -,, '"
.,
.. . .. '. ,.'. .' .'''..'... 1','. .. \-. )

(
I

~..~ ,
( ..

~---

/.'1.
.. ~

\~

#~:.. .;--. ' iC~~'I.f!".i~:- 1 \ tj~:~"


.

fi -., . ,,~~\, !b ~\ ,'."~~~ ~..~\ ..~ ."" . i.~ :,.#'::'


/0. ,.'" # t

/.~" ..'~

..'~', '.t.

,I.

/~tt

.,.

"'::,..

~'~ 0

t ., '.:-~
.~

I X~~~...'-.0.,<,. 0

\..~J;,.,' ,/f ~~ 'f/'


0 -~ ~
"., .9...
~!Io.""'"

~~ ~.
.

I \~ ~
~

..~

I";. .~~ C~II.,,,~t,!~ f. , ' .8 '; ",...~,~,\-,4',~\.,U ~ "J~ ,\It' . .."'" " ~.''''';~.. ~~ ~ \~ ""lt:'.".. r.~\ .-r..:,!. tX<;;t:/ .,. .,,'toJ.:~.. -/ ' .;-.;;, ?I'l1 4 ~~,u Sf . ~~"'5'"/ G! ~ yo '"

,,",e.- --~.;jJ~ 4r-l:!~~ ~3 h.~..~,.. ~!;,,'..~., .~.~ !'-,?b,...\ ".-:I,

."',.'\: ~~~~~ ~ '., \.' ,.-:,...~

.. ~---:--.

.'--,.~-&I') .6r..~iW~
.

fj
_-"' ,

~"

~ ~ ~
-"'~~

'lit!:

&I') N

~
'"

~~\., ..1~. ..." . . -' If> y~, ..,.,


~.. . ., ,
~

.
\

~~.r ~ ~ 0 ~ C\.:- ,. '. "'-, , /.~;.\.~ ~." r, ,, -: - '...\ ''''-.. .. ~. \ /.". ' ~ . ~. '," ,\.~~, III .,' ~'~,~\ ~ 4~,.,
&1')-.

.. ...

.11 .

,,~~

~..+$ , ,. . -, '~'..~ ~~
~ \... C"
~

~ ....

iii
N 0> (CI ~

~
.~

; .# .. .'. . -,., \ '" '. . -.,.." \ , , , ~ iW8. . '~. :0:"'-'. . . "J\~~~- ",,"fiy' ~ \';;
.., ~ """.

.. .~"

""1

'

~~

. _ '~-:~-'-~/

~1\7 1~..:"':" _

Appendix 3.2.1.20

GRAINSIZE,

SORTING / POROSITY, (OF ARTITICIALLY

PERMEABILITY MIXED SAND)

RELATIONSHIP

S I Z E
SAt-ID FINE U d",~ "'...
EXTREMEl Y WELL SORTED
1.1

SILT L
0.177 0.125 0.088

COAR~E L
0.062

1.000
1.0

0.710

0.500

0.350

0250

0044

.3.1
.75 .0.8

.2.8
238 .1.5

.1.7
119 .0.2

.1.3

.1.3
59 30 39.8

.3.5
15 .08

42.3
7.. .1.2

43.0
3.7 .1.8

VERY WELL SORTED

.0.2

t!) Z

1.2

.58 38.0 38..

239 33.1

115 38.8

57 39.1

29 39.7

U .0.2

7.2 )9.8

3.6

WElL SORTED
1..
~MODERA TEL Y

t0
V) POORLY SORTED SORTED

302

151 33.3 3..2

76 3..9

38 33.9

19 3..3

9.. 35.6

..7 33.1

2..

32..
110 27.1

2.0

55 29.8 31.5

28 31.3

U 30..

7.0 31.0

3.5 30.5

NO 3..2

N.D.

2.7 VERY POORLY


28.6

.5 25.2

23 25.8

12 23..

6.0 285

N.D. 29.0

N.D. 30.1

N.D 32.6

N.D.

.0
EXTnH1EL Y POOl'lL Y . 5.7
SO

1.

7.0

3.5

N.D.

N.D.

N.D.

N.D.
ND. NOT

N.D.
MEANINGFULLY TO

POROSITY

".

SIZE-~ORTI~G

CL,\SSIFICATlON

12
28

38.1

DETERMINE

PERMEABILITY DARCIES

THE POR.OSITY AND pe:RM~AaIL'T\{ VALUES 61WN ABOVE ARE ONLY VALID fOR ARTIf"'C&ALLYMIXED SANDS. THE PORO~ITY ANDPERME.A6ILITYVALUES Of NATURAL SA"DS ARE CON5IDERA.8LY LOWER

HIGHER PERMfABJLJTlfS

IN COARSf:RAND BfTTE" R SORlED

SANDS
LO'w'ERPERMEABILJTJES/N FINER-AND POORER SORTED
SA NDS

COAR5ER-AN
CI:> ...... CD ..., N C7I \I) C)

WILL HAVE HIGHER PERMEABIUTIES"AN D LIKE LV


YIELD BETTER PRODUCTION.
t P. '(. 4 I

D BETTER50RTE D ItRfSERVOI

R SA N D.5
II

G69238/8:O

COUNTf1Y WELL /SECTION

'- - - - - - - - - - -- - -~---------_.

PALAB
---------------' 0-'

'-- - - - - - - - - -- - - - - :0"'--' '---"

DEPTH/SAMPLE NUMBER

m/f
--"

SAMPLE ANALYSIS AND FOSSIL DETERMINATIONS


' '-'

AUTHOR -----------OFFICE/ROOM______-----TELEPHONE -----------DATE ----------------------.--

SHEET OF

0.

.----

CARD
10

en enw
>- (L-

SRMPLE IDENTIFICATION

TREAT MENT
SAMPLE/ SEQUENCE NUMBER
UJ

~~
~z
::i

~ 15 0:3

Ia: c..')

cr 0

-----_._~-_._-_.'--'--'-'-----

RNALYSIS DATE
I

z ----0

.--.-.-

~_._--,.LITHOLOOY

ORGANIC

----"------SPLI FACTOR T
Z C)

WEIGH

ei
4

~
6

~ ~
1 6 9

;:

DEPTH OR SUCCESS I ON
----

~ ~o ~ ~ I- enz ~ <II

. . :;;

~en

UJ
> Z

YR :MTH:OAY
I I

'

UNTREAT~~l

TRERTED

en

Ia: MATURITY > cr a I UJ UJ I-- I OBSERV. a:: II.! ,


0 , :I:

rr1 \J

Z a: :L

REMARKS

a... :2

:::J 0

a:

~a::
C MED !UM

FINE

;g r
77 18 19 80

-----.
7 68

RNRL
--

.J

1-

---L--LJ.

.
u;

6_9~2

73

74

76

76

CARD

SPECIES
SCIENTIFIC NAME

NO-OF SPECIMENS

<t ~

:J

PRESERVATION

q C
MEDIUM FINE

REMARKS
LITH COL. PHYS
39 4041 42 43 44 46 46,41,48,49,6006106263
J I I 1 I I ! 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1

z \J C -t en :I: rr1 rr1 -t C} ::u ::u 0 (") " en s: \J r rr1 Q:) C} en en r c !:i ):> }> 1:) ~ ;:) 0x0J N ~

10

CODE
-----~_6 4 6 6~J!!~10
I . I 1 I -L-L--LJ_--1_-

~
VI

F055 =
F05,5

F055= F 055 =

F05 5=

111213
-L--1--

16 17,18,192021222324,26262728293003132333.36.36.37,38

-1--1--1__l-

-1-L
__L-L-

--L.L.
. '

=
.

, ,
---1-1--1

'.l-l--l--L-L
I I 1

, I

, , ,
I

L-J_L-J_L-L--L.L.-L--

--1-'
--L-L-

I
J , J

, ,
'I 1 I I
J

I , 1
J

,
, 1
J

, I 1 , , I , . I , . I 1-1-1 1 I I I I I I J J , . , , , , , "I
'I 1 I I I~' , . I , .

F 0,5,5 -L-l--L-L-L--'--L F 0.5,5 F,O,5 5f::: ---L--~L_-1-J_l~-L---1--L-

LL_Li-L-1-'--

L--1I
I

_J I 1 I
,
-1'

I
J

, , , , , ,
I I J J J J I J

_l-L
--1-1---m

__'--_L
--L-LI

,
,
I

,
'-L
--L

F,O,5,5f:::
F,O,5,5t:

--1-

I --1-1
1

1 1 1 I , I I , , , 1 1 I J 1 1 I 1 1 _L
1 I J
1

-I-L.LL-L-LL
'--L-L-L_I--L-

I 1 , Ii'

LI 1 I 1 I

1 I I I

, 1 1 1

1 , I

1 1

1 J--1I 1 I J J I

1 " I I

1 1

1 I I I

J I 1 1

F,0,S,5 = , , ,

1-1

F0 5 5=
E~,5 5 =

"
-L__L'

1 I

J I

F ~5 5 = " "

LL1-

-----1
L

f-L-L-

'I
I I I I

I I , ,
"

I I ,
--'--LL
.

I ,
"

1 I

~~==~-==-=~
-----

- -_..1.._L

I---L-L-L , , , '

I , I
I I I I , I I
I I I , I I
I

,.
--1-1---1-1--1.--1---LJ-_1-L-

LQ~~ == _-L-1---L__LL-'--L ~_J2- =

-- ==

'
-'-I

"
l--L-L

I I
1 I 1 I I

I I
I

, I
I

~~

-L-L--L--L_L_L_L-

=
-

F 0,5.$=
F O,5,S

- --_L-l-J-L-I--L-L
--I. I -l---L_--LL_L , , I

-. ----- - --- -w

-1__L- __L_LJ_-L-_1 -1I , _LL_l-L

---L-LL_-'--1_L, I I

~ __L _LP-I--L ~ '" __L-1--

-1-1-L-LL-LL_L-1--1-_L-L--1 _L-LL--LJ_--L-L-L_LL_'---L-L-L.L

---L.L_LL.LL-'-_LLLi._LLL-L-L-L_1--1-I . , I I ,.

Appendix 3.2.1.22

INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING

UP EPIPAL INPUT SHEET FOR ROCK SAMPLE & FOSSIL DATA

SAMPLE ANALYSIS

Columns
1-4 5-7
ANAL

= card identification
TYPE

for analysis

sheet

ANALYSIS PTO

=
=

PYN
NAN

= =
= = =
=

Palaeontology Palynology
Nannoplankton

FOR OST
MPL DIN ACR PAM SPO CHI
BEN

Foraminifera Ostracoda Microplankton Dinoflagellates


Acritarchs Palynomorphs

PFO
LFO

MAC PFA

= Sporomorphs = Chitinozoa = Benthonic foraminifera = Planktonic foraminifera = Larger foraminifera = Macerals = Palynofacies

8-22

8-9

SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION TYPE


1

= core sample

2 3 4
5

=
= =
=

sidewall sample ditch cutting sample surface sample


sea bottom sample

6 = core slice (MCT)


7 = sea bed core 8 = drilling mud
0

sample

sample
of sample

9 = junk basket sample

any

other

type

Ranking 1 2 5 3 4 1 1 7 6 8

Note:
-

automatically and indicates the degree of ranking is handled preference for the plotting of analysis data derived from sample depth, Le. in case two different sample types are taken from the same depth the selection is on the sample type with the lowest rank number.
The

.,. CD ...... CD C\I '" a-

ID c:>

Appendix

3.2.1.22

page 2 Columns
10-17
DEPTH (ALONG HOLE) OR (SAMPLE) SUCCESSION - For well samples depth-a long-hole is characteristic; for surface samples the (stratigraphic/vertical) distance from the selected reference level, preferably the top of section is required for any plots on scale. - The length unit, as defined for a particular well or surface

section, will be either metre or foot. CIs 16-17

are the decimal

18-22

units and will be taken as 00 unless indicated otherwise by the investigator. SAMPLE/SEQUENCE NUMBER - Sequence numbers for surface samples are applied in case no depth/distance data are available but sample sequence is known,

or
-

sample

number

is

used

to

identify

duplicate

well

samples

of

the

same

type

and retrieved

at the same

depth.

23-25 23

TREATMENT

TYPE
L
M N

= rinsing/washing for lithological = washing for microfaunal analysis = nannoplankton preparation P = palynological preparation T = thin section preparation

description

0 = any other treatment.


24-25
SEQUENCE NUMBER Generally a treatment type is executed only once; occasionally the same treatment is repeated. A sequence number 01 indicates first (and often only) treatment, higher numbers indicate repeats. Note: sequence numbers should correspond to those entered in cIs. 24-25 of the "LABORATORY TREATMENTS & PRODUCTS" sheet.

26-27

INVESTIGATION SEQUENCE NUMBER Generally a treatment product (indicated by treatment type + sequence number) is.investigated only once for a particular investigation; occasionally a repeat of the same analysis type on the same treatment product (as indicated in cIs 5-7) is required. Investigation number 01 indicates first (and often only) investigation; higher numbers indicate repeats. INVESTIGATOR Each investigator should have, within one company, a recognizable and unique abbreviation of his/her name (see page 16 & 17).

28-30

C> en II) N UI a> "a> 0\

Appendix

3.2.1.22

page 3

Columns 31-36
ANALYSIS DATE

31-32 33-34 35-36


37-38

Y(EA)R, e.g. 84 = 1984 M(ON)TH, e.g. 01 = January

DAY
WEIGHT
- The data on weight (untreated/treated) are the same as those entered in cls 32-43 of the "LABORATORY TREATMENTS AND PRODUCTS" sheet'. The weight entered here serves only the analyst as a memory aid. - The weight unit is gram, with cIs 41-42 and cIs 47-48 indicating decimals. UNTREATED Dry weight of sample before treatment. TREATED Weight of treated sample (residue). PRESERVATION The general preservation of the fossil group-under-study (as specified in cIs 5-7) will be indicated here; at specific level preservation data are to be entered on the FOSS-record, cIs 28-33. 0 (or blank)

37-42 43-48

49

1 2 3 4 5 6
50-55 50-51
ORGANIC METHOD MATURITY

no data excellent

= good = fair = bad


= =
very bad extremely

bad

(fossils

hardly

recognizable)

IX Palynomorph

colour estimate Reference: FUCHS, H.P. (1969). DOM determination by geologists and palynologists, KSEPL Instruction Manual, 1, fig.4. Report EP-41385. 10 Palynomorph colour established, but no details known 11 Sporomorph colour estimate on total sporomorph assemblage 12 Sporomorph colQur estimate on one type only (to be specified under REMARKS cIs 34-53 of FOSS card) 13 Dinoflagellate colour estimate on total dinoflagellate assemblage 14 Dinoflagellate colour estimate on one type only (to be specified in cIs 34-53 of FOSS card) 15 Acritarch colour estimate on total acritarch assemblage 16 Acritarch colour estimate on one type only (to be specified in cIs 34-53 of FOSS card).

~ co ...... co If) N 0> ID C>

Appendix 3.2.1.22

page 4

2X

Colcormet translucency values Reference: FUCHS, H.P. (1969) - DOM determination by geologists and palynologist. KSEPL Instruction Manual, 1, fig.8, p.9. Report EP-41835. 20 Colcormet value obtained, no details known 21 Colcormet value from sporomorph assemblage 22 Colcormet value from one sporomorph type (to be specified in cIs 34-53 of FOSS card) 23 Colcormet value from dinoflagellate assemblage 24 Colcormet value from one dinoflagellate type (to be specified in cIs 34-53 of FOSS card) 25 Colcormet value from acritarch assemblage 26 Colcormet value from one acritarch type (to be specified in cIs 34-53 of FOSS card). Alternation Index (TAl) organic

3X Thermal

ref. STAPLIN, F.L. (1969): Sedimentary organic matter, metamorphism and oil and gas occurrence. (Bull. Canadian Petrol. Geol., 17, (1), pp. 47-66) 30 31 TAl data available, no details known TAl data from sporomorph assemblage

etc.

4X

Spore

Colour

Index

(SCI)

ref. HASELDONCKX, P. (1977): Relation of palynomorph colour and sedimentary organic matter to thermal maturation and hydrocarbon generating potential (Paper at Seminar on Generation and Maturation of Hydrocarbons in Sedimentary Basins, Manila, Sept. 12-19, 1977 (UNDP-COOP/ ASCOPE) 40 41 SCI data SCI data available, no details known from sporomorph assemblage

etc. 5X
Conodont Colour Alteration (CAI)

ref. EPSTEIN, A.G., EPSTEIN, J.B. & HARRIS, L.D. (1977): Conodont Colour Alteration - An index to Organic Metamorphism (Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 995, Washington).

52-55

OBSERVATIONS Various scales are applied dependent on the method (as specified in CIs. 50-51), but all ranging from low figures for a low degree of maturity to high figures for a high degree of maturity. If only one value is indicated, this has to be entered in 52-53. Two zeros have to be entered in 54-55. Palynomorph colours are expressed to 09 (black), see fig. ...? - Colcormet translucency a set of measurements is recorded. in scale 01 (light yellow)

values range from 00 to 99. In general, is rounded off to a mean value, which ~ ~ w ~ ~ ,~ ~

Appendix 3.2.1.22

page 5 Columns
The thermal Alteration often with one decimal point will be omitted, Index is given as a five-point scale, digit. For coding purposes the decimal e.g. 2.2 is recorded as 22.

- Spore Colour Index Scale is a linear 10 point scale using one decimal digit if appropriate, e.g. 3.0 is recorded as 30. - Conodont Colour Alteration is expressed in a scale again with use of decimal point if appropriate. from 1 to 5,

56-59

56-57

LITHOLOGY Insert here a brief description of the lithology sample if necessary. MAIN (LITHOLOGY) Enter one of the following codes:

encountered

in the

Code AK BR CG CK CL CO DM EV GK GV IG LS MM MR MS PE QT SA SH SI SS ST TF

Explanation

Arkose Breccia
Conglomerate

Chalk Clay
Coal in general Dolomite Evaporites Greywacke

Gravel
Igneous rock Limestone Metamorphic rock

Marl
Claystone/Mudstone

Peat
Quartzite Sand (loose) Shale Silt Sandstone Siltstone

Tuff

IX) ........

to f() N 11> <D t!)

Appendix

3.2.1.22

page 6 Columns
58-59
QUAL(IFIER LITHOLOGY) Insert here one of the following codes given below. Only two columns are provided here thus the user should carefully the qualifier which best qualifies the sample analysis. Qualifiers Carbonates: lithology

select under

B
G P W MU

Boundstone Grainstone Packstone Wackestone Mudstone Lignitic

Lithology:

LG CT PP FG GC CA BF BK BL BW DK GE GN LT MD OE ON OV PK PU RE WH YE
Roundness

Cherty
Phosphatic Ferruginous Glauconitic Calcitic

Colours:

Buff Black Blue Brown


.

Dark
Grey Green Light
Moderate/Medium

Opaque Orange Olive Pink Purple Red White Yellow

Texture:

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
Grain Size:

Very

angular

Angular
Subangular Sub rounded

Rounded Well rounded


Very coarse

R C M F V

Coarse Medium Fine


Very fine

C)
G> ID I\) UI CD ....... CD ID

Appendix

3.2.1.22

page 7
Grain size:

PB GR PI SI
S3 S5 S7 S9 SU SB

Pebble Granule Pelitic


Very poorly sorted Poorly sorted Moderately well sorted Well sorted Very well sorted Unimodally sorted Bimodally sorted Aphanitic Crystalline Sucrosic Intergranular porosity Interparticle porosity Intercrystalline porosity Intergranular porosity Intraskeletal porosity Intracrystalline porosity Fracture/Fractured Non porous/dense Slightly porous Porous Highly porous Cavernous Leached
Replacemen~

Sorting:

Porosity

A
X S IG IF IX VR VS VX FC

PI
P3 P5 P7 CV LE RP RS SX VG
Stratification: Bedding

Residual Solution Vuggy/Vugular

B1 B3 B5 B7 BX BQ FI FK LM PR BU BO CB BG BH BS

No apparent bedding/massive Poorly bedded Bedded in general Well bedded Cross bedded

Blocky Fissile Flaky Laminated

Papery
Burrowed Borings Churned/bioturbated Graded bedded Variably bedded Contorted, slumped

&1
CI) "tt')

N en ID (!)

Appendix 3.2.1.22

page 8

Bedding:

VV XF XG XL XX C1 C3 CS SK WT SX RH SQ SE BY BR PT OD PD OK WX

Varves
Flute casts Groove casts Load casts Salt mounds

Sedimentary

and biogenic

structures:

Unconsolidated/Loose Slightly consolidated/Friable Consolidated/Cemented/Hard Slickensided Weathered Solution breccia Rauhwacke/Box work structure Stromatactis Stylolites Birdseye structure/Keystonevugs Brecciated Pelletoidal Ooidal Pisoidal Onkoidal Welded
Asphalty Bioticic Bituminous Calcitic Chloritic Chalky Cherty Dolomitic Evaporitic Ferruginous/Limonitic Glauconitic Hematitic With heavy minerals Lithoclastic Calcareous Micaceous Phosphatic Pyritic
Quartzitic Sideritic Tuffaceous

Admixtures

AP BI

BT
CA CI CK CT DM

EV
FG GC HE HM LC LS MC PP PY

QZ
SD TF
Minerals
:

AH FD GY

KM
MN MV NA SL

Anhydritic Feldspar Gypsum Potassium/magnesium Manganese Muscovite Halite Salt in general

salts in general

G> en 10 N UI CD "'~

Appendix page 9

3.2.1.22

Coal

and Primary Bituminous Rocks: AT Anthracite Carbonaceous CO Hard Coal HD HU Humic Coal Lignite (Brown LG Sapropelic Coal SO SR Source rock Tarry TA AC AG AM BE BP BZ CD CH CR CS CZ DF DT EM FB FF FH FL FP FS GP GS LB ML MP NP OC OG PL RA RD SM TL TR TT VE

coal) (Cannel

coal,

boghead)

Fossils:

Acritarchs Algae Ammonite Belemnites Brachiopods Bryozoa Conodonts Charophytes Coral Crinoids Chitinozoa Dinoflagellates Diatoms Echinoderms Smaller benthonic foraminifera Foraminifera in general Fish remains Larger foraminifera Planktonic foraminifera Smaller foraminifera Graptolites Gastropods Bivalves Molluscs Microplankton Nannoplankton Ostracods Calcispheres Plant remains Radiolaria Rudists Algal mats/Stromatolites Trilobites Trace fossils Tintinnids Vertebrates

...;.,;,

II) rt)

a> '"

<0 (!)

Appendix 3.2.1.22

page 10

Columns

60-66

SPLIT FACTOR Whenever a full quantitative microfaunal analysis is executed then

two possibilities exist:

a) from the entire residue one part (e.g. ~. /10) is separated without any sieving into fractions and is analysed entirely; then the amount of specimens found has to be multiplied by the separation factor manually and inserted accordingly into cIs 61-63 "Medium". b) the entire residue is split by sieving into three major fractions i.e. coarse-medium-fine; fro~ these fractions only for

parts are analysed (e.g. ~ for coarse. /5 for medium.

~ fine)

60 61-63 64-66
67-68

then by.entering the split factors 4. 5.2 in cIs 60-66 for coarse. medium. fine the computer can multiply with those factors the amount of specimens entered in cIs 14-25 on card "FOSS" as if the entire fractions thus the entire residue has been selected. C(OARSE FRACTION) MEDIUM (FRACTION) FINE (FRACTION)

ORIGIN Insert here the code of the laboratory where the sample has been analysed.

Code
11 12 13 14 17 50

Explanation
SIPM. EP/12.1. Rijswijk KSEPL. Rijswijk NAM. Assen Shell Oil. Houston Any other Shell Opco Any other non-Shell company

Opcos may develop their own codes which should. however. not duplicate with those given here. If in doubt. contact the focal point of SIPM. EP/12.1.

69-80

REMARKS Any remarks concerning the entire sample can be entered here.

G) CII 18 .... m II) "....

Appendix 3.2.1.22

page 11
FOSSIL DETER}IINATION

Columns

1-4
5
6-13

FOSS

= card identification

for fossil

determination

blank
SPECIES CODE Enter a code for all species or accessories determined during the investigation. Preferably enter the "SIPM" code (see chapter 5), i.e. a four 2-digit structured code whereby the first 2 digits are fixed on the computer as fossil group code (see Appendix 1). Whenever an alphanumerical code ("Local code") is used, then the species table (see chapter 5) should show a transcription to the "SIPM" code. Two main systems for coding taxonomic within the "SIPM" numerical code code exist:

a) A strictly

structured

6-7 8-9 10-11 12-13


'"

(FOSSIL GROUP CODE) see Appendix 1 (FAMILY CODE) (GENUS CODE) (SPECIES CODE) This strictly taxonomic structured code has been applied former EPIPAL system (see EP-42711, chapter III)

in the

Example
Fossil group Family code Genus code Species code code:

SIPM 02 : 58 : 01 : 01

code:

02580101

planktonic foraminifera globigerinidae globigerina daubjergensis code see Appendix 1

b)
6-7

An open

taxonomic

(FOSSIL

GROUP CODE)

8-9
10-13

"unspecified" Species code

free

SCIENTIFIC NAME Insert the taxonomic name of the fossil a name of an accessory (i.e. minerals), of fossil type.

and/or morphogroup or to allow proper coding

0'> ......

~ N
0'> <D C)

Appendix page 12

3.2.1.22

Columns
14-25
NUMBER OF SPECIMENS 'Number of specimens' can be plotted on the distribution in 2 ways; either as number or as symbols:

chart

1 2-5 6-20 21-100 100


14-16

/
0

C(OARSE) If a quantitative analysis has been executed and residue fractions have been formed, then the number of specimens in the course fraction must be entered:

17-21

MEDIUM
Enter number of specimens of medium fraction. If no separation in course, medium and fine fractions has been made, enter total number of specimens for each fossil type.

22-25

FINE
Enter Note: number of specimens of fine fraction. in, one has to fill

Whenever all three fractions are filled in the SPLIT FACTOR (see p. 4.14).

26

SEMI-QUANTITATIVE DATA In case a semi-quantitative analysis has been performed, two different codes can be entered: a letter and a number code for the estimated amounts:

Code

Print

out on distr.

chart

= = = = = =

explanation not present

R F C A V ? 0

R F C A V ? X

rare few common


abundant very abundant questionable but no quantitative

presence present,

data
Code 1 Print out on distr. chart 1 specimen
3 specimens

or
or

/
0
.

3
4
5

13 specimens or
40 specimens or
100 specimens or

C> m N UI ~ II) U1

Appendix
page 13 Columns
26

3.2.1.22

w~en species amounts are used in calculation for sawblade diagrams, range charts and grouped sample intervals, the 'semi-quantitative data' codes are translated into the following number:

Codes

Number

1 2 3 4 5
Note:

R F C A V

1 3 13 40 100

If only a species and its code is entered but no quantitative semi-quantitative data are provided, an "X" (=present) is printed/plotted automatically on all relevant output documen'ts.

27 28-33

blank
PRESERVATION (OF SPECIES) These columns can be used by the investigator to indicate the preservation per fossil. The content of these columns will only appear on sample analysis and fossil determination reports LITHO(LOGICAL PRESERVATION OF SPECIES) One of the following codes can be inserted here: AH = anhydritic CA = calcitic CK = chalky DM = dolomitic FG = limonitic GC = glauconitic PY = pyritic SD = sideritic SI = siliceous COL(OUR) Insert if appropriate the following codes:

28-29

30-31

BF
BK

= buff
= = =
= =
black brown hyaline green opaque orange olive pink purple

BL
BW

= blue = grey

GE
HY GN OP

ON
OV PK PU

=
= =

RE

red

WH = white YE = yellow

~
"IX)
"., N /1> ID C)

Appendix

3.2.1.22

page 14 Columns 32-33


PHYS(ICAL CONDITION One of the following OF SPECIES) codes can

be

entered

here:

CO
CW

=
= = =
= =

DE PM
GH HE

RW RX

coated corroded deformed broken ghosts casts reworked recrystallized

WO
WT

= worn
= weathered

34-53

REMARKS In these columns the investigator can enter any remarks on species or accessories.

4IJI

G> 11\ II) N UI CJ) ...... II) -.j

Appendix

3.2.1.22

page 15
FOSSIL GROUP CODES

01.xx.xx.xx 02.xx.xx.xx 03.xx.xx.xx 04.xx.xx.xx 05.xx.xx.xx 10.xx.xx.xx 12.xx.xx.xx 15.xx.xx.xx 19.xx.xx.xx 20.xx.xx.xx 25.xx.xx.xx 30.xx.xx.xx 32.xx.xx.xx 35.xx.xx.xx 40.xx.xx.xx 45.xx.xx.xx 49.xx.xx.xx 50.xx.xx.xx
51. xx. xx. xx

Foraminifera Planktonic Benthonic Benthonic Fusulina Radiolaria Calcisphaera Tintinnidae Bioclastic Porifera Coelenterata Annelida Conodonta

in general Foraminifera

Foraminifera Foraminifera in general

(small) (large)

debris

Bryozoa Brachiopoda
Mollusca Crustacea Trilobita Ostracoda Ostracoda - Palaeozoic - Post-Palaezoic

52.xx.xx.xx 55.xx.xx.xx 60.xx.xx.xx 62.xx.xx.xx 63.xx.xx.xx 65.xx.xx.xx 70.xx.xx.xx 80.xx.xx.xx 85.xx.xx.xx 89.xx.xx.xx 90.xx.xx.xx 91.xx.xx.xx 92.xx.xx.xx 93.xx.xx.xx 94.xx.xx.xx 95.xx.xx.xx 99.xx.xx.xx

Echinodermata Graptolithina Otoliths Coprolites / Fish remains pellets

/ Faecal

Algae Diatoms
Sporomorphs Microplankton Palynological Nannoplankton Nannoplankton Nannoplankton Nannoplankton Nannoplankton Chitinozoa Miscellanea macerals

/<) C\J (j) 0> I!>

01)

Appendix

3.2.1.22

page 16

LIST

OF NAME

ABBREVIATIONS

OF PALYNOLOGICAL

INVESTIGATORS

BARTEN

BRN BES BOM HVB CLK CPR CRM

MULLER
van Niel

MLR NIL NSN PSK PKR PTR PRS


HVP EMR ROE RLD TSC SRM SGH

BESEHS BOOM VAN DEN BRINK CLARKE COUPER CRAMER


DIEDERIX van EENDENBURG EGG INK EVANS FREAKE FUCHS GAILLARD GRIFFITH

NIJSSEN
POHOWSKY

POKORNY POTTER PRINS


van PROOIJE REINDL ROERSMA ROWLANDS Th. SCHROEDER SCHUURMAN STEGMAN

DDX
EBG JWE EVS FRK FCS GLD

GRF HAN

TICHLER VERDIER
VLIERBOOM van WIJHE WILLIAMS WILSCHUT WHITAKER

TCL VRD VBO WYH WLM WLC WTK AWO


ZAD ZWA

de HAAN
VAN HECK

HEC
HPG KAP KYL LOV MYR
MLD MRG

HOPPING KNAAP KUYL LOVE MEYER


MILL lOUD

WOLFARD
ZWAARD v.d. ZWAN

MORGENROTH

~ 01 \D F\) (II '" "\D \D

Appendix 3.2.1.22

page 17

LIST

OF NAME

ABBREVIATIONS

OF

MICROPALAEONTOLOGICAL

INVESTIGATORS

ADESIDA
BARBEITO

ADD BAR BJS BSG BRO BRR CAP CRD DLL DBY DYK ECK GEG HAK HRT HFM HKR JKR KAS KEY KRS KLN HKL KOK KMR KRT PVK LGD

LAUER LETSCH
MABILLARD

LUR LSC MBD MRI DMR MTK NLN NDM OBK PSM RCZ RBS SCR ASC

BATJES BISIG BROLSMA BROUWER


CAPELLOS

MARIE
de MEIJER

MENTINK NOLTEN
NOORDERMEER

CORDEY DOLLE DUBEY DIJK ECKERT


GEERLINGS

OPBROEK POSTUMA RACZ RIBIS SCHERER A.G. SCHRODER


SEPTFONTAINE

HAAK 't HART


HOFFNANN HOOGKAMER

SPF
SIK SSG SLM SDN SPA TCC TPM FFU WGR WAN WKZ WTT

SIKKEMA . SISSINGH

JONKERS
KAASSCHIETER

SLEUMER
SOEDIONO

KEIJ
ter KEURS

SPAAK
TAUECCHIO

KLEYN KLEIN KOK


KOMMEREN

TRAPMAN ULICZNY WAGNER WANNIER


WIJKHUIZEN

KORT
van KUIJK

WITT

LAGAAIJ

......... ex:> r<) N (I) to C!>

Appendix

3.2.2.1.1

PALAEONTOLOGICAL SAMPLE PREPARATION BY THE "PETROL METHOD" -------_._._-_.-----

The petrol

method

is

carried

out

in

the

following

way: and if necessary

1. 2. 3.

the sample is crushed with a sample crusher further pulverized with mortar and pestle the the sample sample is is is if dried soaked and in heated petrol on a hotplate for about

30 minutes

(outdoors)

4.

the petrol washed or

replaced by boiling water time permits, left soaking

and the sample normally in the water overnight.

If the first treatment with the residue.

is

not

successful

the

whole

procedure

is

repeated

eo

.:::::. If! N 0> CD (!)

c5

Appendix 3.2.2.1.2

PREPARATION

OF THIN SECTIONS OF ISOLATED LARGER FORAMINIFERA


(ofter WAGNER,

1964)

To obtain good results in preparing sections of isolated larger Foraminifera, it is essential to have a great deal of patience, knowledge of the internal structure of the genera of larger Foraminifera, and a certain degree of manual dexterity. By means of the method described below grinding is carried out directly under the microscope. With the help of a needle or tweezers the specimen to be sectioned is transferred under the microscope from the collective slide to the centre of a glass slide. A few small pieces of Lake-side 70C are then placed near the specimen. Heating is effected by warming the slide on an electric hot plate. When the Lake-side has melted the slide is transferred back to the microscope to adjust the position of the specimen. In this connection the plane to be ground for observation - e.g. the
equatorial plane of a Lepidocyclina

must

be adjusted

to a virtually

horizontal

position, while curved or undulating planes should preferably be mounted with the most convex side upwards. In order to prevent crumbling away, and to save time in grinding, the specimen must be firmly embedded in the middle of the Lake-side, but, nevertheless, must not be deeply buried in it. For practice has shown that the hard Lake-side is often more difficult to grind away than the test itself. Accordingly, in mounting the specimen, a sufficient quantity of Lake-side should be used, but particular care should be taken to avoid using too much. The grinding down, or rather filing down, of the specimen takes place under the microscope, using the rough side, i.e. the "frosted" side, of a second slide. Rough, medium-fine and fine frosted slides may be used for grinding, one after the other if desired, depending on the quantity of material to be ground away and the size and/or the hardness of the specimen. The slides are prepared in the usual manner, with carborundum powders Nos. 100, 220, 300 and 500. When sectioning the "frosted" slide is moved to and fro, or round and round, under gentle pressure, on the specimen, after having been previously moistened with water so that it becomes transparent at the point of contact with the specimen. The. transparent nature of such glass "files" when wet makes it possible to follow the grinding process closely under the microscope, during which a clear, continuous picture is obtained of the structure of the disappearing part of the test. The "grinding plate" is moved in a horizontal position until the ground surface for observation has been completely or partly reached. By tilting the "grinding plate" to a greater or lesser degree, any parts of the test, which still have to be removed, can be ground away. The last vestiges of extraneous material, left behind in hollows in the surface to be exposed, can be scraped away by means of a needle, the end of which has been ground into triangular form for this purpose. In this manner even markedly curved and undulating median layers can be completely exposed. The material which has been ground and scraped off is removed by means of a brush dipped in water; the "grinding plates" should also be rinsed in water occasionally. Accumulation of Lake-side grindings cause these latter to become somewhat blUnt in course of time, and they should then be cleaned with xylol. To produce a thin section, the specimen prepared in the manner described above should be heated on the hot plate and then turned over. When this is done, any cavities between the ground surface and the glass slide - especially in the case
of curved or undulating specimens

should

be completely

filled up with Lake-side.

The other half of the test is then removed in the manner described. The final stage of grinding can best be carried out under transmitted light. The section is completed by covering it with a plastic spray coating or a cover glass as described under A. A particularly simple method applicable to large N ummuJites, in which the median plane is in any case rarely flat, is as follows. The specimen is heated in an open flame for some seconds and then quenched in cold water when it will split along the weak median chambers providing the desired result.

...... CD f'(') N 0\ co <D

Appendix

3.2.2.2.1

STANDARD PREPARATION

METHOD OF ROCK SAMPLES

FOR PALYNOLOGICAL

INVESTIGATION

(by L. Nij ssen)

1) Select most suitable lithologies available Sampling for Palynological Investigation"); select "mid-fraction". 2) Clean thoroughly, to lose clay(stone) 3) If necessary, crush but with fairly particles. sample to pieces

(see Appendix 4.2.1: in case of cutting

"Rock samples

unconsolidated

sediments

take

care

not

of approx.

1-2

rom;

discard

"powder".

4) Take some 2-10 gr of sample, depending on estimated amount of acidresistant organic material; put into 100 cm~_centrifuge tube (plastic). (if more material has to be processed, e.g. light-coloured limestone, use more tubes or beaker). 5) If liquid hydrocarbons are present: cover with solvent, e.g. benzene (naphta), agitate regularly, after 10 min : centrifuge (2000 RPM for 30 sec), decant; repeat if judged necessary; let evaporate solvent, or add (methylated) alcohol, agitate, centrifuge a/a, decant. Note: operations 5-8 to be carrieE_out in fume-cu~oaEE' material, proceed with 7); otherwise, add 10% hydrochloric acid (see foot-note I), heat to approx. 80C (in water-bath), agitate regularly until visible reaction has ceased, centrifuge a/a, decant. Note: decanted acids (steps 6-8) to be neutralized in plastic bucket in fume-cupboard.
some 40% hydrofluoric acid, heat a/a, agitate regularly, add
from

6) Non-calcareous

7) Add

time to agitate,

time

after 1 hr fill up with centrifuge a/a, decant.


some acid;
acid, acid

10% hydrochloric

acid,

8) Add ~% hydrochloric with ~% hydrochloric decant.

agitate, centrifuge a/a, decant; transfer to 15 cm3 centrifuge tube, centrifuge a/a,

9) Add zincbromide solution, density approx. 2.2 (see foot-note thoroughly, centrifuge a/a (preferably for 1-2 min). 10)

2),

mix

Pour floating material on vibrating microsieve (see foot-note 3) of 15 ~m hole diameter (or alternatively 20 or 30 JJm, depending on type of palynomorphs studied), and flush with (methylated) alcohol or water with some (meth.)alcohol.

11) transfer fraction >15 JJm with liquid a/a via small beaker to 15 cm3 tube, centrifuge a/a, decant. 12) Transfer

with liquid a/a to labeled residue tube, centrifuge a/a, decant.

...... 01) tt> N a> <D C,!)

Appendix

3.2.2.2.1

page 2

13) Mount permanent microscope slide by mixing some residue with glyceringelatin while heating slide to approx. 100C, let evaporate alcohol/water, place cover-glass, let cool for at least a few minutes, seal well with transparent nail-varnish. 14) Add some glycerin to remaining residue to avoid been drying out. on standard

15) Make sure preparation particulars preparation/investigation sheets.

etc. have

indicated

foot note

x % is diluted to 1) Dilution of acids: an acid with concentration one with concentration y % by pouring slowly y cm3 of the x % acid into (x-y) cm3 of water (preferably distilled or filtered), resulting in x cm3 acid with concentration y %, e.g. 10% bydrochloric acid is obtained by adding 10 cms 36% acid to 26 cm3 water. 2) Preparation of heavy liquid: dissolve 1 kg zincbromide (ZnBr2) in 399 cm3 distilled water (sligbtly acidified with hydrochloric acid to prevent precipitation of zinc hydroxide); this yields 636 cm3 beavy liquid, density 2.2. Note: tbe dissolution is strongly exotherm, so in a hot environment tbe preparation should be done carefully, preferably by cooling the mixing beaker in a water-basin.
3)

foot note

foot

note

Sieving: tbe sieving is greatly facilitated by pressing tbe sieve against the vibrating "finger" of a "Turbomixer"; subsequent cleaning of tbe sieve may also be done by pressing it in vertical and inverted position while flusbing with (methylated) alcobol/ water.

...... <I) rn N 01 CO (!)

52

Appendix3.2.2.2.2
COAL RANK CLASSIFICATIONAND ORGANIC METAMORPHISM

COAL
SPOROMORPH COLOUR
GROUP
-

R~NK
IFIC

HUMIC
FIXED CARBON

CLASSifiCATION
COALS'
VOLATILE

DEGREE

OF

LEVEL

OF

VITRINITE

ORGANIC

ORGANIC
PHISM

U.S. SYSTEM (ASTM ASA)


CALOR

METAMOR-METAMOR- ANCE

REFLECT-

INTERNATIONAL (UN
MATTER

SYST EM
-

PHISM

ECE) CLASS

CALORIFIC
VALUE kCal/kQ ") 2 .103 (2400) 14
3
(30110)

RANK

VALUE Btu/lb tt)

DOM
..J 3S

LOM

Ro
random

15

;:60
...."a

~<t~
0 a

;;

<t

0
0
40

I- 0 ~~<.>~ '" -"0

~0
I 2 ! 0.2

C) :J

'0 z= z. c: C) 0

. - . 0 0 ..J ~0 a:: 1X1~

13
~13TIIO)

~4 (41100)

12

Z
0
a::

0.3

II)

,0

::)

mZ
::)21 Yellow /
/

(1)::)

B
;'
;' ./
;'

:> 0 'z 111100 CD:>~ en::;)


,/ ;' ;'

en

8300
(8300)

45

~4
S
0.4

11
10 f1 5700
6100

10
~9

6
50 7
55

I-

iii

11000

0.5

~, A

12

C
13000 13 7200

8
..J

8 0.6

IIJ:> ...JO Z-z C>~-C(~ Z...J:> O~ >CD

III

B
14000 77110

9 60 0.7 10 0.8 0.9 1.0 If 1.1


f.2

<t
6
65

II)

::) 0 Z

0
5

!:Ii
::) Iii5 MEDIUM

70

VOLATILE BITUMINOUS

1.3 75 25 75

4
12 BO
LOW
VOLATI LE

1.4 1.5
1.6

20

80

B
3
B5 15 A 2 90 10 a:: 85 13 f4 90 f5 16 f7 18 19 20
used Shell by: Oil

BITUMINOUS

SEMIANTHRACITE

<t
::t:

U ct 1-411: X I- ANTHRACITE Z ct
ANTHRACITE
Remarks:

B
-95 5 1

1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.f 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 3.0 4.0

A
0

95

META-

100%
I

0%
I

fOO
Scoles
S.I.P.M.

S.I.P.M.

..) Mai.t. mineral matter fr.. ba.i. calculated I 97 % relative humidity at 300 C. I
I

to .tandard mol.ture content of air at: 96 % relative humidity at 300 C.

....) Coalification break a I 77 010 C and 7000 kCol/kQ which denoted


Brown Coal to Hard Coal for many Coal Re.earche.. clallificatlan..

limll from and old national coal

For a detailed correlation between Ihue parameler. see fhe reporl by A. Hood (t973) : "Standardization of vjtrinit.reflectance curvesto EP44796

~ I<> N 0> ID (!)

Appendix

3.2.2.3.1

NANNOPLANKTON

INVESTIGATION

AT THE WELL

SITE

Most favourable sediments for nannoplankton studies are calcareous clays/shales and marls from open marine environments. Pelagic limestones are suitable as well, however, due to their hardness, quite often more sophisticated preparation methods, than the ones described below, are needed. Shallow water deposits (incl. platform carbonates), seldom contain sufficient nannoliths for a reliable

dating.

Preparation -

& examination:

select some representative cuttings crush them and put the powder in a test tube with distilled water shake the tube for approx. half a minute pour the sample through a 30-70 micron sieve (e.g. folded in a funnel) into an other tube. - allow the fine fraction to settle and pour off the water - place a drop of the residue on an object-glass and distribute it evenly the side of a glass rod
-

with

dry the preparation on a hot plate and fix it with canada balsam (or immersion

oil)
- cover i~ with a cover-glass. examine the slide under a palynological microscope lens and preferably with polarised light with a 100x oil-immersion

~ ~ N ~ ~ ~

Appendix 3.2.3.1

DEPTH

DISTRIBUTION

OF SELECTED
(otter

RECENT

BENTHONIC

FORAMINIFERA

GENERA

BOLTOVSKOY a WRIGHT,1976)

Shelf Nearshore zone and inner shelf ..70m Om AceruulinLA Allomorphina Alveolinella Alveolophragmium Amphisregina Angulogerina Archaias Asterigerina BacuJogypsina Barhysiphon Bigenerina Bolivina Bardis BlKceUa Bulimina Buliminella Calcarina Cancris Cassidulina Chilostomella Cibicides Cornuspira Cribrostomoides Cyclammina Denralina Discorbis Ehrenbergina Elphidium ErislOlHit1('//tj Eronides Fissurina Gaudryino Glabralella Glabobu/imitla Glohu/ina Gutlulina Gyroidina Heleroslegina Hoeglundina Hyalinea Ka"erielJa + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + -t + + + -I+ + + + + + + + + + + + + -r + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + ,... + + + + + + + + + + + +

Slope Bathyal Outer shelf zone Ahyssal zone 3OO0m Lagena + Laricarinina Marginopora Marginulina Martinouiella + + Massilina Miliolinella Nodosaria Nodosineila + + + + + Nanian Nonionella Oolina Operculina Parafissurina + + + + Parellina Peneroplis Planorbulinu Planulina + + + + + + Poroeponides PuI/enia Pyrgo Pyrulina + + + + + + Quinqueioculina Reophax Rhabdammina Rohulus + + ROlalio Saccammina ..,. + + + + + + Sigmoilina SigmonlOrphina Spirillina Spiroloculina Textularia + Trifaril1a Triioculit1O Trochammilla + + Vl1igerilw Vaivulineria + Venebralit10 Vir~I~lilla + + + + + + .,.. + -t + + + + + + + + + + + + T + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Shelf Nearshore zone and inner shelf Om -70m +

Slope Bathyal Outer shelf -200m + + + Transitional 1UOOm + + 3000 m + + zone Ahyssal zone

Transitional IUoom --200m

+ +

+ +

+ + +

+ + + + + + + +
-t"-

+ +

+ + T

+ +

+ +

+ + + +

+ + + + + + +

+ + + + + + +

+ + + + + + +

+ + + + + +

+ + + + + + + + + + +

+ +

+ +

+ +

+ + + + + + + +

+ + + + + + + + +

"CD r<) C\J en CD (.!)

Appendix 3.2.3.2

GENERALIZED

ECOLOGICAL DATA FOR SELECTED LIVING BENTHONIC FORAMINIFERA GENERA


(after MURRAY. 1913)

The data are given in the order: I. Salinity

CD " !<) N
en ID (!)

Heterostegina Normal marine to hypersaline, ? sediment or ? vegetation, tropical, inner shelf. are not known the followingterms are used-hyposaline 33 per mille), Hoeglundina Normal marine, muddy sediment, <5C, 14o-IIOO m, normal marine (33-37 per mille), hypersaline (> 37 per mille). outer shelf and bathyal. Hyalinea Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold to temperate, 10-1000 m, 2. Substrate Free-living on sediment or clinging to vegetation, pebbles, shelf and bathyal. etc. Islandiella 32-35 per mille, muddy sediment, <10 C, >20 m, shelf. 3. Temperature of the bottom water This is rarely known with precision. Jadammina 0-50 per mille, sediment, 0-30 c, intertidal, tidal marshes. Arctic, temperate, subtropical and tropical are used in a geographic sense. Ka"eriella Normal marine, muddy sediment, <IOC, >100 m, outer They give a rough guide to the bottom temperature. shelf and upper bathyal. Lagena Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold to tropical, 0-180 m, 4. Depth The principal range is given. Many species extend into deeper shelf. water in very low abundance. Lenticu/ina Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold, > 100 m, outer shelf Acervu/ina Normal marine, attached, ? temperate, 0--60 m, inner shelf. and bathyal. . Marginopora Normal marine to hypersaline, sea-grass and seaweed, 18Alveolinella 39-50 per mille, shell sand, 18-26 C, 0-6 m, inner shelf and lagoons, Indo-Pacific. 26 C, 0-8 m, inner shelf. Alveolophragmium Normal marine, muddy sediment, <10 C, 20-700 m, Martinottiella Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold, > 120 m, outer shelf shelf and upper bathyal. and bathyal. Ammobaculites Hyposaline, sediment, temperate-? tropical, hyposaline Massilina Normal marine, vegetation and sandy sediment, temperate to marshes and lagoons and inner shelf. subtropical, 0-40 m, inner shelf. Ammonia Hyposaline, marine, hypersaline, sediment, I5-30C, 0-50 m, Melonis Normal marine, muddy sediment, <IOC, 5-1000 m, shelf and hyposaline and hypersaline lagoons, inner shelf. bathyal. Ammotium Hyposaline-hypersaline, sediment, 0-30 C, intertidal-Io m, Miliammina 0-50 per mille, sediment, 0-30 C, 0-10 m, hyposaline lagoons, tidal marshes and hyposaline lagoons, estuaries, and enclosed shelf seas. hyposaline-hypersaline tidal marshes. Amphistegina >34 per mille, sea-grass, sediment, coral reefs, 25-26C, Miliolinella 32-50 per mille, sediment, 10-30C, 0-100 m, inner shelf, normal marine lagoons and tidal marshes, hypersaline lagoons. 5-20 m, inner shelf. Archaias Normal marine-hypersaline, ? sediment and vegetation, Nonion Hyposaline to normal marine, sediment, cold to tropical, 0-180 m, tropical, inner shelf. shelf. Arenoparrella Hyposaline-hypersaline, sediment, 0-30 C, intertidal, tidal Nonione/la Normal marine, muddy sediment, temperate-subtropical, 10marshes. Some species known from 82-460 m off California. 1000 m, shelf and bathyal. Asterigerina Normal marine, sediment, tropical-subtropical, inner shelf. Oo/ina Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold to tropical, 0-180 m, shelf. Asterigerinata 35 per mille, sediment, temperate, 0-100 m, inner shelf. Operculina Normal marine-hypersaline, sediment, tropical, ? inner shelf. Baculogypsina Normal marine, algae, coral fragments, tropical >25 c, Paromalina Normal marine, muddy sediment, <IOC, >150 m, outer intertidal to ? 10 m, coral reefs. shelf and bathyal. Bigenerina Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold, > 100 m, outer shelf Pa"ina Hypersaline, sediment and vegetation, 15-30 C, 0-20 m, lagoons and bathyal. and nearshore. Bolivina 32-36 per mille, muddy sediment, 1-30 C, bathyal to marginal Patellina Normal marine, clinging to pebbles or shells, cold to subtropical, marine. 0-100 m, inner shelf. Peneroplis 37-53 per mille, sea-grass, seaweed, algae, 18-27C, 0-35 m, Borelis Probably as for Alveolinella, but also Atlantic. 1-30 c, bathyal to marginal normally 0-10 m, lagoons and nearshore. Brizal~na 32-36 per mille, muddy sediment, . manne. Planorbulina Normal marine, attached to vegetation, stones and shells, Buccella Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold to warm temperate, temperate--subtropical, 0-50 m, inner shelf. Protelphidium 0-35 per mille, sediment, 0-20 C, 0-10 m, hyposaline tidal 0-180 m, shelf. 1-30 C, bathyal to nearshore. Bulimina 32-36 per mille, muddy sediment, marshes, lagoons and estuaries. Buliminella Normal marine, muddy sediment, temperate, 0-800 m, mainly Pullenia Normal marine, muddy sediment, <IOC, 150-6000 m, outer shelf but extends into bathyal. shelf to deep sea. Pyrgo Group I: normal marine, vegetation and sediment, temperate, Calcarina Normal marine, algae, coral fragments, tropical >25 C, intertidal to ? 10 m, coral reefs. 0-50 m, inner shelf. Group 2: normal marine, muddy sediment, < 5 c, 50-2000 m, shelf and Caneris Normal marine, sediment, temperate-subtropical, 50-150 m, shelf. bathyal. Cassidulina Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold to temperate, 5Quinqueloculina > 32 per mille, sandy sediment and vegetation, mainly > 3000 m, shelf to bathyal. temperate to tropical but some arctic species, 0-40 m, inner shelf, Chilostomella Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold, 80-II90 m, outer normal marine and hypersaline lagoons. shelf and bathyal. Cibicides Normal marine, clinging to vegetation, stones, shells, living Reophax Normal marine, sediment, arctic-tropical, 0-150 m, shelf. animals, arctic to tropical, 0- > 2000 m, shelf to bathyal. Rosalina Normal marine, clinging to vegetation, shells, stones, temperatesubtropical, 0-100 m, inner shelf. Cribrostomoides Slightly hyposaline (30 per mille) to normal marine, sandy sediments, ? < I 5 c, 0-150 m, shelf. Rotalia 36-38 per mille, sediment, 14-25 C, 0-40 m, inner shelf. Saccammina 32-36 per mille, sandy sediment, <15C, 0-100 m, inner Cyclammina Normal marine, sediment, 10C, sigma t 27.7, >100 m, outer shelf and upper bathyal. shelf. Cyclogyra Normal marine, sediment, cold to tropical, 0-100 m, inner shelf. . Siphotextularia Normal marine, muddy sediment, ? < 10 C, ISO- > 1000 m Discorbis Normal marine, vegetation, > 12 C, 0-50 m, inner shelf. outer shelf and bathyal. Eggerella 20-37 per mille, sediment, arctic to temperate, 0-100 m, inner Sorites >37 per mille, sea-grass, 18-26C, 0-35 m, lagoons and nearshelf, enclosed hyposaline shelf-seas and lagoons. shore. Spirillina Normal marine, clinging to stones and shells, cold to temperate, Elphidium Keeled: 35-50 per mille, sediment and vegetation, > 15 c, 0-100 m, inner shelf. 0-50 m, inner shelf. S pirolina > 37 per mille, sea-grass, 18-26 C, 0-35 m, lagoons and nearUnkeeled: 0-70 per mille, sediment and vegetation, 1-30 c, 0-50 m, hyposaline to hypersaline tidal marshes and lagoons, nearshore. shore. Stetsonia Normal marine, muddy sediment, temperate to subtropical, 0Eponides Normal marine, sediment, cold to temperate, 10->6000 m, shelf 60 m, inner shelf. to bathyal. Textularia Normal marine, sandy sediment, arctic to tropical, 50-640 m, Fissurina Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold to tropical, 0-150 m, shelf and upper bathyal. shelf. Trifarina Normal marine, muddy sediment, temperate, 0-400 m, shelf and Fursenkoina Slightly hyposaline to normal marine, muddy sediment, upper bathyal. temperate, 0-1190 m, lagoons, shelf and bathyal. Gaudryina Normal marine, sandy sediment, temperate, 50-460 m, shelf Trilocu/ina >32 per mille, sandy sediment and vegetation, mainly temperand upper bathyal. ate to tropical, 0-40 m, inner shelf, normal marine, and hypersaline Gavelinopsis Normal marine, clinging to vegetation, stones and shells, lagoons. Some bathyal species. temperate, 0- > 1000 m, shelf and bathyal. Trochamnlina Group I: hyposaline to hypersaline, muddy sediment, Glabratella > 35 per mille, sediment or vegetation, temperate-tropical, 0-30 C, intertidal, tidal marshes. Group 2: normal marine, sediment, cold to temperate, 0-2000 m, shelf 0-50 m, hypersaline tidal marshes and lagoons, normal marine inner shelf. Globobulimina Slightly hyposaline (32 per mille) to normal marine, muddy and bathyal. sediment, < 10 C, 20-2000 m, shelf to bathyal. Uvigerina Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold, 100->4500 m, outer Globulina Normal marine, sediment, temperate to tropical, 0-60 m, inner shelf to bathyal. shelf. Vertebralina Normal marine to hypersaline, vegetation, 15-30 c, 0-20 m, Gyroidina Normal marine, muddy sediment, cold, shelf and.bathyal. lagoons and inner shelf. The known range is given in figures. Where the exact limits

SUMMARY
SUMMARY
Diversit)' It

OF LIVING BENTHONIC AND THEIR APPLICATION


DATA

FORAMINIFERID DISTRIBUTIONS TO PALAEOECOLOGY


MILIOLINA

Appendix page1

3.2.3.3

OF DISTRIBUTION

(ofter MURRAY, 1973)

The summary of the ranges of diversity (Figure 101) clearly shows that it is
possible to differentiate environments. In a general sense,

separating normal marine environments (" > 5) from "abnormal environments (" < 5). Hyposaline and hypersaline marshes, lagoons and hyposaline shelf seas all have low diversity. Normal shelf seas and normal marine lagoons have diversity values of" > 5.

5 is a boundary

normal marine 10000n5

Triangularplot

It

'l/
..
hyposaline lagoons

The fields for different environments show some overlap, but on the whole there is a very clear pattern (Figure 102). The field for hypersaline marshes occupies the entire triangle. All hyposaline environments lie close to the Rotaliina- Textulariina side: hyposaline marshes lack Miliolina, hyposaline lagoons and estuaries have a small Miliolina component, especially in their seaward parts. Shelf seas have up to 20 per cent Miliolina, although many lack the group altogether. Normal marine and hypersaline lagoon assemblages are primarily mixtures of Miliolina and Rotaliina. Gel/era

I/!;;
hyposoline marshes

In Appendix~ ecological data are listed for eighty-three genera; salinity, substrate, temperature of the bottom water, and depth. Some genera are good environmental indicators; however, different species of some genera live in totally different environments.

Figure 102 Summary triangular plot. Inference" index suggests (a) hyposaline and nearshore shelf-seas, (/J) hypersaline lagoon, (c) hyposaline lagoon. Triangular plot suggests (a) shelf sea, (/J) hyposaline lagoon, (c) hyposaline marsh. Gel/era Elphidium (unkeeled) salinity 0-70 per mille, sediment and vegetation, I-30C, 0-50 m, hyposaline to hypersaline marshes and lagoons, nearshore. Ammollia hyposaline to hypersaline, sediment, 15-]0 C, 0-50 m, hyposaline and hypersaline lagoons, inner shelf. Miliammilla salinity 0-50 per mille, sediment, 0-30C, 0-10 m, hyposaline lagoons, hyposaline to hypersaline tidal marshes. Ammotium hyposaline-hypersaline, sediment, O-]OC, 0-10 m, tidal marshes and hyposaline lagoons, estuaries, enclosed shelf seas. Interpretation It is clearly abnormal marine. The low abundance of Miliolina favours hyposaline water. The" index is too high for a hyposaline marsh. It must therefore be a hyposaline lagoon or nearshore shelt:'sea. Miliammillil and Alllmotium are not found in nearshore shelf-seas, so it
a
0

APPLICATION

TO PALAEOECOLOGY

This book has been written primarily to assist the palaeoecological interpretation of fossil foraminiferids. The more that is known of the distribution and ecology of modern species, the easier it will be to interpret fossil assemblages. The value of environmental reconstructions based on foraminiferids has been apparent to the petroleum industry for many years. It has been a major factor promoting the development of the subject. Before attempting to interpret a fossil assemblage, it is wise to. note the geological setting of the sample. In particular, coarse-grained sediments are likely to show evidence of reworking and transport of foraminiferids. It is important to look for signs of abrasion, size-sorting and mixing of assemblages. If any of these are well developed, an ecological interpretation based on the sample is likely to be partly in error. If the sample shows little sign of postmortem transport effects, the following procedure can be adopted; I. Make an assemblage count and determine the" index and the RotaliinaMiliolina- Textulariina ratio. 2. Examine the" summary diagram (Figure 101) to assess the range of environmental possibilities. 3. Examine the triangular plot summary diagram (Figure 102) to see which environment is indicated. 4. Compare the genera with the information in Appendix 2. 5. When the likely environment has been established, refer to the relevant chapter for details of the modern foraminiferids. Example Data" = 4, Rotaliina 80 per cent, Miliolina 5 per cent, Textulariina 15 per cent, few abraded specimens, Elphidium, Ammonia, Miliammina and Ammotium are the dorrnnant genera.
~. 55
"'C 1/

index
5 100

% Subordera. /. Genera
000 1000

similari1y
100

"C I::

i
'I
~

T
1&

~<;) T 'I Ii Ir
I ,I r I'

~~ ~

~~~\f) ~~=:.~

I~

~
Q> I:: i.'L:

~t

\/

,/ I' I /' r r

*+I

Normol marine inner shelf

R
c: C U)

50

>. "C "C :J


)(

t IIi
'ffi

\ '\. \
0

'

,~

E.omple I.

::;

c ( ;) Q:

t
&L

0 z

Hyposoline lagoon

.' . '.
'.

~~ ~

c:t (I)

~ .~
0

~
kJ kJ fI)

1] ~ a. z

8on 30 '5
25

Figure 103 Theoretical borehole record for palaeoecological interpretation.

z i ~ 'IU ...

8 ..J 0
~ CI

>... 2
0 100
Number of individuols

U)

...... CD

:il

ex.

..,
N 0\ U) U)

fr

must he a hyposaline lagoon. The depth is 0-10 m, sediment substrate prohably with 110 weed cover, temperature in the range IS-30C in the summer. Commonly palaeoecological studies are carried out on borehole data. Using the methods described in this book, it is possible to plot a borehole log of index, percentage occurrence of the suborders, percentage abun" the dominant genus, and similarity index. The latter is especially dance of valuable in recognizing faunal changes (Figure 103). The advantages of using several different aspects of the assemblages to deduce the environments they represent, is that the results are less subjective than those obtained by conventional methods. Their application to continuous stratigraphic sections in outcrop or from boreholes enables an assessment to be made of the cause, and therefore the significance, of a faunal change. This is of fundamental importance where benthic foraminiferids arc being used for stratigraphic correlation.
SEE CHAPTER "METHODS OF ANALYSIS", NEXT PAGE _APPENDIX B.Z.3.Z .SEE PAGE5 OF THIS APPENDIX *

Figure 101 Summary of the range of diversity in different environments.

Appendix 3.2.3.3 page2


METHODS OF ANALYSIS
In this chapter particular emphasis is given to the methods used in this book, but other methods are briefly described also.
Species Absolute

RELATIVE

AND ABSOLUTE

ABUNDANCE

'1 0

to -/.

ABCDEFGHIJKL

ABCDEFGHI.JKL

The two methods of quantifying living animal assemblages are relative abundance, in which the number of individuals of each species forms a percentage or ratio of the total number of individuals (100 per cent), and absolute abundance, in which the number of individuals is related to a unit area or volume of sea floor. The relationship between the two methods is shown in the following theoretical model, which has been designed to incorporate some of the features seen in natural assemblages. A profile of stations (A-L) shows a progressive increase in the absolute abundance and in the number of species present in the assemblage (see Figure I and Table I). Comparison of the two methods of presenting the results shows: (a) Species I, having a uniform absolute abundance, has a spurious peak at' station A by the relative abundance method. Similar spurious peaks at station A are seen in the relative abundance of species 2, 4 and 5; (b) the peaks of abundance appear at different stations according to the method used (species 2, 3, 5 and 6); (c) most other species show a progressive increase in absolute abundance but this is not evident from the relative abundance histograms because the rate of increase of the abundance of individual species is roughly the same as that of the total population. An additional disadvantage of the relative abundance method is that when the number of species is small (less than ten) the percentages of individual species are inevitably high and vice versa. Ujiie (1962) has pointed out that when the sampling error exceeds the percentage of a given species, the result should be rejected. He concluded that it was preferable to reject all occurrences of less than 7-10 per cent. While this might be desirable from the statistical point of view, it is scarcely practical. Two definitions of absolute abundance have been used in the study of foraminiferids. Schott (1935) used the Foraminiferal Number, i.e. the number of foraminiferids present in I g dry weight of sediment. Phleger (1960a) and other authors have used the absolute abundance of foraminiferids in a unit area of 10 cm' (volume 10 cm3). Only the latter definition is appropriate to the study of living foraminiferids, but it has the disadvantage that the area of sea floor sampled must be known. Unless the rate of sedimentation and the rate of production of the foraminiferids are known, there can be no direct comparison ofliving populations on a two-dimensional surface with Foraminiferal Numbers based on three-dimensional samples drawn from fossil assem bla ges. Thus there are advantages and disadvantages of the relative and absolute abundance methods, but both are useful for different aspects of study as long as the user is aware of the errors which can arise.

'Ul
,~ ,Lj
5
HI

L
~
~
I

"I01i'"

~ IL
J t

Lillrffiw
I

,
7

1mmrdllJ

~
I

rRh

U
U

U
i

STANDING

CROP

The number of individuals present on a unit area of sea floor at anyone time is the standing crop. Many authors use a unit area of 10 cm' but, even where a larger unit area is stUdied (e.g. Murray, I968b, 1969), the results can be scaled down for comparative purposes. Standing crop can also be measured as biomass (i.e. live weight), dry weight, dry organic matter, displacement volume or calculated volume (see Nielson, 1963, p. 133) but these are not normally used in foraminiferid studies. BIOMASS Biomass is normally expressed as live weight, and can be used as a measure of standing crop. However, since a population of a few large animals may be ecologically more significant than a large population of small individuals, it seems worth using both measures of population size. In the case of foraminiferids, it is difficult to measure live weight because of their small size and the difficulty of separating them from the sediment. It is therefore easier to express biomass as the calculated volume of the entire shell (Murray, 1968b) although in the case of large genera it is probably advisable to include only the volume of the chambers. It is easier to approximate foraminiferids to simple geometrical shapes than to develop a formula to express the volume of a complex shape. Many foraminiferids are close to prolate or oblate sphaeroids, spheres or cones. The size-volume relationships are shown in Figures 2 and 3. It can be seen that as size increases arithmetically, volume increases logarithmically. Therefore, the most reliable way of measuring biomass is to measure each specimen and to determine its volume. However, in practice this is tedious, slow and not worth the labour involved. A more rapid method is to divide the individuals into a number of size groups and, by inspection, to select the middle-sized specimen in each group, to determine its size and volume, and to multiply by the number in the group. The sum of the group volumes will give the biomass.
......

j rlH-i-rrrTIiJ

L ~

10

Lrilllli

Lmmm

II

U
U
L
1

~
L j

12

~
rrll

13

dilJ
~

11

14 15

1
Figure I Histograms of absolute and relative abundance of fifteen species along a profile of stations A to L, based on the data in Table I.

I:i!
(!)

N 0\ CD

Appendix 3.2.3.3 page :3

Table I Theoretical

model to show the relationship

between relative and absolute abundance

Absolute abundance

Station A B C D E F G H I

S peeies no. I 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 ]0

2 5 5 5 10 20 40 80 160 160 5 20

4 5 5 10 20 5 5 10 3 45 60 80 100 100 80 60

6 2 5 10 20

10

II

12

13

14

15

Total 33 65 106 185

4
60 80 80 60 40

5 10 10 20 50 70

5 5 5 10 20 10 20 30 50

I 10 20 3 45 80 100 120 10 20 30

3
4 50 60 100 200 200 100

3 4
60 9 ISO

3 5
80 120 180

5
120

10 20 50

285 400' 545 811 10 105 1360

80 4
20

3
20

K L

10

10

25 300
300

]00 120 120 ]00

24

100 120 180

100 200

13
130

190
220

IS

30 60 loa

10

4 4

5 10

1625 1715

Relative abundance

Station A B C D E F G H I

Speeies no. I 31 IS 9-4 5.4 3.5 2.5 1.8 1.2 0.9 0.7 0.6 0.6

2 IS 8 4.7 5.4 7.0 10.0 14.8 19.7 15.2 5.8 2.5 1.2 15 3 37.8 32.5 28.0 20.0 11.0 4.9 2.7 1.5 0.6 0.3

4 IS 8 9.4 10.8 10.5


10.0

6 IS 8 9-4 16.2 15.8


15.0

7 3 8 9-4 5.4 7.0 7.5 9.3 8.6 9.5 8.8 H 5.8

8 8 4.7 2.7 3.5 5.0 5.5 6.2 7.6 8.8 11.0 14.0

9 8 4.7 2.7 3.5 5.0 5.5 6.2 6.7 7.3 H 10.5

10

II

12

13

14

IS

Total 100 101 99.8 100.0 99.8 100.0 100.5 99.8 99.6 99.6 99.1 99.9

6 8 9-4 10.8 10.5


10.0

0.9 5.4 7.0 7.5 8.3 9.7 9.5 8.8 8.0 7.6

2.7 3.5 6.0 5.5 6.2 6.7 8.8 11.7 12.8

9.3 H 9.5 14.7 12.3 5.8

14.8 12.3 9.5 5.8 4.3 3.5

11.0 II.I 14.2 18.4 17.4 17.5

2.5 3.7 6.2 6.7 7.3 9.4 11.6

0.1 0.9 2.2 3.7 5.8

K L

0.7 2.5 2.3

0.3 ~.6

.: (/Isoo
::s :e

DO

'EJOO

a c:: ~...

e...

:c no
'a;
:1:'00 01

0 0 IlOO

Major radius

(11m)

Radius of base (11m)


Figure 3 Size-volume graph of cone. Volume contours as in Figure 2.

Figure 2 Size-volume graph of sphere,. oblate and prolate sphaeroids. Volume contours are in decimal pans of a cubic millimetre, e.g. 002 0.002 mm'.

..... (I) ft) N (I> W (!I

Appendix 3.2.3.3 page 4


DIVERSITY INDICES
However by plotting there is no need to calculate the number of species

Diversitv is the relationship of the number of species to the number of individuals in an assemblage. If all assemblages comprised the same number of individuals, the numbers of species could be compared directly. However, normally it is necessary to compare assemblages of differing size. A variety of diversity indices have been proposed to enable this to be done. Sanders (I 968) ha~ given a comprehensive discussion of these indices. Here it is intended to describe only those diversity indices which have heen used to interpret foraminiferid data.

a base-graph has been constructed (Figure 4), the

the index for each sample, as, once value can be determined against the total number of individuals.

'"

The", index takes the rarer species into account, and Williams (1964) considers that ii is a consistent index where the distribution is assumed to be of the log-series form. Murray (1968b) made successively larger counts on three samples to check the constancy of The variation was shown not to

be great, but there was a tendency for", to increase with sample size (Figure 5). Nevertheless, as this diversity index is very easy to use and produces useful results, it has been adopted in this book.

"'.

Yule-Simpson

index Simpson (1949)

Following Yule's (1944) study of literary vocabulary, modified one of his equations for use as a diversity index:

N(N-I)
i-I

L 11,(11,-1)
6-."
0.,>

11.

where N is the total number of individuals, K is the number of species and n, is the number of individuals of the ith species. The disadvantage of this index is that it is controlled mainly by the abundant species. Gibson (1966) used this index to re-interpret data from Phleger (t954). Phleger made counts of individuals and calculated the total fauna for 3 Gibson has re-interpreted these figures in such each standard 10 cm3 sample. a way that the number of species is related to the total sample (which may be 4000 or more) rather than to the count of individuals. This obviously is 3populations from Norrh Japan. wrong. Ikeya (1971) used this index for total

'0

6-: "l

~:, Fisher This index '" index was first

described

by Fisher,

Corbett

and

Williams

(1943). 100 500 1000 Number of individuals

111 =- x where x is a constant having a value less than I (this can be read from Figure 125 of Williams, 1964) and n, can be calculated from N(I - x), N being the size of the population. 70 ~

Figu" 5 Variation of index according to sample size (after Murray, '968b).

;'
0,

Information function Buzas and Gibson (1969) used the information function to measure foraminiferal diversity. They pointed out that it '... measures the number of species and their proporrions without making any assumptions as to an underlying distribution'. The function is H(S)

65

';'
60 'b Ir" 55

p, logp, = i-=1 L

50

(,.. " ,j.. '"


."

45

where Pt is the proportion of the ith species, and S is the number of species. Maximum diversity, i.e. H(S), is reached when all species have equal frequencies. Buzas and Gibson plotted H(S) against depth for foraminiferal assemblages from the continental shelf and ocean off the east coast of the U.S.A. Diversity peaks were found at 35-45 m, 100-200 m and deeper than 250 m. They also plotted a measure of species equitability, which was the ratio eH(SIIS where e is the base of the natural logarithms. Species which are perfectly equally distributed have the ratio equal to I. . The use of information theory in diversity srudies has also been discussed by Beerbower and Jordan (1969).
Cumulative curves approach to diversity is to plot the logarithm of the number of

." ($-'

A graphical 30

~ 0.<
IJ) OJ

'u ~20
fI)

rJ.<"l

"5

, rJ.:
cJ,..:~

N
....... cD f'C") N

a 100

500 1000 Numb.r of individuals

5000

10000

OK)

20

)0

40

50

tOO

200

300

1000

CD '" I!>

number of species, the number of individuals in an assemblage and lines of equal diversity index.

Figur, 4 Graph to show the relationship between the

Cumulative

number

af individuals Bay samples

Figur, 6 Cumulative curves of Buzzards (after Murray, '968b).

Appendix 3.2.3.3 page 5


individuals against the number of species as a cumulative curve (Odum, Cantlon and Kornicker, 1960; Williams, 1964; Shaffer, 1965). Low-diversity samples plot low on the graph and have a gentle slope, whereas high diversity samples plot high on the graph and have a steep slope. Since lines of equal ex. value can be plotted on the same graph, the relationship between the two measures of diversity is clearly seen (Figure 6). The difference in interpretation needs to be stressed; for the cumulative curves the position of the curve and its angle of slope are important, whereas for ex. it is the upper end-point of the curve which defines the index. When using cumulative curves, it is unwise to use percentage data (as in Walton, 1964a) as the effects of sample size are eliminated and, unless the samples were all originally of the same number of individuals, errors of interpretation may result. Extensive use of the method was made by Murray (1968b). However, it is a time-consuming method of plotting diversity, and has therefore been abandoned in favour of the" index. species in an assemblage; the more species present, the lower is the percentage occurrence of each. Walton prepared a graph based on data from the Gulf of Mexico. In samples of less than 20 species, the dominant species formed at least 25 per cent. In samples of more than 20 species, the dominant species normally formed less than 35 per cent. Another way of looking at species dominance is to use the entropy concept. This was first described by Pelto (1954) and used to interpret foraminiferid data by Miller and Khan (1962) and Howarth and Murray (1969). Entropy (H) is derived from information theory:

H= In practice the relative entropy

'-1

f p,logp,
lOoH H..

(H,) is used:

H ,--

COMPARING SAMPLES: DIFFERENCES

SIMILARITIES

AND

Sanders (1960) described a method of measuring similarity between samples in order to construct a trellis diagram. The percentage occurrence of species in the two samples to be compared are listed side by side. For each species common to the two samples, the lowes! percentage occurrence is taken and the total value is the similarity index. On average, values higher than 80 per cent indicate that the samples are neaIly identical. Lower values indicate progressively greater differences. For example:
Species ~l 10 20 ~2 10 % in common 10 20

B
C D E F G H

15 15 5 30 2 3 100

28 7 16 25 14
100

where the maximum value of H is H... Miller and Khan give a list of values for - p log p and proportions (p; this is percentage divided by 100; 10 per cent = O.IOp) and also a table of H.. values for up to 10 components (1962, p. 428). Relative entropy is at a minimum when the composition is 100 per cent of one species, and at a maximum where the contribution of all species is all the same. A map of H, values should ideally have zones of low entropy (i.e. single-species dominance) separated by zones of relatively high entropy in which there are several dominance species. Examples of such images are given by Miller and Khan (1962, p. 431) and Howarth and Murray (1969, p. 672). It is important to realize that although low entropy indicates that the assemblage is close to 100 per cent of one species, not all low entropy areas are related to the same species.

7 15 25 3 80% similarity

COMPUTER

STUDIES

Murray (1969) has used similarity indices to compare adjacent samples along traverses. They can also be used to compare adjacent samples areally or to compare all samples from one area. For the latter it is advisable to make use of a computer to reduce the calculation time.

TRIANGULAR

PLOT

OF SUBORDERS

Apart from the general use of computers to do routine calculations on foraminiferid assemblage data, there have been two main fields of application: factor analysis and cluster analysis. Factor analysis was used by Howarth and Murray (1(1'69)in are-appraisal of the ecology of Christchurch Harbour, England. Cluster analysis has been more commonly used: Kaesler (1966), on Todos Santos Bay; Mello and Buzas (1968), on the central Texas coast; Howarth and Murray (1969), on Christchurch Harbour, England; and Ujiie and Kusukawa (1969), on Japanese bays. The methods of computation are complex, and for details of procedure the reader is referred to the above papers.

I t is convenient that all modern foraminiferids with hard tests fall into three suborders, the Textulariina, Miliolina and Rotaliina (Loeblich and Tappan, 1964). They therefore lend themselves to plotting on a triangular diagram (Figure 7).

LIVE-DEAD
Walton

RA 1'10
the ratio

(1955) introduced

SPECIES

DOMINANCE

number ofliving .f X 100 D = number of dead as a means of assessing the rate of sedimentation. Use of this ratio has become quite common. However, few authors have considered the errors involved. Where seasonal studies of standing crop size have been carried out, the annual range has often been ten times the lowest value, e.g. in 1965 the variation for Elphidium articulatum (d'Orbigny) in Bottsand Lagoon is from less than 10 in January to 125 in August (data from Lutze, 1968a). A conservative estimate would be a threefold difference. Suppose a dead population of 1000 individuals and standing crops of 100 and 300. The resulting LID ratios would be 10 per cent and 30 per cent respectively. Boltovskoy and Lena (1969b) calculated LID ratios for 24 monthly samples from the same locality in Puerto Deseado, Argentina. The range of variation was 5.6 to 50.0 per cent. The only reliable method of assessing the rate of sedimentation from foraminiferids is to compare the annual production with the number of dead individuals (Murray, 1967b).

the concept of faunal dominance which he m:fined as '. . . the percentage occurrence of the most common species in a foraminiferal population'. In general, very variable environments are dominated by few species which have high abundance (90-100 per cent in some marshes), whereas stable environments are characterized by many species, none of which is very abundant (10-15 per cent in shelf seas). To a certain extent, species dominance is controlled by the number of
MILIOLINA

Walton (1964a) introduced

INDEX

OF REGENERA T10N

Boltovskoy (1957) noted that irregularities in the tests of foraminiferids could have two possible origins, ecological or mechanical. In the latter case the animal repairs its test. In material from the Rio de la Plata, Elphidium had the best powers of regeneration, 0.08 per cent of the assemblage showed signs of regeneration and Boltovskoy proposed this measure as a regeneration index. Although he postulated that different values would be oblained from different environments, this index has not been used subsequently. SALINITY
Throughout this book the following terms have been used: hyposaline

Figure 7 Triangular diagram of the ratio of the three suborders.


~ "'CD If') N CJ> II)
c.!>

<32 per mille, normal marine = 32 - 37 per mille, hypersaline = >37 per mille. The subdivisions of hyposaline (brackish) waters, such as those listed by Hiltermann (1948), have not been followed.

G 69238/

ilL-

SUPER

ENVIRONMENT

TERRESTRIAL

COASTAL NON DELTAIC PLAIN


SUPRATIDAL INTER TIDAL
1M

M A
INNER
INNER LAGOON
MOUND

N E
OUTR PLATI'ORM

MAIN ENVIRONMENT

PLATFORM OUTER LAGOON SUB T I


BARRIER

SLOPE

BASIN

SUB-ENVIRONMENT
QUALIFIER
~._.~--u_-

OPEN MARINE

D
./

L
~~~~~~!~~-

---.
--p---

.1

--r--_.~-~~
-_._------

---~-~_.. Un

-'"
+p -------------

~
m
.. . .. ---.

'\.

WAVE BASE

-""

~
----

==-:'-=-i-~--P~O~~~~~==

~ --

--.

"-"-"---"'-'--~~

---un.

-------------...~-t

...--..
---"---U'

m__-------~!---~ .__m--- ---~ -

--

---

- ---------.---

~--

~
---~ "....... ~---- -- -----

-u--- - --. ---.~

~'

'---

---

---_._-~-p ~ -_. -~----

_m__--- -!-- -

_.-

__un.

~-----~----

-----

--

- -

--

~----------.. ---

MUDSTON E
-SIN
--

u.-

---

---.....-

--------. -

---

-----

mum.

~
~-

CCD_-

_.-.

DSTONfi}(~BOUNDSTONE)
-_. -.--

f-------------------_.-

---__moo.

--

..
---"

-...

---

--

.
-H -.. -

---

-------.-

:' I
I

WACKESTONE
-.-.

--

---

--

---

-------- --~~ -

GRAINSTONE
f-1--f--..--. --------.. .--

----

--

----

..---------------

--. ---

. _.-

-- - ----

-. --

- - ......
---

--

-.

_0 ' .-.

---

---

--.....-

.--..-.

PACKSTONE
,1 - ..

--------

.~_.._._-_..

-.
----. .-

~------------

---

. -----~ ~~

---

- --- ---

_0"__-._mo. ---

FLOATSTONE
--

2)(=WACKSlONE)
----- -----.-----.---.-

------

i I
~-

--SAFFLisTON-E3)(:SOU-NDST:)
~ ---

- --. - 1

-- -;;;.. -"
-n

- ..;.; ~
------

-..;;;
-

~ ---

c.

f-

.---.-

--

F-R A

MESTONE

4) (=BOUN-CST.)----

_..

---------_.

RUDSTONE5)(aGRAINSTONE) -..
1) Organisms 2) Wackestone 3) Organisms 4) Organisms 5) Grainstone act as sediment with more than binders (e.g. 10% particles

---

--

"

--

1 --

---

.
-

--

"

1 ---"-

'

-- ---"

- --

---1---

algal mats) coarser than

sand

(>2mm)

act as sediment baffers (e.g. dendroid corals) act as frame builders (e.g. intergrown reef corals) with more than 10% particles coarser than sand (>2mm)

DISTRIBUTION OF DEPOSITIONAL TEXTURES IN CARBONATE ENVIRONMENTS


(after

RACZ, HOOGKAMER and HOFFMANN, 1983)

~ (b ~ a. x' f.JJ I\) 0J :t>

669238,

SUPER ENVIRONMENT MAIN ENVIRONMENT

TIM.lTaIAL

COASTAL NON DELTAIC INNER

SUB. ENVIRONMENT QUALIFIER


;----

_.
n ~----~-

PLAIN

T.o.\L

...".. nDAL

I-

INNER LAGOON MOUND

PLATFORM

OUTER LAGOON
5 U B T I D

IBAMIER A L

OUTU ~LA-

SLOPE

BASIN

OPEN MARINE
MEAN SEA LEVEL

~-

~1
'-

-- -- ----- ;'-----~~-~~~~---~~~~~~--~-~-~~;;;;;;;~~iii~~~~

CHAROPHYTES ~BLUE-GREENALGAE GASTROPODS r--OSTRACODS STROMATOLITES

HIGHSPIRAL

--

---

FAVREINA
BENTHIC ECHINOIDS CALC. WORMTUBES FORAMS

-- ---

THIN TESTS

'-

ARENACEOUS ONLY

I'
I

ceo

CODIACEAN ALGAE

~CALC. IMPERF.FORAMS CALC- PERF. FORAMS RUDISTS


CALCISPAERES
~-----

-- ----------

--- ---

--------------

- ----- -_n ---

I j

J
l

J
r-u

--

DASYCLADACEAN --------MONOGENERIC ____n__--

ALGAE
--

SHELL

BANKS

--~'-~--

~~~()~_NS
BRACHIOPODS
--------

---.-

- -- -.-..------

CRINOIDS -_u2lJBULAR ALGAE


--CORALS

--

--------------___--_--n

___n--.----..-,-.---

-----

-------

--

CELLULAR ALGAE
_...----

-----.

--

----

-------------_._------------

-----...-----.

-. - --- 1-------

-- --

-----...
-_uu-

---

---

- ---------

--

t
----------+-----J----

---

---.---~'--'_...

---------'--.-

-----_u-----.~._.._--

-'
-----------

-----L--.L--I

..-.-----

HYDROZOANS ------STROMATOPORES -'----------AEllOSACCUS


CALC. SPONGES

-- -.n-

-- -.-.-.,---

-- .-.-------

-----------'------

---T ----1-----+----

-- -- -

r---~------_._-_._-------"----~_.'

-- ---'._-

----- --------_._-~

PLANKTONIC FORAMS
---------RADIOlARIANS PTEROPODS

--~ ..__n

f--------- --,----.

"-

---------

---

--.------..

-------.
--u--

--- --------------

------

-------AMMONITES

. - ------

-----_u_----~IS. SPQI'!GESu

.l!!!!_INNI DS-FILAMENTS -=-,-==--____n____-

----

-----------

----- ~------- -----~__--_n -~--

--

- ------ ---------

----~----

T
- --

1-

---

----------

--"-----------"-

.__._-~
-

---

---.- ---

--

--

.--------.,--. -

---------

f-----

--

~RT. DISSOLY.CALC. FOSS.

--. '---'--.'-

-.--...

,----

---

--_._-~_.-

------

---- I I

"0

DISTRIBUTION OF SKELETAL PARTICLES IN CARBONATE ENVIRONMENTS


(after RACZ, HOOGKAMER and HOFFMANN. 1983)

"0 n> a. =' :>< (JJ

(JJ (]I

G6923B/1t

SUPER ENVIRONMENT MAIN ENVIRONMENT SUB. ENVIRONMENT QUALIFIER


.~--~.~ ---.

TERRESTRIAL

COASTAL NON DELTAIC

M A
INN;R PLATFORM

R I N E
PL~~;M BARRIER SLOPE BASIN OPEN MARINE
LEVEL

PLAIN

OUTER LAGOON
SUBTIDAL
--------------...

PISOIDS
'-'-.. -----_'n ..-

------------------------------------------------------~~~-~~-------------------------------------

MEAN

SEA

BASE PHOTIC ZONE

----------------

OOIDS
-~---_.._-_._----

----

- '--'-'-'-'-'
__'_n______.-~ --..--~ -

--

~-- - ..--.--------..-m" ~-----------

ONCOIDS
AGGREGATE
---

--

m..."_.'-"---""-'-~

GRAINS
-.-

-.

--

-.----~

- -'-'-'--"---'-' '---

---

----, ~ .-

---~.~-~~~.-

_u
-----

PELLETOIDS
~_.--

--

_._~ -

-~

-",,u..

------.-.--.-----

_.~.__.

FAECAL
CORTOIDS

PELLETS
-.--------.--.-.~._--._-

--

. ----------.----....---

-----

DISTRIBUTION OF NON SKELETAL


(ofter

PARTICLES IN CARBONATE

ENVIRONMENTS

RACZ, HOOGKAMERand HOFFMANN, 1983)

"0 "0 CI) ~

a. x. UJ

~ UJ m

G69238/i

SUPER

ENVIRONMENT

TERRESTRIAL

COASTAL NON DELTAIC


PLAIN
SUPRATIDAL

M INNER
~INNER LAGOON
MOUND

E
PlATPOR..
OUTER

MAIN ENVIRONMENT
SUB - ENVIRONMENT QUALIFIER
---~-~----------'------

PLATFORM
OUTER LAGOON BARRIER

SLOPE OPEN MARINE

BASIN

INTER
TIDAL

~1
----

--------------~-

-----------

---~---

CALICHE MICROKARST MUDCRACKS -------.DESSICATION FLAKES


--

-- ~---

ROOT MARKS
r-~---------------

~-------------~

TEPEE
r--~--

STRUCTURES
--

-- - -------. ---- -- -----~

- -- '-

------------~---------------------------------------------~~~~~~!~~--' ./ ~'\. ----------------------WAVE BASE ~-------------' \:"--------BASEPHOTIC ZONE____.n.


-------~ -

--

--'--

---..-----

------.---------,_. _n - -----

....--

---_._--~------------ -- ---------------u- -- -

---~

------~~-

-----------

------

-- ----------.-.,-

-----

------~ ----

...._-----

----. "
-~

'\.

--

--

-- -

n_-

--------

--

---

------"------.-.-

--

---------

--

.--------

_._---------~- ---

" '\.
'"
n______-f----........ CCD

----~-~-------

COLLAPSE UNDULATING
f---------------------

BRECCIAS
ALGALMATS
---

f-------- ---------- ---- -- - ---

-_..._---,-.---..---..---.
--.------

.-

K"
...........

ZEBRA
--

-- ".-

- FABRICS
- ---.-.. ---

-~-------

---------------~

-----------------------.. _o._-_.~-_o --------'-'---'.'...-------...'-'--'


.0_'

---~_.--

FENESTRAL
------------------~~--

FABRICS
-

BIRDSEYES
-------------------

--- -----"--.

----

.-

HARD GROUNDS(WITHBORINGS)
---

-----~

---..-~~--

.-

---.

------- ----.--.-

---~_._----------_._. n

-- ---_0_-

---~~-----___.0_.___--.----'

BIOTURBATION __0_._________0___---STROMATACTIS ~.~-~-_..o_-~--~---.

---~------------

-- - - ------ -.;. --- _0'.0'--__--

---

STRUCTURES SLUMP -_. _'0..__"_' TURBIDITES

- - ------ --- --

---------~_.._-0--. --"
~-

---.-

-- - --

- - ----- ---- ---~---- -----------

---

~~----_.- ----

--~-o_~

--------------~ -

--__~--m --'---____._0____ -~

--------

--

------ -----------.----..--

i
]> -0 -0 (1) ::J a. x. VI f'\) (.oJ :..."

DISTRIBUTION

OF SEDIMENTARY

STRUCTURES

IN CARBONATE

ENVIRONMENTS

(after RACZ, HOOGKAMER and HOFFMANN, 1983)

G69238/.

SUPER

ENVIRONMENT

TEltREST1tIAL

COASTAL
NON DELTAIC
PLAIN
SUPRA-

M A R
~INNERLAGOON

E
OUTER
PLATFORM

MAIN ENVIRONMENT SUB-ENVIRONMENT


QUALIFIER

TIDAL

INTER TIDAL

INNE R PLATFORM MOUND OUTER LAGOON S U B T

SLOPE

BASIN

BARRIER
I

OPEN MARINE

D
./"

L
------------.!V~Y!'_~~~- -- - - BASE PHOTiCZONE--

--~-----_. ----------'--~---_.._~_._-------------------

1.
--~~ -~_.. ---

------------~---------------------------------------------~~~~~~~~~- ........ --...............


..- -.--... -.----~---------~---------

.-------------.
-----------

------._--_.--

-------

------

---

--

.--.---- _____.n______---------. ------..--'._.._n__---

~K.-- --------.
---------------f.. -----.

--.-

----~---

--~----_.
---_u_____n-

-. ----------~'---,' --.--.--.. ------..-..--....----

-- -------------.-----------,-"-'-----------"---",---

-------------....----" ------------_..___n"__"-

~-----"-'-

- --- -- '-

....-----___._d_-.--~---~~

--.---"'_.n1------------

--------- --.-.--.-

CROSS BEDDING -IRREGULAR MM LAM.

------------~---

----~--~.-

f-

-----------.---.-.,..-

---,.-..---..

MASSIVE BEDDING

WAVYBEDDING
FLASER

----.
-----..- --- - - --------.---- - - ----..-..-.-.--... --~--. -.. _n

---.-- --- .--...


_u-

LAMINATION (GEN.)

------._u .--

....-.-

-.------.-.--.-------I----.------

.-.. -1-.

--.~

---------.-----_u_--+-.-----

--

---

EVEN MM BEDDING
BEDDING

~-- - --

--.-

---

----

1-------1-----In n

1-.--.---.-~-.-.1----------

----

---- --.--

~CCD

._m ---~
.--.-. .L__-

---.---.-.-

--

-.--.----.--

~----------.-..-_..-

u-

1----

GRADED BEDDING ~--_.LENTICULAR BEDDING


MED. THICK
BEDDING -----_.'-~'----'

----

---------.---------

------------(>1 m)

-. -.--_..---~
_un

--- . -----__-un
u_-

__m ------------

.-. -------.-

..
..-- --

------ -

-----.
--

I-

-----.--

..-.-

--------------

~-

-- ------~~

--+-------- ----

...--_._.__n f--__n_----

-...--..-----.-------.
-

-.--- 1-------

- ----- -

~-+---.---.--- .----+-

REGULAR -.. EVEN BEDDING --..-.-.---------...-..-----------COARSE WAVY --.-. BEDDING ---~-------------.---------COARSE IRREGULAR LAM. ------------------CONVOLUTE BEDDING
LS-MR

-- 1---~--

- -----

-----------.-- ------------------._-. --------. u------ .-. _u-

.-----..-n

I ~_.._-::..~--J---

-..----.-

-----------

---..-

-----.-----.-.---

--.
-.. -.

_..-'--'-'----'--'-'-----.
---.----.------..-.-.-..-.------...-----.....---..--

-.

.~._---"'-- ------

----

---

-------_.------- ---~ -.
~-

-- ~.:::-l-I
~~-----------

SEQUENCE
--------------

~~_._----------

SMALL SCALE COLOURED/


MULTI COLOURED BEDDING -I------~-

--1--------

----

----

------------- ---

----.-.--..--.------------ ------

1>
ti

. --~-_._-

1--

.----_.. -----

--

-- -

)(

Q.

::J

DISTRIBUTION

OF BEDDING

IN CARBONATE

ENVIRONMENTS

(after RACZ, HOOGKAMER and HOFFMANN,1983)

01 N ~ CD

669238/1

SUPER ENVIRONMENT MAIN ENVIRONMENT SUB. ENVIRONMENT QUALIFIER

TERRESTRIAL

COASTAL NON DELTAIC PLAIN


INTER TIDAL

M A
INNER INNER LAGOON
MOUND

R I N E
PLc:?~~M
BARRIER

PLATFORM OUTER LAGOON


SUBTIDAL

SLOPE

BASIN

OPEN MARINE

-----------SALT
-~~

~~~~~~!~~~~~-~~~_.,, --...--.-----.
~_._~----_._-----

. ._-~~-

-------------------------

BASE

PHOTIC ZONE

'--NOD;-

----.------------

ANHYDRITE
--'u-_'___0'_'_'----

~--

-_.--

- -- --'----

GYPSUM
~-----------

"--"-'

'---'-'

DOLOMITE SILICA

--

- --..-----..--"" '

-----~ ~n_---~----

,--,-"--"',----

'--

' -.----.....-.

--

...

- ----_u ---

-----------

---'--.---

----

J_---.l~-----. ---1--

GLAUCONITE "CLAY"
"

--

---

---

-..

--------------

---------'--

--

---

___'0-

--_._-----.----

------ .---

---------

-.

'--'-,

..--

--"0 "U (I) :J a. x UJ

DISTRIBUTION OF MINERALS IN CARBONATE ENVIRONMENTS


(after RACZ, HOOGKAMER and HOFFMANN,'983)

N t>J i.D

669238/1.

SUPER ENVIRONMENT MAIN ENVIRONMENT SUB. ENVIRONMENT QUALIFIER

TERRESTftIAL

COASTAL NON DELTAIC PLAIN


INTE:ft TIDAL

M A
INNER PLATFORM

R I N E
PL~~~:M BARRIER

SLOPE

BASIN

OUTER LAGOON SUBTIDAL

OPEN MARINE
MEAN SEA LEVEL

------------------------------------------------------DESSICATION CRUSTS
,~~~ ~~._-~

-------------------------~ ~ ---

~~~-~~~BASE PHOTIC ZONE

--~_._----

-----.---------------.-.---.. ~ ~---~. ,~ ----.------.-.---

-_.~

ASYMMETRIC
INTERSTITIAL

CEMENT

~-

-~

. --~

- -~

---.-------.

_..

--~~--

EVAPORITES
~ ~

----

---

.'

'n

n_'__'.-'-

--

. ~ ~ ~

---.

DOL FENESTRAL FABRIC


, .-.-

-----._-'..
n

'-'-'-"'-

--

--

--

-~ --

---

u-

_..,,~

FIBROUS CEMENT
-

--

~-

-- --

---

---

-.--.---

~L_.

--...------.-...-----. ---------

ARAGONITE . CEMENT
-..--.-..--------------

rr--_.--~-

MICRITIZATION

'

"--'

"'

"'-'--

-'

--------(after
RACZ,HOOGKAMER and HOFFMANN, 1983)

-1um.. .__n u. ---~--

. t---~

DISTRIBUTION OF EARLY

DIAGENESIS IN CARBONATE ENVIRONMENTS

"0 "0 (1) ::::J

c.. x' 0J N

G 69 238/

SUPER ENVIRONMENT MAIN ENVIRONMENT


SUB. ENVIRONMENT QUAL I FI ER

TERRESTRIAL

COASTAL NON DELTAIC


PLAIN
INTER
TIDAL

M INNER PLATFORM
OUTER

E
OUTER
PLATfORM

SLOPE
OPEN MARINE

BASIN

LAGOON

BARRIER

L ~~~~~~~~~ ~~~-~~~-------------------------

IRREGULAR THIN CALCITE VEINS


' '.'__-0'.'__-"--_._-------

BASE PHOTIC ZONE

ZONES WITH RED AND


ORANGE
-

~--_._--

-. ..-

~---_._----_.._-"-~
.----.--------.-.

---_._-----.--.---..----

~-------

COLOURING
'--'.---------------------

u__,___n

CM-SIZED FISSURES FILLED WITH NON-CARB. VADOSE PISOLITES


._-~_.".-

--.

- -- --

-'

.. .- --.'. . .-.-.-

---

.-

--'-'--" ~~--"-' -~

-.
~..-

.--

,.U

.--.---

---~u

--_J_----

~~---~--~---

---

RECRYST.

PARTICLES ,
-. -

--T----

~-,

--.

----

- ---~--ru

~u-r-

LEACHING / DISSOLUTION
u ---------------------.--...----...--- --, -'--'--

+--.------.---. -.

.. .

INTERNAL SEDIMENT
---

..

-..

--.----.---....-. _n

~--_..--_.-

-..

. -.

--

--"

- -~---

------

EVEN CEMENT
-

--------".,---_.---

u_"

+
I
1>
~....

_.~

..

RECRYST. MICRITE
,

-.

-_.~_. , -

'''---''--

._u_-'",

,_.-

---~

-----

-~--T
--''''
,,-----

n_n

GRANULAR CEMENT

---'''---

-.----

DISTRIBUTION OF LATE DIAGENESIS IN CARBONATE ENVIRONMENTS


(after RAez, HOOGKAMER
and HOFFMANN,1983)

CD :J a. xVI N ~ ---.

G6923e/12<

SUPER <D
ENVIRONMENT

T E R R E S T R I A L

C.PLATF.I
@
MAIN ENVIRONMENT ALLUVIAL GLACIAL DESERT
DELTA

COMPLEX

NON- DELTAIC

CONT. SHELF CONT.

SLOPE

CONT. RISE ABYSS. Alluvial Fan Fluvial Fan Wodi System Eolian Sabkha Estuary Coastol Barrier Shore (- lone) Lagoon Plain Lagoon Build-up Shoal Barrier Submarine Canyon Fan

PLAIN JT1 Z

Fluvial System i.g. Lacustrine

Submarine

G)

SUBENVIRONMENT

Braided System Meandering Syst. Alluvial Plain Lakes

Eolian

I
I

z 03:

::u 0

<

Sabkha
Crevasse, Delta, Dune, Embayment

Prodelta
Mound, Natural Levee, Plain, Reef, Ridge,

:::JT1 !!:z :x:~ ::0):>


I"1r

SPECIFIC ENVIRONMENT

Bar, Basin, Channel, Spit,

Bay, Flat,

Island,

Marsh

Swamp,

. etc.

I"1r ~J>

~O

River / Tide / Wove QUALIFIERS

- dominated,

Fluvio

Lacustrine,

Fluvio

Marine,

Shallow,

Deep,

Below

Thermocline,

Below

CCD,

Tidal,

Supratidal,

FOR@,@AND@

Subtidal, Arid, Humid, Back, Centre, Core, Distal, Face, Flank, Flood (ed), Faot, Fore, Fringe, Front, Inner, Lateral, Lower, Margin, Middle, Outer, Proximal, Slope, Talus, Upper, etc.
Littoral, Littoral

~-""'1 ..
~O 2Z en 0 :I:

-en 10en ~O

~~
JT1

WATERDEPTH

Inner Neritic,

Shallow

Marine,

Inner Neritic,

Inner

- Middle

Neritic,

Middle

Neritic,

Deep Marine,

Middle

- Outer

Neritic,

Outer

Neritic, Oxic,

Outer Nerit.- Bathyal, Anoxic,

Oceanic in gen.,

Bathyal in gen., Upper Bathyal,

Lower Bathyal,

Bathyal- Abyssal,

Abyssal,

Hadal.

01

- CONTENT
SALINITY

Euxinic,

Some

Oxygen

Deficiency

(- "Restricted")
to Normal Marine, Normal Marine, Normal Marine to Hyperhaline, Hyperhaline, Hyper - to

3: JT1

Fresh Water, Superhaline, High,

Fresh to Brackish I Brackish, Superhaline.

Brackish

<V

@ @

ENERGY

High to Moderate,

Moderate,

Moderate

to Low,

Low.

TEMPERATURE

Warm (tropical),

Warm ta Moderate (subtropicalJ,

Moderate (temperate),

Moderate to Cold (subarctic,

subantarctic),

Cold (arctic,

antarctic).

J> 'U 'U en :J 0x' ~ (>J '" '"

Appendix 3.2.4.2.1

WIRE-LINE lOG VAlUES/REPONSES OF SINGLE-MINERAL LITHOLOGIES AND COMMON ROCK TYPES


WIRELINE-LOG VALUES OF SINGLE-MINERAL (after RUTTEN, 1981)

LITHOLOGIES.

GAMMA
0 API loe 50 140

SONIC
115 .u5/FT 4l' 90 55

FDC/CNL
4~ LS PU -1!5 GleC t'9~ 2'9~ JO 1& 0 2.20 2.~ 270

IN

10

GYPSUM ANHYDRITE

I 220 600 0:1.a7 No&!

HALITE CARNALLITE SYLVITE 0.1.

T
&
I

~T
~0
II

10% LIMESTONE 20%


3.04f.

I
I I

0 "I.
DOLOMITE

10% ~20%

I
I

-3.0 .1.
I

I I
I

-~10%

0.1.

N~70

SANDSTONE

20%

WaterbearinQ

- +A)

. ..- -.
I

3.0".
SHALES

0:1'3.?-1'~?

COAL

LOG RI~SPONS~] m'


(porosity

COMMONROCK TYPES
0

~O %)

GAMMA RAY

HESISTIV'ITY

SONIC
(microseo/rt)

FDC (gr/oo)

NEUTRON
(limestone por. scale)

(API

units)

depending on
pore content

8MID
SUAL},; -~---~_.LIM"~JTONF;

10

~O 140
10

It)

51
65

- 96
50.0

2.07 1.01
2.06

2.65

~n< ~a
25 - 50

00

low
It)

150 90
07.5

- 2.75
2.98

5
10

4~.5

2.71
2.87

"n

= !5a
!5a

lJOI,OMI'1'E

20

It)

~0.5

2.19

!5n>

,..,
.... IV

ANI1YI)]!J'l'I'
~---_.._~---

high

0
0

(\J

SAL'l'

high
.'

66.7

2.0~

'" CT>
CP CJ

COAL

high

110

140

1. ~- 1.5

,,>
Jd>

40

(SNP)

70 (CNL)

Appendix

3.2.4.2.2

LITHOLOGY FROM OVERLAYS OF POROSITY LOGS

FDC-SONIC OVERLAY

c.~

------,.-....-."".."
-~-------------on:.~.,. ...=,'C
~

.,..

""F

IAJ .. ~=r"' (,)


z

--r-

,.,.
'-"" """" ,.,.

PURE TO SILTY SHALE 011 PURE SHALE TO MARL VERY SILTY SHALE 011 SLIGHTLY 011 SLIGHTLY TO VERY ARGILLACEOUS LIMESTONE OR FINE SAND SILT OR SAND

<!i :-:7..-

~
IL

::::-':'
...,.

MARL TO VERY ARGILLACEOUS ARGILLACEOUS ARGILLACEOUS

SILT-SAND LIMESTONE

FDC

~-,. ~
~'"\
-

F ~-, --...

""

~ <I: -r:-:.'.
IAJ II: (,) IAJ 0

CLEAN SAND OR COARSE SAND 011 (CLEAN LIMESTONE)

SONIC

FDC, 2.5 glee LINE

SONIC;80m./f'
OVERLAY

LINE

80m./fl

THE DENSITY LINE OF 2.5 glee OVER THE LINE ON THE SONIC LOG OR VICE VERSA

FDC-SNP/CNL
---

OVERLAY
-FDC ",,"CNL

FDC
I I I I I I / / / / / 1\~ I / / / /
\

OF THE TWO LOGS; POROUS LIMESTONE (=2.45 o/ee) OVER THE 15% LINE ON THE CNL. .~.,.. CNL

ALIGN THE LIMESTONEPOROSITY SCALES <::'" E.G.OVERLAY THE DENSITY LINE OF 15%

I LIMESTONE I
NO SEPARATION

DOLOMITE
:':.

..........
SALT

CNL

LEFT

OF FDC

CNL FAR RIGHT OF FDC (FDC AT LEFT OF SCALE)

1\ 1\ ===r 1\ 1\ 1\ 1\ =r=
::...;:~

4::: ...i

ANHYDRITE

....
~!.~i~':.'
-.:... .(...... ~?

"'0

CNL LEFT OF FDC (FDC AT EXTREME RIGHT OF SCALE)

-r
=r= ..

SHALE

CNL FAR LEFT OF FDC


CNL RIGHT OF FDC

. . .. . . . . . ... .. . .. . . . .. . . . ..
..... CD ,.., C\J

.. .. .. -r

::.::;:-

.SAND

FDC
00.0 0

/CNL
-CNLj'S%LlNE

FDC;2.4Sg/ce

LlNE-

"iT

NOTE: The presence of gas (see master log) effects the above FDC-SNP/CNLseparation. Dolomitemay be interpreted as limestone and limestone may be interpreted as sand. Also the presence of minerals other than quartz, calcite or dolomite (e.g. mica, glauconite, pyrite, feldspar) can alter the separation. For example micaceous sandstone may give a shale /dolomite separation.

C)

co '"

669238/125

IICYLINDERII SHALE

II

FUNNEL

II

II BELLII

SHALE

SAND SAND

SHALE

DUNE:
-NO MARINE FOSSILS

BARRIER, BAR, (BEACH):


-

MEANDERING
-

RIVER CHANNEL:
FOSSILS SORTING
MATERIAL

SHALLOW

MARINE

FOSSILS MAY BE

NO MARINE

- CLAY ABSENT

SHELL FRAGMENTS
ABUNDANT

POOR - MODERATE

arrow plot) - HIGH DIPS (check


- FROSTED GRAINS
-

- MICA. CARBONACEOUS

VERY GOOD SORTING GLAUCONITE

TRANSGRESSIVE
-

MARINE

SAND:

CHANNEL

(distributary or tidal): MARINE

SHALLOW

MARINE FOSSILS

- BRACKISH-SHALLOW FOSSILS
-

- HIGH
sholes)
-

CONTENT OF CALCAREOUS

(common in enclosing

MATERIAL USUALLY THIN, 5-10 m.

CARBONACEOUS MATERIAL RIDGE:


MARINE FOSSILS

- GLAUCONITE

TIDAL SAND

SHALLOW

TURBIDITE:
-

GLAUCONITE

(DEEPER) MARINE
(common

FOSSILS

in enclosing shales)
BEDDING

TURBIDITE:
-

- GRADED

(DEEPER) MARINE
(common

FOSSILS
shales)

in enclosing

CHARACTERISTIC

GAMMA

RAY (SP) LOG SHAPES

IN CLASTICS

u u co :J 0X !->' N ~ ~

AND THEIR POTENTIAL ENVIRONMENTAL

SIGNIFICANCE

Appendix 3.2.4.3.2

COMMON RESERVOIR

SAND TYPES AND THEIR CHARACTERISTIC GR (SP) LOG PROFILES AS WELL AS OTHER SIGNIFICANT FEATURES
(ofter TAYLOR, 1977)

TYPE OF SAN D

GRAIN SIZE OR LOG PROFILE


m

TYPICAL GRAIN SIZE PROBABILITY CURVE

SIGNIFICANT ACCESSORY MINERALS

DIPMETER EXPRESSION ETC

PLAN GEOMETRY AND ORIENTATION

PRIMARY POROSITY AND PERMEABILITY ISOTROPY ETC

Approximate average

r25
I

Coarser FIner ~

Gamma Roy

~~~tlf~al
AEOLIAN DUNE

lo

PhI Scole 012345

JOo 20 30 .

0::98 UJ upto300m

~ ~ 0'2

, suSPENSION 'Millet

seed'

-SALTATiON fro,'ed

gro'n,.

~
~
except
zone
,

SHEET
,

S of

Very forese'

good

In dune

Downwind source

beds

Permeability restricted by fines In bottomse1s Permeability porallel lamInatIOn with highest

-:I

~-

-~

ALLUVIAL FAN

up 1O3000m

?
NBupper

---'Depos,T'O~-QI-Diverse unS10b Ie
groins, Errotlc,polymodaJ, mIcas

dips of 2
,

- 3

-------FANS thinning away from


mountolnS

----Extremely variable,

mounlal~s,
up to 30

arrow neor "

excellent to very poor


dependmg on source moter 10I , climate I wind dlreclion,etc

Coalescing to
PRISMS porallel with mountain front
~-_.~----_.-

and as braided

Indlvldual5sf
units os brOlded

._-

FLUVIATILE BRAIDED

groms, mIcas, corbonoceou<; Shale mlraclests 01 base.


Mica ,corbonoceou51 especlOlIy in topstrotum Shale intraclosts at base

DIverse

u~st~bl;~

".....

.....

~ :: ~'.:
A. r-,

RIBBONS, DENDROIDS,

8 ELTS, poraIlel slope wIth palaeo


SHEETS

Vonable, exce!lent to poor I Inhomogeneous, lensing

MEANDERING -_.~-_._.DELTAIC DISTRIBUTARY CHANNEL

ry'1r-;:>Y'

RIB80NS,DENOROIOS, BELTS porallel with palaeo.slope.

good Chonnel depo' but lensing and 't' may be separated by tight
,

SHEETS,

topstrclum or cemented

rtaches as fluvlotlle

L
Z

-'.. -. - -~......

Carbonaceous, micas

'-oy~-'.c_-------.RJ8BONS,OENOROIDS,Good onax.s but


parallel wllh palaea~slope IOterdlgllates finer deposits lateral margins with on

~
PODS, perpendicular Carbonaceous, micas

DI<;TRIBUTARY MOUTH ".TIDAL FLAT BAR

.:j ),,?
Low dlpsappraach
I ~~~~~~~~'r~x:::t slumpslOcreeks
~

to palaeo. slope, but prograde to form RIBBONS parallel Wit h palaeo - slope

Good, but deterIOrates


on ma rglns Top may be carbonate -cemented

Shell , cor bonaceous micas I Cjlouconlle BAR SAND

--SHEETS BELTS, perpendicular


to paJaeo~slope
_.~~~-

--~
~nu~l~jKdcUe~~:~:~rs

good

--

compartmenta Iised and lamlnoted Very good when uncemented by carbonate


~

BARRIE

Shell, g loucomte Micas and carbonaceous IncreOSIn downwards Shell,glouconlte. phosphallc groins

REGRESSIVE TRANSGRESSIVE SAND ----TIDAL RIDGE -.---. DEEP-SEA SAN D

..,.

..,.->--

~~

RIB80NS,

--~-

--.---

perpendicular to palaeo-slope SHEETS SHEETS, RIBBONS, perpendicular to palaeo. slope at maximum tran~~.~s._~--RIBBONS, otten perpendicular to polaeo~ slope RIBBONS, parallel palaeo. DENDROIDS, with slope

.~~

Very good 10 very poor qualIty tends to be .nversely proportional to thickness


~-

Shell, Qlouconlfe

SANDS CHANNEL (groin flow)

Tops bioturbated
Worn shallow water sheils

Glauconlle
carbonaceous,

Depositional dip on shales May be erratiC due to slumps

-- ----EKcelient when uncemented by carbonate

---E ,cellenl

mIca

....
FAN

SHEETS Regional

Fa Ir to poor
deterlarotmg away

_"~'~ "'~~

GlauconIte carbonaceous, mica Deep-water launa

"
....

d,p on
shale Interbeds

from source.

----Common reservoir sand types, with,characteristic log profiles, grain size distributions, significant accessories, dipmeter expression, plan geometry and orientation relative to palaeo-slope, and reservoir characteristics. Compiled from Conybeare, Glaister and Nelson, Pirson, Selley, Shelton, Visher, van Veen and others.

IX) ,., " N m co (!)

Appendix

3.2.4.3.3

FAU N A
I

-0-

FAUNA
I HON HON - BATH

Br

I
I

-100NF Br

I
-200-

HON

'

I
I

HIN NF NF
Br NF NF Br

-300-

I
I

HON
NF NF

-400-

I
I

HON HON NF HON

-500NF NF Br

I
I

-600-

HON

NF -700-

CHANNEL FILLS IN COASTAL SWAMP CLAYS


SANDLINE

TURSI DITES IN DEEPER MARINE

--

CLAYLINE

LEGEND: SEE APP.3.2.4.3.4

DEPOSITIONAL ENVIRONMENT OF SAND(STONES) WITH "CYLINDER" SHAPED GR(SP) PATTERNS DETERMINED BY THE FAUNA
,,-.1 It) " ~ N (1) CD (!)

FROM THE ENCLOSING CLAYS

G69238/1<

BR NF NF I

FlM HIN BR

I BR NF BR

HON NF HIN HON-BATH

HIN

I BR I NF I NF NF I FLM

HIN

HON-BATH HIN

I
FLM

HIN BATH

I BR I

BR

I
HIN I FLM HIN HON-BATH

I
COASTAL

I THIN

PLAIN

LOW STREAK DENSITY NON DELTAIC

COASTAL PLAIN HIGH STREAK DENSITY DELTAIC

SAND ACCRETIONS COASTAL DELTAIC

LARGE SAND ACCRETIONS (STACKED BEACHES) COASTAL NON DELTAIC

NERITIC (MAINLY SILT)

NERITIC-BATHYAL (SOME TURBIDITES)

SANDLINE

NF BR FLM HIN BATH

= = = =

--

CLAYLINE

HON =

NO FAUNA BRACKISH FAUNA FLUVIO MARINE FAUNA HOLO MARINE INNER NERITIC FAUNA HOLO MARINE OUTER NERITIC FAUNA BATHYAL FAUNA

:t>
"0 "0 (1) ;:)

a. x' 0J

N ~
EXAMPLES

OF GR(SP) LOG PATTERNS

OF BALANCED ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

iJJ ~

Appendix 3.2.4.3.5

FAUNA

-0I

FAUNA
HIN-HMN ((FlM))

Br

-100-

HIN-HMN ((FLM))

Br
I

-200-

NF -300I

HIN (FLM)

NF
I

-400FLM HIN (FLM)

NF

HIN (FLM) HIN-FLM HIN-FLM HIN-FLM

-500-

I I

HIN (FLM)

-600HIN (FLM)

Br Br

-700-

REGRESSIVE
(fluvio) marine grading into coastal plain
SAND LINE

TRANSGRESSIVE
coastal plain grading into holomarine

--

CLAYLINE

LEGEND:

SEE APP.3.2.4.3.4

GR (SP) LOG PATTERNS INDICATIVE OF REGRESSION/TRANSGRESSION


........ 10 1<) N en CD C)

C\I

SUPPORTED BY FAUNAL EVIDENCE

Appendix 3.2.4.4

QUICK REFERENCE

DICTIONARY OF DIPMETER PATTERNS


(ofter SCHLUMBERGER)

In this chapter we shall start from a given ideal dipmeter pattern and try to find structures exhibiting this pattern. In general, there exist several possible interpretations for any given dipmeter pattern. In the worst cases it may be dangerous, or at least misleading, to attempt any interpretation without other geological data. We recommend caution when there is not sufficient support by facts. The log correlation and other kind of information available to the geologist are generally nonaken into .account here. They will, however, be useful to select the right interpretation from the choice of suggested patterns. Note that in spite of established classification and for convenience we shall include: nonconformities in tectonics and disconformities in stratigraphy.
GENERAL APPROACH TO INTERPRETATION OF PATTERNS

Let us first have a look at the overall picture of the analyzed set of results and consider features in their order of importance, i.e. . . .- Change of trend - Break or continuity - Increasing-decreasing dips, incoherent dips, etc. . . . A change of trend will suggest tectonic: fold fault - non conformity differential compaction. No change of trend, i.e. a feature within a trend will suggest a stratigraphic anomaly: disconformity - channel - sand bar - foreset beds - cross bedding. ...

A change of trend associated with a break will suggest a fault or a nonconformity. Associated with continuity it will rather correspond to a fold or differential compaction. An increasing dip pattern within a trend will suggest a channel if it occurs in a sand or a sand-shale body and a sand bar if it occurs above the sand body (drape). . . . In many cases the geologist needs only confirmation of the presence of a structure, the nature of which he already knows. This confirmation and the depth of occurrence are given by this broad approach. In an unknown area the dipmeter will provide valuable information through detailed study of the patterns as shown in the following pages.

.......

II)

It) N 01 II) (!)

SCHLUMIIRGER

FUNDAMENTALS

OF DIPMETIR

INTERPRETATION

Quick

Reference

Dictionary

of Dipmeler

Paltern.

SUMMARY OF 34 PATTERNS
NO CHANGE OF TREND

SUMMARY

OF 34 PATTERNS {continued}
CHANGE OF TREND

o'

NO BREAK

o.

o.

o.

a'

o.

o.

o.

;po '0 PJ'O OQ'O ro ro ::! NP.. )-'. ~ w N .po. .po.

13

14

15

16

0
+<-.

,.1

-I
I

.;:

,
6 7

t-

I
8

~
\

r
17
18

~ \
.....

19

20

o.

o.

o.

~t
10

~....

....I

11 12

;I

--

..

21

22

11/8~699

G69238/.

5CHLUMIERGER

FUNDAMENTALS

Of DIPMEUR

INTlRPRnATlON Quick Reference Didlonary of Dlpmeter Pattern.

SUMMARY OF 34 PATTERNS (continued)


CHANGE OF TREND WITH BREAK

PATTERN

1--

.
....... .".
...... ~::. ...

..
.... ...
... .. .. .. " """", .... .,D' ..., .,P'

o.

o~
PATTERN 1:

,.....
23

1\
24

I-

- Single trend - Possible change in density, quality or regularity.


We have seen that a trend which ex. tends vertically can be extrapolated in the lateral extent. However, it cannot be extrapolated indefinitely. If the the dip is small it may correspond to the regional dip (probably known). If the dip is large or does not corre. spond to the regional dip some kind of structure is to be expected in the vicino ity. The well may be located on the /lank of a fold having a vertical axis of folding. The regularity and quality of the results show marine or lake deposi. tional media. A change in quality. . . may show a change from marine to continental deposition media and may correspond to a disconformity.
I

-I,
."

..

~..

.,D' Comments:

.-.:> .,D' .-0"' .,D' .-<>'

...

~
25 26

I. .. .... ... ...

...

.-c" .d
~.,.

~
27
28 29
30 PATTERN 2:

PATTERN
..'
.....,;.

2
...
"0' dO""

.V: ,I
11.

I"

I -.. ..

"
"

..

Increasing Constant imuth.

dip with depth. or regularly shifting az.

;;
'r"
I I

...,

o.

'"

Comments:

~I

Macro feature and micro features can be mixed. One of the sifting methods given in Chapter 3 has to be used. Probable continental deposition.

1.
I
('

,.

1
"t..

,... ...

..

'tJ ::r> PJ"d OQ"d

\
31 32
33

ro ro ::s w 0.. t-'~


W N ~ ~

34

, r
I

-,
.

SCHLUMaERGER

FUNDAMENTALS

OF DIPMETER INTERPRETATION

Quick

Reference

Dictionary

of Dipmeter

Patterns "d :x>

-.
ANo or little change of major rrend. B - Section of higher dip with abour the same direction as A. - Conrinuity between rhe rrend and Section B.

.
..

PATTERN

...
..

.. ...
..,
~..

,..

f-.
" ,.. ".

".. ..... .... ~.: ..., " ~,... .. .... PATTERN 3: ;,.;.. I..

. .. .
..

PATTERN

;';": ...'
~~";

..."

..

A
PATTERN 5: ABNo change of trend. Incoherent dips.

... .. ....... .. "

... .," ,. ..., :.'" ,... .. -" ..'" '. .. ... -. ..

,.
A

~"d (JQ"d

ro ro ::I ./:'-0.. ~. ~VJ


N ./:'-

. .

'...

..

.. ...

..~.
.<>-

./:'-

~.
First Choice: Local monocline.

..

J
"

~;~ "1.... ... ...

8
First Choice: Local irregular bedding. Slumping.

...

" t
I."'"
'"
,'"

Second Choice: Comments:

Cross bedding.

. '" ...
'" <> .. ~''''

::
\Vell defined continuity between the section of higher dips and the rrend above and below will suggest a monocline. Repetition of the feature along the vertical section will suggest cross bedding.
1""...... ~...... [.;,.

Second

Choice:

Disconformity.

A
","

PATTERN

6:

A B-

No change of trend. Incoherenr dips (may present).

not be

.: .PATTERN 6

PATTERN
~. ...

4
......

Change in quality, density and regularity of the results between upper and lower trends.
,-

PATTERN

4:

AB-

No or little change of major trend. Section of lower dips about same direction. Conrinuity between the rrend and Section B.

,-

,.
1/
/

A
~..

"...
..
....

I
"

I.""

..,. A ..

First Choice:

Disconformity.

"..

Second

Choice:

..

./
~,.

Major formation change with irregular bedding.

associated 'Ii

.'...

Comments:

First Choice:

Local terrace.

;
"I' ,,
't'

If feature B is not present, major formation change is the first choice.

I
r--

..

,/
\

Second

Choice:

Cross bedding.

,
'"
:-.

"""

.
",.

..
..

Commenta:

Same as above.

' ~... ~.

A
I..

~,.

'" ...

,..

" '"

1/9(\69

G6923B/I~.

SCHLUMIIRGER

FUNDAMENTALS

OF

DIPMETER

INTERPRETATION

Quick

Reference

Dictionary

of Dipmefer

Patterns

PATTERN 7
0...... .. PATTERN 7: Variation of dip with about the same direction and with continuity. . First Choice:

PATTERN

....-c>." +-.. .... .0.. ,... :.:.. I .." " .. .' ... ..
~. ,...... .. ~,.' ... .,

~.."

..

...

.
PATTERN 9: ABNo change of trend. Decreasing dip features.

"-

. ..

..... .
A

B A

Flexutes.
Cross bedding. Diffetential compaction.

..

,;..

Choice: Comments:

Foreset

Beds.

Second Choice:

..< ~.....
....

1-

Comments:

Flexures: The trend is the average dip when the dip directions are the same. When dip ditections are changing, see Chapter 5 "Solution of folded structures" . Cross bedding: the log will show a different lithology berween the sections of higher dip and those of lower dip. (same for differential compaction).

-:
....... .....

As already stated, repeats in vertical the present case, it peat also in lateral

if the feature extent, as in is li~ely to reextent.

B A

2-

... ....

...
3-

..... .... ::.

-..c>
..

The direction of transport is to ENE. the direction of the blue patterns. Since dip trend happens to be in the same direction, it is not necessary to subtract it. Check for change of lithology at the level of the blue patterns.

r<'

B A

PATTERN 8
PATTERN 10: PATTERN 8: ABNo change of ttend. Section(s) of higher or lower dips with a constant direction (not necessarily the same as that of the trend). Lack of continuity berween ttend and feature.

PATTERN A - No change of trend. B -Increasing dip featUres. .. First Choice:


.....",

10

."".. ,. ...,. ...,

.......

~.... .... ., '"

....
...

A B

Channels.
Cross bedd ing.

. .... ... ..., ..., ."".

.,

,..

B
Second Choice:

Faults.
Disconformities. Drape above a sand bar. ~~..'" .-1

A
...
'" :t> '0 OJ '0 OQ'O (!) (1) ::3 VIP.

First Choice:

Cross bedding.

Second Choice: Comments:

Series of minor faults.

."". ."".

-..

,. B A

Comments:

Cross bedding: There is often a very good parallelism berween the sections of cross bedding.

r ."". ."". :...

::

Same as above. - one should look at the resistivity log to define the nature of the formation in which the featUre appears.

.'
. .

"

", ~r

",

. 'r :;

...

"'

..
A

1-'X LV N
.po. .po.

SCHLUMIIRGIR

FUNDAMINTALS

OF DI.METIR

INTlR.RETATION

Quick

Reference

Dictionary

of Olpmeter

Patterns

I-

.
,
?
,p'O

PATTERN

11

PATTERN

13

.
... ,. ~'"

"
A
.,

-..

.
...
.. ~'.' ,. ,..'.P' ...,..

.
1+... ....
,'.. ". ..

PATTERN

11:

A B-

No change of trend. Dip increasing with depth. Continuity between upper trend and feature B.

,... t+-.. .... ... ,.., ~: ,... ..4 .. ... :-1'''' .... ::r:~: -.. ,.. 1....

~to>. .. ,. ..-'
.... .... .... ""

"
..
..
.

..

'
A

"d :x> PJ"d 0Q"d ro ro ::s 0'0. 1-" ~ w N -I" -I"

PATTERN

13:

ABC -

Upper trend. Increasing dip. Lower trend about same direction, greater magnitude than A. Continuity feature. between trends and

...

I'

..
First Choice:

..

,rf

....

Channel.
Disconformity.

~..,
I ~rI"

B
".

~~.

Second Choice: Comments:

Fault.
..... . ,I'
.'"

First Choice:
!oJ. ".". ~-,..'

Convex fold (up fold).


~If'

If Channel: The log shows a different lithology for B. If Disconformity: B is a trough on the surface of unconformity and the log will also show different lithology. If Fault: Less likely when there is no change of trend.
'bA

Secqnd Choice:

Angular

unconformity.

~I

,I-

A
Comments:

~I
I

PATTERN

12

Fold. See Chapter 5 "Solution of folded struCtures". Angular unconformity becomes a first choice if there is a change in regularity, density or quality of the results between A and C.

..
I

-'

or'

A
I'

PATTERN

14

,
PATTERN 12: ABCNo change of trend. Increasing dip. Incoherent dips (or no results). .

.,
. ".

::-,.
.~
~I"

PATTERN 14:

ABC -

Upper trend. Decreasing dip. Lower trend about same direction and less dip than A. Continuity between trends and feature.

..

""

.;.. ... ..,..

<>

....

..
~..

. eo<>"

First Choice:

Sand bar with drape.

~"'.. .. ~.. .....

;
~.

..
B
'..
.,.

Second Choice:

Fault. Channel.
If Sand bar: The log will show a different lithologic body for C. If Channel: The log will show a different lithologic body for B-C, C being coarser material deposited at the bottom of the channel.

B
First Choice: Concave-upward foid.

.~

Comments:

'.. "'

......

I
...

"""

,..

Second

Choice:
.

Angular unconformity.

eo: f>to-<

-,

Comments:
I
I"

Same

as above.

~" .,

~..

.....

~I

9'1/9'~69

G69238/i,

Quick SCHlUMIERGER FUNDAMENTAlS OF DIPMITER INTERPRETATION

Reference

Dictionary

of Dipmeter

Patterns

PATTERN 15:

- Uppertrend.
Dip decreasing to 0. Same direction. Dip increasing from 0 . Opposite direCtion to A and B. Lower trend dipping more than A and in opposite direction. Continuity betWeen all features.

PATTERN

15

PATTERN

17

BC D First Choice:

f--. ,.
., : ..~

..

.
".. ." ...~...... ,... ... .. '" .. .' .. " ". .1
."

f--.
r-:

'"

..

.
A

f-.

..
" .. .

~~: +... ...'

. . ,.... .
..
'.
."

A
I..

::-:0 Ie.

..::

"",,

1.'

.... ~~:..

..
-c>
"

I
I.

-100

..,Ie
Asymmetrical anticline.

"

~p,.
Second Choice: Differential compaction (if small difference of dip is involved betWeen A and D). :';'"

..

PATTERN 17:

Same as opposite page but the lower trend dips less than the upper trend.

~<>

"'" ~I' ,..

B c

- ...,..
~' ....
.... ....

First Choice:

Asymmetrical

syncline.

-...0. ..

.....
~-..c:-.
8000. I

..

Second

Choice:

Differential

compaction.

~~,.
-..
... ~I.

Comments:

Fold: The lower trend dipping more than the upper trend indicates an anti-

cline. The minimum dip is 0 betWeenB and C. This means that there is no plunge.

. <>
. <>

Comments:

. ...
PATTERN 16 PATTERN 18: Same as opposite page but the lower trend di ps less than the upper trend.
O.

. <>

Same as opposite page. In this case the lower trend dipping less than the upper trend indicates a syncline.

~...

PATTERN

18

PATTERN 16:

A B-

Upper trend. Progressive shift of azimuth associated with decreasing then increasing dip. Lower trend dipping more than A and in a direction more or less (but not exactly) opposite to A. Continuity betWeen all features. ..

I..

C -

'"' .......

" " " "

I ,.
.

... "'

"'

First Choice:

Asymmetrical

syncline.

" ,,
'\

... ~...

.... 'n.

...

.. ..., B
..

Second

Choice:

Differential

compaCtion.

1",-:

:.;. \
Comments:
Same as opposite page.

First Choice:

Asymmetrical

anticline.

l'
f;';f
(small dips

1'\

B
","

j
~.-.

i.
".""

..
-....

.-.

~1U't:J OQ't:J
(1) (1)

't:J
::I

Second

Choice:

Differential only).

compaction

Comments:

.....
~p..
p..

.-.

I..
..+
'.

--.10..
1-'-

Fold: The dips of B do not go to 0, Refer to Chapter 5 "Solution of folded structures". The plunge of the fold is the smallest dip of the zone of folding, i.e., 6 SSW.

~--

..

~C
VJ N .j::-.j::--

SCHLUMRUGER

FUNDAMENTALS

OF DIPMETER INTERPRETATION

Quick Reference DIctionary

0'

Dlpmeter Pattern.

PATTERN

19

..

~. ..

..
PATTERN 19: Progressive shift in direction and/or magnitude of dip.

....' I .... ,.. ,. ... ... : ~~:: ... ... .. .. . .. ..' .... '.. k: .1

',,.. ~io-': ..

. ...

. .
,... ,.. I

PATTERN 21:

A B C D -

Upper trend. Dip increasing to nearly 900 in same direction as A. Dip decreasing from nearly 900 in opposite direction to A. Lower trend in opposite direction to A. The magnitude of dip may be the same as A, smaller or greater. Continuity betWeen all features (except when the dips get near to vertica I).
.1

PATTERN

21

-.
A

'0 ;I> 111'0 (JQ'O I'D I'D :;j 000.. t-'. X W N .p.. .p..

...
Choice:
Differential Thinning compaction. out formations.

...~.
I

po
B

..
Choice:
~,.

rD'

Recumbent fold.

Flank of fold flattening or sharpening with depth. Proximity of high angle fault.

.....,..0i--

c Comments:

." ..-

Fold: The log correlation will show an inverse repetition of the lithologic sequence.

0
PATTERN 22: A B C D Upper trend. Decreasing dip to 00. Same direction as A. Incoherent dips.

PATTERN 20:

As above.)

.fo.p.

Comments:

The formations are thinning out in the same direction as the absolute dip (i.e. the dip obtained after dip trend subtraction) when the absolute dip decreases with depth. They thin out in opposite direction to the absolute dip when the absolute dip increases with depth. Differential compaction probably has no absolute direction of decrease/increase. Fold or fault. If the well does not cut the axial plane of the fold or the fault plane, the fold or the fault cannot be determined by a single DM. Several DM's are necessary.

PATTERN

20

PATTERN 22

..
..

;,.

I
"

Decreasing dip from nearly 900. Same direction as A. Lower trend. Continuity
and betWeen

...

E -

... L' ~:
....
,.. "

-........
......

betWeen A and B
D and E.

A
.. ...

"

,
'"

.....

..

...
..... ... ...
..
"'" .. ,.. ~'" .. ~. ...

First Choice:

Overturned

fold.

'.' .,

"

Second

Choice:

Angular

unconformity.

Rollover fault (if D is gentle).

.. '...

..-' B ~..
I

~'
...

c
.

Comments:

'""
P'

"",

Fold: If E dips more than A the figure is an overturned anticline. If E dips less than A, it is an overturned syncline. Feature C would theoretically be: dip increasing from 00 to 900 in direction opposite to A - but in practice the bedding will be badly fractured and/or folded.

i'

..... .... .,

I.... -I'-.

... ..

.," ,...

I:::

l1/8"~69

G69238/13l~

Guide SCHLUMIERGER fUNDAMENTALS OF DIP METER INTERPRETATION

Referent:t!I

Dic:tionary

of Dlpmeter

Patterns

PATTERN 23

PATTERN

25

-'
PATTERN 23:

.
/. "/
i./ .~ j!

... ..' .. ..' .... ..1+-.. .... .., p. ,".. ..- .,....
.,. .," ... ~. '..... .. ....
"

..
" ..P

-'

..

.....,.
J:1' rr

-. "... ,... ,...


... .' ....

.
..
..

,. .. .
A
P

A - Upper trend. B - Lower trend different from A. - Break between A and B.


Angular unconformity.

-.

....

., .
...

A
PATTERN 25:

~. ..rr rr ....

. ..
~,"

..'

...

First Choice:

'" ,/
/

..
... .. .. ... J.. "-

Second

Choice:

Fault.
Fault is improbable without a zone of distortion between A and B. Angular unconformity choice would be reinforced if there is a change of density, quality or regularity of the results between the twO trends.

A - Upper trend. B - Increasing dip feature (continuity with A). C - Lower trend - break between Band C. Fault.
Angular unconformity combined with trough or channel.

,"'" ~... 'I"''I"'-

Comments:

.~ B
First Choice:

...

"
".... ...,

.... ",....

..~
'" '"

-.. .... ...

Second
~I..

Choice:

'"
-I>-

-,

.
PATTERN 24
PATTERN 24:

Comments:

Fault: the increasing dip is drag. PATTERN 26

A - Upper trend. B - Incoherent dips or lack of results. C - Lower trend different from A
Angular Fault. unconformity.

..
,.

,/

.. I,
.

",:
.A'

.". -..

-.
PATTERN 26: Same as above.

,~;..

I
.

.. ~.... ...,
,.. .,

/ / ..'
..

,"

..

.~

First Choice:

...
.cd
..

Comments:

The figure has been tilted. B is an "absolute red (increasing dip) pattern", as would appear after subtraction of the A trend. The real discontinuity is between Band C, not between A and B. ~I~{ ...,

Second

Choice:

Fold.
Angular unconformity: B is weathering or irregular bedding at the unconformity surface. . . .

" I ,i ,,"1\
. ",

B ~....
"d ;I> PJ"d ()Q"d

B
'"

Comments:

"

'" .

Fault: B is zone of distortion, gouge, breccia. . . . Fold: B is a fractured zone of folding.

I~
~... ...

"'"

..

ro ro ::! -CD.. ~. :< w N .p.p-

SCHLUM8UGER

FUNDAMENTALS

OF

DIPMETER

INTERPRETATION

Quh:k Reference

Dictionary

of Dipmetet'

Paftern.

I 4

"CI

>

PATTERN 0-.

27

PATTERN

29

IU"CI OQ"CI

.
.

.. ... .... .. .. .... ~. .,., ,.., ... ." '.a.e;o. ... ". ... '" ~... ~,...
.eoo~"

~.. .

. .
... ... ...

0-. ,.
A
..

."

I... ... ... ...

.
.,.
...

'"...
... ... .. .. ...

.",.

...,

.. .. ...
'"

.. ....

ro ro ::s p. Of-'~ W
N ~ ~

."

~. r'" ,P'. ,P'

... ... ...

..

'"
~~.~

PATTERN 27:

A - Upper trend. B -- Decreasing dip-break with A. C - Lower trend - continuity with B.


Angular unconformity.

"' .. "I,

"
....

PATTERN 29:

First Choice:

Second Choice: Comments:

Fault. Angular unconformity: truncated fold. Fault: drag below the fault plane only (rare).

'-

'-

...

.". ,...

A - Upper trend. B - Absolute dip increase (contineitywithA). C - Absolute dip decrease (continuity with D). D - Lowet trend. - Break between Band C. Fault.
A likely interpretation is a rollover fault downthrown to the west. Drag is present in the upthrown block. The fault plane dips to the west. No closure apparent in the downthrown block, which dips entirely to the ENE.

~'"

-:.
I

.....

~.."""""'

\.
\

\.
\

...
0

" " "


PATTERN

c
Choice: Comments: 28

\ :\
'"

PATTERN

30
....
....

.~ ..,~
PATTERN 28: Same as above but B is increasing dip instead of decreasing. However, B is an "absolute blue patrern" as would appear after subtraction of the C trend. The real discontinuity is between A and B, not between Band C.

~..
...
"

A
..
PATTERN 30: This example is similar to the one above; however, the rollover goes with closure and forms a dome-like situation in the downthrown block. Downthrown to the west. The reversal of dip azimuth at the fault plane is characteristic of rollover in those cases.

.. ~..
.'

." .~
~.

''''. .;,..

..

........
";" ...

..
,.. ..

"'~,

8 ".
...
..

~.......

---

'-

---

....

~.

",,, c

.. ... ... 0

61/8~G99

G 69238/14<:.

SCHLUMIERGER FUNDAMENTALS

0'

DIPMETER

INTERPRETATION

Quick

Reference

Didionary

of Dipmeter

Pafferns

I 4

c-.
.'

PATTERN

..,...

.., ," .... ,.. ~. .... ..... .., ... .. .... .. .,....

..

31

,.. .. .
A

f-," "..

,.
.. ~.... ..
'"

.r'
"./:

.,- . . ",,.. .. . I
.. f._. .... .- .' .

PATTERN

33

..
PATTERN 31: A B C D Upper trend. Series of red patterns. Possible high dips below each "B"' feature. Lower trend.

-.

"""'"

'.' ..

..'
... ."

~. -. ,.p. ,.p ,.p ..'

...

~..
,..0.;

..

."

';';' .r'..
. j

8
,..
PATTERN
33:

\..
A - Upper trend. B - Incoherent dips. C - Blue pattern. D - Lowet trend.
Angular unconformity.

..

/
I
'" . '\ .... '"
;> It .. ...

Choice: Comments:

Fault system (step fault).

~I"

8
F
.." ...

c
......

The drag zone is broken into secondary faulting. The main fault lower Band C. is between the

I~ .'\
-.:

,
;.
..
"

'u

C
First Choice:

~,
32

0
Second Choice:

" "
:f". . p-..
I"I"-

0
..

....

Fault.
Angular unconfotmity: The lower part is a tcuncated fnld. "B" is irregular bedding on the unconformity surface.

""
PATTERN 34

PATTERN PATTERN 32: A B C D Upper trend. Red pattern Blue pattern Lower trend. (absolute). (absolute).
"

Comments:

-.,
.... :--

I;.

"'

A
..
PATTERN 34: Same as above. C is .m "ahsolure blue pattern" tract trend D to show this). (sub-

.. ....

".

Choice:

Drag fault, downthrown to the west, no closure, drag in upthrown block.

Comments:

The angle between the highest dips of Band C is greater than the angle between A and D.

" ,,"
~1-.

....

'f'-

8
I
"

I
/

'. -I'

1I

..

B ~C
'1j
1b'O (JQ'O
(1) (1)

",:""
1"..0-

I.. I.

.... ....

!'-.

.,.

,...0" ...-:>

,.",

~..04
~.. .. 0
r'"
."

~..".. ;.....
..

~0.. ~1-'>: W 0
N .t:.t:-

::I

....

Appendix 3.2.4.5

CORRELATION BETWEEN GAMMA-RAY AND POROSITY LOGS

GAMMA 0 API

SONI C

FDC/CNL
4!5 LS PU

100 140 uS/FT 40 '-95 G/ce 2-95

-I!5

LOW GAMMA RAY

porosity

only

,,'"

GOOD CORR'ELA TION

clay content

only

limestone,

scale

11200

Clay minerals depending

have a pronounced

effect

on the neutron effect a good

and sonic

logs

and,

on clay type a less pronounced of correlation is therefore

on the density indicator

log. Absence type and

or presence

of clay

clay distribution.

! ..... CD t<I en '" co C)

Appendix 3.2.4.6.1

SOURCE

ROCK LOG EXPRESSION

Cal.

GR
-r-

Resist.

Dens. Sonic

-r--...

... ... ---r-

.. ", ...J

..,...

... CD 'ft) N II> II) C)


EG327

Appendix

3.2.4.6.2

NOMOGRAM

FOR SOURCE

ROCK

DETECTION

ON WIRELINE

LOGS

Based on the phenomenon that source rock formations generally show a lower density, a lower sonic transit time and a higher resistivity than other sediments of equal compaction and comparable mineralogy MEYER & NEDERLOF designed a NOMOGRAM (see next page). With the aid of this nomogram it can be determined whether a pair of log readings indicates a source rock or a non-source rock.

The nomogram

is used

as follows:

First resistivity readings need to be normalised for temperature. This is done by reading the borehole temperature of the interval to be tested on the right-hand scale and connect it with a straight line with the resistivity value as read from the log on the left-hand scale. The intersection of this line with the centre resistivity scale will indicate the resistivity value at 80F. This point is then connected with the appropriate density or interval velocity value. The intersection of this .line with the classification scale will then indicate whether we are dealing with a likely source rock (organic rich) or a non-source rock (organic poor).

, ~ ~ N ~ W 0

G 69238/1~

RESISTIVITY 0""'" 100

RESISTIVITY

AT 60F

'" 80
60

ISOnl(-RE5J5TIVITY

,"1ff"HCD

tooo

OHM""

~Y-RE5/STJVITr

METHODI

!o<)oo

1000 f;O

CLASSIFICATION
1000 800

CLASSIFICATION

...,

30 sno JXJ

FOC
9/(m'
110 \M I~O I.SO

,,,

~bO

BHT .C-or
2tX1
1.r00

SONIC LOG
II'\() 10

" ! 7 1.80
170 '100 210 ') 20

180 160

~'jO 3000

fHP<Jft '100 ,,0 fO I.frJ ~0

llfO

,.e 'TO ,'


IIfO

IlD

150

100

Ct:

200
1'0 ,80

c.n Ct: c.n :! a z

'230

Ct: c.n
7. ,,/

"
80

11 ,~o !50 l'fO ao l:tO

7"
bO sa

"
&0

Ct: f{' z a

'] 5""0

f'< jC :.>.!lJ

r
.. ..

100 '1" 80

"

ro

r'o

,1i'

2D

7"

60

L"

60 I~

10

S-O

0" .0" C!)C!)

"}>

NOMOGRAM

FOR SOURCE

ROCK DETECTION
and NEDERLOF,

ON WIRE LINE

LOGS

(offer MEYER

1976)

f\)::J a. x' (JJ f\) .t> m i>'

Appendix3.3.1

EXAMPLE

OF THE LITHOLOGICAL REPORT BY THE MUD LOGGER, IN THE DAILY DRILLING REPORT/TELEX

Lithology Interval: 1280 - 1420 m type 13: Dol, (arg), fxln, dkgy, hd. type 14: Lst, dol loc arg, with Wkst Tex,

off wh

type 15: Sh, calc sIt, gy, sft


type 16: Sltst, (calc) arg

(s), Itgy,

fri

13
1280-1300 m 1310 m

14 Tr 30 100 90 20

15

16

1320 m
1330-1370 m 1380 m 1390-1410 m

100 100 70 Tr

1420 m

10 80 90

10

10

! CD If) " N
en <D
'"

Appendix

3.3.2

0 PC,:).... ...........:: .....................

''''''''''''''''''''''''''

..-........ ...................................

"""""""""'"

'''' """"''''''''''''''

...... ......-..... ......... ....... .......

STRATIGRAPHICAL

WELL
vertical

DATA SHEET
scale
1: 1000

..........................................................

~UJ

... II)

:G

HYDROCARBON

~INDICATIONS

E ~.......
~u..
~0 CD J: 0

>0 0 J:

~0

5: ~~~UJ

::;

:J ~-I u.. ~-I eX (f) ~a: ~0 ~:J :I: (f)


z

a: 0 ci
Z

0 :J :J -I u u..
Z

w 0 (f)

w 0 (f)

u ~eX W a: ~~w Z 0 ~w u
eX

REMARKS
LITHOLOGICAL DESCRIPTION Z FAUNA, MINERALS, ::I SPECIAL MUD ADDITIVES, ETC. U 0 a:: Z ::I UJ

<

,"'"

,. -

CD .... N 0> <0 t!)

4. Special Investigations

Appendix

4.1.1

ADDRESSES

Shipments

of: investigations by EP/12.1 have to be

- Samples for stratigraphical addressed as follows

pia KSEPL Mr. D. v. Greuningen SIPM - EP/12.1 Volmerlaan 6 2288 GD Rijswijk (Z-H) Holland

and
- Samples for source rock investigations by KSEPL as below

KSEPL LRE/4 Volmerlaan 6 2288 GDRijswijk Holland

(Z-H)

.:;:::

~
~ N en (Q ~

Appendix

4.2.1

ROCK SAMPLING FOR PALYNOLOGICAL


Almost all types as follows: Sediments suitable of sediments may contain

INVESTIGATION
They may be ranked

palynomorphs.

for palynological

investigation:

Experience has shown that the following sediments are particularly suitable for palynological investigation: (a) Clay - Shale - Siltstone; (excl. the reddish, purplish, etc. see below) (b) Marl; (c) Peat - Lignite - Coal - (Oil-shale); (d) Paralic limestone - Fresh Water Limestone; (e) Sandstone and Sand, if they contain a large amount of clay or silt.

Sediments

in which

palynomorphs

are very

rare: coarse

(a) Very rapidly deposited sediments such as conglomerates, grained sandstones, breccias, and aeolian sediments. (b) All sediments formed by chemical precipitation. (c) Carbonates.

Sediments which palynomorphs:

are generally

barren

or contain

only badly

preserved

(a) Sediments showing reddish, purplish, or yellowish tints, all mottled sediments and all iron enriched sediments such as ironstones, concretions, limonitic sandstones and fossil soils are generally barren, or at best contain only very badly preserved palynomorphs. They are unsuitable for palynological investigation. (b) Deeply weathered sediments, particularly when they sQow signs of lateritic weathering are barren, or contain at best only badly preserved palynomorphs. (c) Sediments in the vicinity of magmatic intrusions and extrusions such as dykes, sills and lava flows, particularly when they appear to be baked or fritted, contain only carbonized palynomorphs which are unsuitable for examination. (d) Metamorphic sediments (schists, palynological examination. gneisses, etc.) are useless for

,~ ~ ~ N ~ W
~

Appendix

4.3.1

PYROLYSIS

TEST-TUBE

METHOD

FOR DETECTION

OF

(NON POST-MATURE)

SOURCE

ROCKS

Approx. 0.5 cm3 of powdered, clean, selected cuttings is beated in a pyrex test-tube over a gas burner until it becomes red bot. During beating tbe test-tube sbould be beld in a near-borizontal position to prevent generated to flow back. If pyrolisable organic matter is present, dark brown tar will condens on tbe cooler upper part of tbe test-tube. Tbe results yield. Tbis metbod (DOM 80-85) are reported in terms as: no-, small-, good-, excellent tar

tar

is not suitable nor can it type

for tbe detection tbe source rock.

of post-mature

source

rocks

,! m ~ N ~ W ~

5.

earn Work

Appendix 5.2.1

HYDROCARBON

DETECTION
INDICATIONS

IN ROCK SAMPLES

-DOES

NOT

USUALLY ON CORE8. FAINT

APPLY

TO CUTTINOS

BUT

TOTAL GAS

GAS

RECORDER,

18 USEFUL -RANGES

CHROMATOGRAPH.

FROM

TO STRONO. ON CORES.

!!.M!illi.

-USEFUL -OILSERYE

OBSERVATION COLOUR

- 8"MPLE8 G"S WHICH IS RELE"SED DRILLING MUD.

FROM THE

AND DISTRIBUTION.

- GENERALLY THE HIGHER API GRAVITY OilS TEND TOWARDS COLOURLE88 AND LOWER API
GRAVITY OILS HAVE
UP

- PLOTS TOTAL GAS (TO) READINOS AND CHROMATOORAPH ANALYSIS OF COMPONENT


CONCENTRATIONS METHANE OF OA8EOU8 HYDROCARBONS.

A DARK
CLEARL

COLOUR.
Y UNDER

SHOWS - STAININO

UL TRAYIOlET -IF 8TAINING

LIGHT. IS LESS THAN 1DO~ .DESCRlaE

- ETH"NE
- PROP"NE
- 180 BUT''NE
- NORM"L BUT"NE

CI C2
C3
CA

0 18TRIBUTION.CPA BLEEDING BLEEDINO INDICATES IRIDESCENCE THI8 OF OIL

TCH Y ,LAMINA TED.E TC.) FROM CORES AND CUTTINGS RESERVOIR. OIL OF "HY

A LOW PERMEABILITY BE "880CI"TED WITH

- ANALY81S OF LIQUID HYDROCARBONS IS SOMETIMES ALSO POSSIBLE. - PENTANE -' HEXANE


FOR !!!1 WHEN ROCK HIGH GAS READING8 ARE

M"Y COLOUR OR "PI GR"VITY,8UT 18 LIKELY TO BE MORE OBSERVABLE AND 810NIFICANT THE LIGHTER .NEARLY 8! COLOURLESa OILS

CI5 08
OBTAINED "ND 8Y ALWAYS 80LVENTCHECK "ND

WHERE

ST"'N'NG M"Y (LIGHT OIL OR CONDEN8"TE)

"8a1NT.

8"MPLE8 TE8T.

IN nUOR08COPE

ACETONE A

OIL ON MUDSTREAM

OCCASIONALLY FLOATING

80ME

OIL

MAY 8E OBSERVED OBSERVATION.

~
THE

RE8ERVOIR

WILL

NOT

GIVE "NO

P081T1VE "CETONE

RESULTS TE8Ta.

FROM

FLUOR08COPE,80LVENT-

ON THE

MUD.RECORD

TESTS
FLUORESCENCE UNDER UL TR" VIOLET
OCCURENCE SMALL OIL SOLVENT CUT

LIGHT
IN ROCK .UNNOTICED OIL BECAUSE .CAN LIGHT. OF THI8 TeST 18 USED TO DETECT HEAVI~A HYDROCARBONS

OF dlL QUANTITIE8

OR LIGHT UNDER

COLOURS

IN ROCK

SAMPLE a AND 18 CARRIED

OUT A8 FOLLOWS:

GENERALLY NATURAL

BE DETECTED FLUORESCENCE

ULTRAVIOLET

PLACE

3 CM. rrRE8HLY TU8E.

CRuaHED

-MUD

fAEE-

ROCK

FLUORESCENCE (NOT CUT OVERHEATED) FLUORESCENCE

OF FRESH ROCK

.WET SAMPLE.

OR DRY

IN A TE8T

, CM. ABOVE CRUSHED - ADD CHLOROTHENE UP TO aAMPLE ,SHAKE WELL.


WHEN DRY-NOT IN SOLVENT

FLUORESCENCE OVERHEATED-ROCK (CHLOROTHENE). ASPECTS TO 8E


(WHITE.

QF LIQUID SAMPLE

.OBSERVED

18 IMMERSED

- ""TIIR

'8-20

80LVENT. U81! GRADING 0-1


YELLOW, 2. LIGHT TEA. OBSERVED: 5. DARK COFFEE).
BLUE. YELLOW. GOLD, ORANGE. BROWN, COfFEE)

MINUTEe OBS.RYE COLOUAATION OF (O. CLEAR, t. VERYLIGHT


3. NORMAL TEA. 4. DARK TEA,

- COLOUR
NOTE: DISTINGUISH

-INTENSITY

(BRIGHT, DULL. PALE) (EVEN. SPOTTED, MOTTLED. STREAKED) OF CRUDE NOTE: THE 8AME -UNDE.. OIL) IN 80URCE ROCK 8AMPLE CAN 8E uaED LIGHTTO OBaERYE THE CUT fLUORESCENCE.

- DISTRIBUTION
FLUORESCENCE

FLUORESCENCE DUE- TO:

OIL FROM

ULTRAYIOLET

(NOT ORG"NIC M"TTER OR OTHER 8EDIMENT8,.

REFINED PRODUCTS

"CID

MINERALS
(WILL

LUBRICANT8 TAR COATINO ON DRILLINO FLUID IN OIL-BASED MUD COLOURLES9 FLUORESCE DETECTED CONTAIN lIQHT UNDER OIL OR CONDENSATE ULTRAVIOLET PROVIDED LIGHT WILL OFTEN BUT MAY BE DOES NOT HOT IQUIP ACETONE TEST

HYDR"ULIC DISTILLATE8

PRODUCE

CUT

FLUORESCENCE)
BUT YIELD CUT

TAR/DEAD OIL MAY NOT 8HOW FLUORESCENCE


(OIVINO D"RK A BLACK OR BLUE "NO" COLOURATION) MILKY OP"OUE CUT COLOUR

A9 FOLLOWS. CARBONACEOUS ROCK

THE SAMPLE

" FLUORE8CENCE.

OR LIONITIC MATTER: SAMPLE IS PLACED AND MIXED IN A DRY TEST WELL.

IN CALCAREOUS BY DROPPING CUTTINGS THEM INTO

A POWDERED TUBE. ACETONE

TEST

(10'"

HC!)
OF OIL

IS ADDED

THE CAN

~RE8ENOE OFTEN ACID

- AFTER 115-20 MIN. FLUID 19 FILTERED AND EXCESS OF DISTILLED WATER ADDED TO THE FILTERED FLUID.
IF HYDROCARBONS ARE PRESENT. A MILKY WHITE

BE DETECTED (10.. HOI).

WEAK THE EVEN WHICH ...... CD It) N 0> CD C)


"'-J

SOLUTION REACTION FAINTLY. ADHERE SURFACE. THE BUBBLE8 BUA8T AND THE CUTTINO MOTION. NOTE: WHEN
ALWAYS

18 FORMED. AND WATER MIX WELL.)

OF THE

ACID

ON A CUTTINO. RELATIVELY

STAINED BUBBLES IT TO RISE

(ACETONE

MAY FORM TO THE

LAROE

CUTTING

AND CAUSE

OBSERVE

DISCOLOURATIOH.

-ZERO

TO STRONO-,

TO THE

SOMETIMES FALLS AQAIN

OIL

BASED

MUDS

ARE

USED- THE

REACTION

IS

WITH

A CHARACTERISTIC

BOUNCING

~ EG.382-386

6. Final Well

eport

G69238/151

STRATIGRAPHICAL

SUMMARY TABLE
ESTIMATED RESERVOIR ROCK
POTENTIAL

UNIT

INTER\t\L ITHICKNESS mbdf m

LITHOLOGY

AGE

ENVIRONMENT

SOURCE ROCK
POTENTIAL

REMARKS

?(A) A

B C D E F G H I
J>

"0 "0 It) ::J 0X (1) ~ ~

Appendix 6.4. 1. 2

TIMESTRATIGRAPHICAL SUBDIVISION

Interpr. Age Top

(Log) Observed Biostr.


.J-E.P

Thickness

Lower

Miocene

Oligocene Upper l-fiddle Eocene Eocene Eocene

Lower-Middle Lower Upper Upper Middle Eocene

PaleoceneLowermost Eocene Paleocene Paleocene

Danian
Upper Lower Maastrichtian Maastrichtian Campanian

Middle-Upper Lower

Campanian and/or Campanian

Santonian Santonian Coniacian

Lower-Middle
.

Cenomanian Albian

Middle-Upper

Albian

Intrusive (Oligocene

Rock or older)

Albian
Intrusive (Oligocene Rock or older)

Albian
Lower Albian Rock or older)

Intrusive (Oligocene Lower

Albian

(TD)

"10 Ii)
N 0> <C (!)

Appendix 6.4.2.1

EXAMPLE OF HEADING

OF WELL SUMMARY DATA SHEET


(EXAMPLE
NOT TO SCALE)

STRATIGRAPHIC PROGNOSIS

u.: 0

(f) ~UJ a:
I.4J

% \.L
U') ...... LLJ Z

DRilLING

PROGRESS

-8

:E

z ~..... Q. LU Q

:E ~- Z Z ::::>o

UJ CI < I

U > 0 Z a: LLJ

>C) 0 ..J ~~0 :r I..J

VJ :::a::: cr <X ::E w a:::

~~" ::::> ...J 0..


I

Z Vi u

Days 10 L ' 20 30 40 50 l 60 70 80 , 90

en UJ

lOGS

STRATIGRAPHY

...J

HYDROCARBON
INDICATIONS

D..

:::!: <t en

@
(f) t:: Z U) U (,) ICI) ...J ...J ::E Q Q w 0 m 1.L.:t:
::::>

U)
LLJ (,)

-c
Oil
GAS DIRECT FLUOR. G CUT COLOUR. CUT FLUOR.

tz UJ :E z O

:J
>CI 0 ..J ~~0 ~:J: en a::: <[ :E U) ~" z ;: ..... :> (.)

LLJ CI
<X

a:: UJ

>
Z

I-

:i

UJ a::

en L&J a: 0 u I (I) rr OJ 0 (,)


en

u ~Iu ~I,":I" u u

F,I,G W1FJG ... WI ... ... WI F,I

RESERVOIR PROPERTIES

@
POROSITY From

~0
ai en LLJ a:::
>..... ::; m ~c:[

INTERVAL (From Sonic log.

VELOCITY overage every 50m)

-0

Computer processed Interpretation log. % 20

tI.&J ::E I0.. LaJ 0


%

10

30

::E a::: UJ 0..

LLJ

m/sec 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

DENSITY (From FDC, overoge every 50 m)

TEMPERATURE
(CTRM corrected)

-E

gm/cc 1.9
I I I

2.0

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.'3

3.0

20

40

60

aC. ee

100

120

140

I LOCATIONMAP - SCALEI" 2,~,OOO


u.: 0

COORDINATES

ELEVATION WATER

0 F

DIP METER

DEPTH

m
en UJ 0: .... LLJ ::E % Ia.. LtJ
0

SEA-BED RIG ,..,

!2 "CD ,.., N en CD (!)

SPUDDED COMPLETED TOTAL STATUS DEPTH

U IL&J

en ~I..J Azimuth N E S W Dip


::::>

NI

10

15

20

25

30

35

40 ,

L&..

G69238/tM.

LOGS

RUN

DATE

INTERVAL MEASURED(m)

BIT SIZE

BHT of

MUD TYPE

c?

OPCO

's NAME

AMAZONIA ONSHORE, COASTAL PLAIN

WELL COMPLETION LOG

.
Finol Well Report

WELL
SCALE Author: P J.C. Hoookamer 2

NAME
1: 1000 Dote: Encl:

Draw. No:

co
LOCATION MAP I: 500.000

~
COORD: .LAT N SPUDDED
COMPLETED

LONG. E
ELEVATION D.F.

AMSL

TOTAL

DEPTH:

RIG

STATUS

~!:::
Z ::> I1J

en

en

z I- 0 z I1J IZ 0

en I1J 0:: a-GAMMA II1J


6".......m- CALIPER

RAY-too 1.7
.mmm"---"26"

BULK DENSITY v'aml /ee


belaw t200 m

2.7 2.95

FAUNA

z Q LITHOLOGICAL DESCRIPTION
0:: II1J ~I1J 0:: Q.

t:

~en
0 Q.

~>(!)
:I: I:J

1.95

v,aml/ee

Z ::> ~U

a
REMARKS FLORA

i=
I
I

0 ~0::

0:: I1J ~> 0 z U. I1J 0

:I: IQ. I1J 0-------0

9 0

I-

NEUTRON

POROSITY

SP ---------

tOO

60------------------4S--_~!!,!!.!.2EQ.'!!.__-_-----%

%-------------------------------

I1J 0:: Q. ~I1J I0

-t5

EXAMPLE OF HEADING OF WELL COMPLETION LOG


(EXAMPLE NOT TO SCALE)

"0 "0 (1) ~ ax' m :t. N N

EXAMPLE OF CONTRACTOR'S MASTERLOG


:c
m

Appendix 6.4.2.3

fr~~
~33 3 3

~~~1> i 1 :c " ;0:


en

""': V'.

"T1 ~I ~~~en~~~~& Z > ~i Z ~i~2i~ Q, ,.... oo,:r C> ~3 0 ~!. -.

}.~o.::-4"'V1 .. 0 .., C :) t)

'*'

>

:I ~9 . ~H :::,..

~e~;~
:H
~ss

~>H
060

!: i Q. m g-q ~~i.:!!:1 ~i~! ~~<~'i:~. ~,. a 2; ~0 C> ~t")$3 (/) ~~~i.: ~~~"~ :III"'~. :III . 0 I fR~ S .~

.."i

c>nC) ~0

:I:

m""~ ,5,8

~~~h :I: m

en

H~ . Ii

,....

:c

! ,5 p.~i

i~il

i~~i
!

:E' m , .. ,....
0< r:: ~ ~ 0
(;) ~

(') 0

ni.Pfa~ ,d
.:n
I

I: }! z

c,

::r"'::r.,.

! IS II

LJ

~; 1 !
~!:

~i \

"":.;:!;

~~~... ..

~,,~
I

~'.

~; S
I
I

. ~"C E:, II: ~~i! ~~~~~! ; 1511 11:1, ! I , ] 1 I i I I Pi !

~:o! ~.5

W I\)

6 ."

en

'6

MUD
W '" "'V v ~\.to)l'\I ~1 'w',~o.:.oltl~..1 P\.~I"': "'a.:r..~111 .e'-)I 'i' J~IIUI'1,,~I\..(}"1 GcI\I:!;a,'whl

DRILUNG
NB RA OB lei CB N"'''''LII 1.111 RUfun DwmLH'W bel T.,rboJCI"~ C""',,&.HI Wttl";hl ~brt RcI..11(ItI pUluP".euun,( ( !rplnl ) )

UTHOLOGY

CORES
f;-~:Umo.~~,-.
!E.r.~ roc;Ni I: ":":00Mtic WneIIOn8;

l--

_cor

U
i.1.. LIC r l Fn

L -_:s.nG
, L

V'.al~' I ~ ,':''';1 MuQ.;.M.e 111o".n, Ip;)nl, Cr oOC .:uol...nl:. h.tJt..JYt'(\p...h::f'l~ ":11 M...a I.""~II,,'I} I.~ rf)'n',; r 1 6.'..."1 1;4I..t. 10::10<::.1'.11,t..

rV..o&
RPU PP iii ,mj

t-:--:~ ~'~~,-:S4ndi~ooe L:~:':';Dokvrvt~ [,,- .~~J:~)'~:-I~t :~.- "s.n-WUralOt'K: l -. s.n

CIC...t:'~'
'P8I.."n:~iJ'!

'I,;}

L-- .1~:'>:~~=1fOCk. L~jP)('" ;:;--. : ;GI~ ~

.. s.a ''''''

CGf8

TESTS
CST, ,c:.l n...tToQCtI

.
I

lC
.'

l~1 ~ilr..~I..:.on
7\ M~a ..

F~ ~~.o II~~

TG Tnu y..i ['ClC..JIlnlfC.~o.;.i


-/ D.!"..-bOn

'~!

'j,1.

C:Jo J

u,.o

r"i:}j-l'::3.::lOnl-<her1
_CoII-lign<18

;--:-:u.o.

r .Fir -AFT OOry


(DffMftwoii8f EB SML8d "8WC'j"""')'} jtk)w . 0. '<lite'

It.)~~ ,.~'.~,':;

1tI..n'fII)'

I-j
L-

L~G.-m r':t-..-..
0

J
~ c
Q "'~I

M...ag-'fl

~D- r
1111

- AAnoFml,u;&ON
rr.III.I..oI

CJ
~ ~
HYDRQC&IWOH

QGa(IICI"'.htJ

i',,,-

"1~tJ"")' "':

I..:.

'-

:z: CAII80HATE t AHAL'SIS w Q

LITHOLOGY CUTTIHGS ..

k:.I$S .

--------

CO.C. kllal

Cart.of\al_'~. .

0 x

".---

GAl g,a.

...r._......__.......

IC.AUi 11 5QII"

.
I;

.~,.-*-!

DSCIW'TIOH EHGIHUIIING REMARKS Oatk Wni8IIDw .. ~~.~~ wr~"2'-J,~ftMI I.:JIuo

III U
. _12W

. ::t
i

8j,YV ara 01'0." 1nII;IQ.cr,PIO "'V'QI.IIIi~~""a...o

,., CMMn, CI)pG~ ~ ~~OICI)II~.~ OII::Ifiml.I/JOOI"""'~.noluo

"---""'.

4''''", I'gtweJ. ~.., ~8OI4.1Q11 ~ ,"" ~'"''''

'V'><".,

1'aC.8I00CWponc,......

i -

-~....
Son7uonrt 1niMWit. poot...

StYiIt 8'*pr,tOlIUIc1.

..IOfteG.{/IIOOI~~

..,.,

"""""'"' ",10--, ~
no Ia.G

bllllflO

p,)rQMy.

i ..
'"

.
i

i .-

...-- -...

.1
"CD .... N m (!)

EG.356

\J

ROCK-

STRATIGRAPHICAL

SUBDIVISION

---~
n.

,--.e-. ~

-~I

i
-

i,

011

G) 01 II) N 8: ....

g ""

..

,~,
- -------... -

~'t"(!
-

--

----

.. -

041
...r~j
-~---~-

I
!

G1 1> ;t ;t 1:;:0 J> -<

-----_.--

~-:--~~ L4N ii~~


~llri:~ It

~~~

;'i,
iNTERPRETED
~%

i ,-. : u ." c (") z r

----c--

-..'--

--

- -- +-

t
.--

"

.:
--I
~

------------.

LITHOLOGICAL

COLUMN

t.
[:"..,,~

.... (")

MJ..,;J-

~~t~u.-+,
-- ~--t--7"

r
--

---

'II . _.IJ/llJii It. ]'

:~--

-i-".~'

I II

I
I

i-ji

!-~~

(
,

I !
I

..
m :I: n VI

-;~~~i
-

*
!

i
g

--l--~-=l
0 '

f;

:;

DEPTH IN METRES
CORE/SiDEWALL SAMPLE DEPTH IN METRES

IT1 X ]>

,
. .'.

.,.

''I Cwh-r+ ,.+.t-I~l3:ttt


'
+'~,L_~ '-~~'

-:-rnrt r-r-rtl t ..t1Jtt.d.J-t::~


i,

"

>d:id

t--

s::
'1J

-;-'-+--~+4 .. ..
~~ ..=.,
e

,~1.~..-;. -~."~. ~
l _I -

r IT1 0
"TI

_,I I +,.
,

-t-11 j tj--~-r-i i '_-lL_" -:;"'1 -1 "-[ "~ -,o i ' l \t..c, , H~ " ,i --,j .4~ i 1 j ;.; . ~ l -;. ' ~- ~i . 1 l >- -~ f

l
';

:Ii

LTl-i

t
-.

J :
'i
\ " I
'

~:o..~~

:+_7""-r-- ; -ri . : - = ~++~"~'f"'"

_i':"' -+--', --

,-,
;

;-~1H' ;-

-(J) ITI-I ~:::tJ

~!:i ITIzG') ~:::tJ -i]> '1J

~+~
"
I .-j-

H-t-t-fij '}~ ~~4 t~ "==--q:;ni-+-WH-::ftT~ ! t di1 T I t"

t
'

.." 1I --+ ~'i.:' . ..~ l i " . . -'. I; Ft-I'


; !

jp

..J,--+-.t--t--;...+;-t-f-I--~.+; "~j-,,,,tl;IC-"I't;r

t I
!

lt

i
1
-4

---,
j-'

PLANKTONIC

FQRAMIf11IFERA FORAMINIFER.Co <"QRAMINIFERA

CALCAREOUS SMALLER 9ENTHONLC ARENACEOUS SMALLER BENTHONIC


SPONGE SPICULES ECHINOID SPINES I FRAGMENTS OSTRACODA BRVOZOA FRAGMENTS
.~-

0 ::c
G') 1> Z (1 ("') 0 ~ "'tI 0 Z fTI Z (j) ~

.-~:J,_I:::
-'

I :i ;
.
'

;
,

: I

t i
,

!"'

--1+

I , ' . :-+_Lt--~t-I'+-r--t++:

-L-' -1

n ir :
+ tiH-t- ,
,

r'~

t ' " '


.

H' f I ~ C c. 1i ;:h +i : L; T ~""i"


'
. ~-

-il' : . -';'

' I

~~~ci-~~Ca~~~~~~~T~ORAMIN'FERA
G>
~~t..ARIA prTHONELLA INOCERAMUS OVALIS I'"RAGMENTS GASTROPOQA

I ,~

'+--H--t-;--hnfi

I I++!
I I

t
I

~ In
i

Lt

'-I

tt-i

-:
I

I ~

, -~ -;,

':

.1 j
~

T : I
I I I

-- -

-.
0

U)
Tr-'i~-r-I;
i

~:r: >rO r 0

Ht

t-fll

--r--

-i

!::!]>

_~I
~(j)

I~
fTI ,... I"! ("') -I rT1 0 "'T1 0 ::c J> ~Z :; f'T1 ::0 t:> 0 Z

..
I I
I I I I

:x: 1> ::c -I

~ J>
(J)

I I

(")

.
I I I I I I I ! i I I I I I I I Ii I I I I ! : I I I ~1 I I i I

:r: IT1 IT1

-I

i
I

.,

i : ,

.
..

I :

. .0 "
0

~,,;J -;AMPl::S

RECOVERED

REMARKS
c.

.;
UPPER EOCENE

~.;;

OLIGOCENE

... I Wol 81~i


Z 1J
[JI

FAUNAL ZONATION PALYNOLOGICAL

/ AGE INTERPRETATION ZONATION I AGE INTERPRETATION

L. ,::>

Z 1)

CALCAREOUS

NANNO-PLANKTON

ZONATION

I AGE INTERPR.

~I
UP P['R

I
0 L I G 0 C E N E

M I OC ENE
LOWEFt

I
upper slope

TIME- STRATIGRAPHICAL
ENVIRONMENT

SUBDIVISION

.,pen

marine,

outer

shelf

OF DEPOSITiON

1iG'17'9 )qpuadd'l;1

Append ix 6.4.2.5

T-Z GRAPH
C'aio\.DC'.\cJ\L.

\.0(;,

"HE

l\ ~",)
~ \.0

o.
'\

The T-Z graph


depth of horizon to the

links the

a geologica~ 1 way

,
'\ .

....
~.

reflection

time.

'-I~

1t-\
%
to~ Y.i Q

..

l~"EC~ ~~)
'NfUIIo","18 T',,!S

The

information recorded

comes from
check in the

WELL SURVEYor shots

..

.~ /

borehole. SONIC LOG data to interpolate check shot~.

~a.aG

so.."

I.cG OM'A

..
0.
~
'

is used between

O~3~c,."t

"

..

0 0

1.0. .~ %.

~,!.
"

r ....

ALOQTf

WELL SURVEY
The well geophone to the time geophone is desired between lowered depth. the source

by

~~c.!. - O~'\t"T; ... ~\f\6U~


- "n\UH '"

wireline The travel and well

is measured.

---A, I .
~o (

~~

c:;eo"'OM~ ')

~e.u.

GEO~ONE ~

>

) ,."'"","",. "'He.

I'-

II) "It) N

0\ CQ C!I

EG. 743

7. Abbreviations

7.1 Abbr. Lithology

Appendix

7.1

ABBREVIATIONS

FOR LITHOLOGICAL

DESCRIPTIONS

NOTE
Abbreviations are presented in "informal-abbreviations" and after oblique (/) "computer-coding", e.g. for siltstone: Slst / ST. For a more detailed list of "computer-codingsll reference made to Appendix 7.2. Adhere
.

the

to the following Letters

rules: The same abbreviation is used for a noun and the corresponding adjective. However, nouns begin with a capital letter, adjectives and adverbs with a small letter. No distinction is made between of the singular and the plural the abbreviation of a noun. except where

Initial

of Abbreviations

. Singular

and Plural

. Fullstops

(.)

are not used after abbreviations confusion might otherwise arise.

. Comma

(,)

Used after a group of abbreviations to indicate the end of .the group Example sandstone, grey, hard, coarse grained, ferruginous: Sst, gy, hd, crs, fe Used to separate various types of rocks in one description, e.g. when the main rock is intercalated with other components Example shale, brown, soft, with sand layers, fine grained glauconitic: Sh, brn, soft; S Lyr, f, glc Used to indicate the range of a characteristic Example fine to medium, grey to dark grey:

Semi-colon (;)

Dash

(-)

f
.

m, gy

dk gy

Plus

(+)

Used as an abbreviation for "and" Example shale and sandstone: Sh + Sst


(t)

Plus-minus

Used as the abbreviation for "more or less" or "approximate" Example shale with approximately 25% sand: Sh t 25% S of an abbreviation is used to indicate emphasis

Underlining

Examples

very sandy: well bedded: well sorted:

s bd srt
or

Brackets

Used to indicate diminutive adjectives adverbs and indefinite colours Examples slightly sandy: (s) bluish grey: (bl) gy

~ ....... 10 It) N 0> \0


0

Appendix

7.1

page 2

For descriptions on drawings it is advisable to use symbols for sedimentary features/structures. fossils and carbonate particles. e.g. bioturbated benthonic foraminiferal pelletoidal Lime Packstone becomes: Pkst,~~~ (see Tapeworm. Appendix 3.2.1.2).

abundant agglomerate aggregate(-d) algae. algal alternation(-ing) ammonites amorphous

abd

Ag/. . A
Aggr, aggr/AG Alg, alg/AG Altrn, altrn

and
angular anhydrite (-ic) anthracite aphanitic approximate aragonite arenaceous argillaceous arkose (-ic) as above asphalt (-ic) assemblage associated basalt (-ic) basement bed (-ed) belemnites benthonic

Amm/AM amr &


ang/RI-R3 * Anhd, andh/AR Anthr/AT

aph/A apprx Arag/AR aren


arg/ A. .

calcisphere calcite (-ic) calcareous carbonaceous cast cavern (-ous) cement (-ed) chalk (-y) charophytes chert (-y) chitinozoa chlorite (-ic) chocolate clastic

Calsph/OG Calc. calctc/CA calc/LS carb/CO Cs/X.. * Cav, cav/CV Cmt. cmt/C5 * Chk, chk/CK Char /CR Cht, cht/CT Chtz/CZ Chlor, chlor/CI

elay
claystone

Ark, ark/AK a.a


Asph, asph/AP

Assem assoc
Ba, ba/EXBS

cluster coal c.oarse coating (-ed)

cobble
colour (-ed) common compact complex

Bm
Bd, bd/B. BI-B9

Blm/BE
bent/.

choc clast Cl/CL Clst/MS Clus c/CO crs/C Coat. coat/..CO Cbl/CB Col, col corn cpct Cx/CX

.B
. .

bimodal
bioelast (-ic) biotite bioturbation(-ed) birdseye bitumen (-inous) bivalves

bimod/ B Bel. bel/SF

Biot/BI
Biotur, biotur/CB Bdeye/BY Bit. bit/BT

black blocky blue bored boulder


boundstone brachiopods brackish breccia (-ted) brittle brown bryozoa buff
burrow (-ed)

Biv/LB blk/BK blky/BQ blu/BL bor/BO Bld/BO Bdst/B Brac/BP


brack/WB Brc, brc/BR

brit brn/BW Bry/BZ buf/BF


Bur, bur/BD

Cone, conc/CC* concretion (-ary) conglomerate (-ic) Cgl. cgl/CG connected Vugs Vug c/Y conodonts Con/CD consolidated cons/CI-C3-C7* contamination (-ed) Contam. contam content Cont contorted bedding cont-bd/BS convolute bedding Conv-bd/BV Coq, coqid coquina (-aid) corals Cor/CR crinkled bedding crink-bd/BZ crinoids Crin/CS cross x cross-bedded x-bd/BX cross-laminated x-lam cross-stratified x-strat crypto crypto/CY crystal (-line) Xl, xln/XA, X cutting Ctg

See Appendices

3.2.1.2

and 7.2

G) Q) \0
f\:J 01 CD

Ut " \0

Appendix

7.1

page 3

dark debris dense


detrital

diabase
diagenesis (-etic) diatoms dinoflagellates disconnected vugs ditto dolomite (-ic)

dk/DK Deb dns detr/SF Db/DYDB


Diagn, Dinfl/DF diagn

grainstone

granite
granule (-ar) grapes tone graptolites

gravel
gray, grey

Diat/DT

green
grey, gray greywacke gypsum (-iferous)

Vug diN " or do


Dol, dol/DM D..

Grst/G Gr/INGN Gran, gran/GR Gpst/PSAG Grap/GP Grv/GV gy/GE gn/GN gy/GE Gwke/GK
Gyp, gyp/GY

drusy
echinoids elongate embedded equivalent

dru Ecb/EM
elong/02*

hackly hard
-heterogenous homogenous horizontal hornblende hydrocarbon igneous rock,

euxinic
evaporite (-itic) extremely extrusive rock, extrusive

embd Equiv eux/E


Evap, evap/EV

extr
Ex, ex/EX

hkl hd hetrog hom horz Hrnb/HO Hyde/CD


Ig, ig/IG

faecal pellet Pel,fae/PTFE FIt, flt fault (-ed) feature Feat feet Ft feldspar (-athic) Fld, fld/FD Fen, fen fenestra (-al) ferruginous fe/FG fine (-ly) f/F fish remains Fish Rem/FH fissile fis/FI flaggy flg/FY flake, flaky Flk, flk/FK fluorescence (-ent) Fluor, fluor foot Ft foraminifera Foram, foram/FF* foraminiferal formation Fm/FM Foss, foss/F* fossil (-iferous) Frac, frac/FC fracture (-d) Frag, frag fragment (-al) frequent freq friable fri/C3 frosted fros fusulinids Fus gabbro gastropods generally glauconite (-itic) gneiss (-ic) graded bedding grain (-ed)
v "CD tt) C\J 0>
ItJ (!)

igneous illite impermeable including increasing indistinct interbedded


intercalation (-ed) intercrystalline intergranular interlaminated interparticle interval intraclast (-ic) intracrystalline intragranular intraparticle intraskeletal intrusive rock, intrusive invertebrate ironstone irregular (-ly)
joint (-ed, -ing) (-itic)

Ill/IL imperm/K1 incl incr indst intbd


Intcal, intcal/IC intxln/IX intgran/IG intrlam intpar/IP
intst

intersticies(-itial)Intst,

Intv Intclas, intclas/IT Intraxln/VX intragran/VR intrapar intraskel/VS In, in/IN Invrtb Fest /FG irr or irg
Jt, jt/J Kao, kao/KL

Gb/INGA Gast/GR gen


Glc, glc/GC Gns gns/GS grd-bd/BG Grn, grn

kaolinite

lacustrine lamellibranchs lamina (-tions, -ated)

lac/L Lbr/LB Lam, lam/LM

* See Appendices

3.2.1.2

and 7.2

Appendix

7.1

page 4 large
laterite (-itic) layer (-ed) leached lens, lenticular

light
lignite (-itic) limestone limonite (-itic) lineation (-ed) lithic lithoclast lithology (-ic)

lrg Lat, lat/LA Lyr, lyr/LY leach/LE Len, len/LN It/LT Lig, lig/LG

nannoplankton nodules (-ar) no sample numerous occasional occurrence olistolith (-ic) olistostrome (-ic) *

Nanplk/NP Nod, nod/ND

NS num occ Occ


Olisth, olisth/OH Olistr, olistr/OL olv/OI Olv/OV Onk, onk/OK Onkd, onk/OK 00, oo/OD 001, 001 orng/ON
org/O. .

Lst/LS
Lmn, Lin, Imn/FG lin/Y..

lit/LC
Lcl, lcl/LC Lith, lith

olive olivine
onkoid 2 mm)(-al) onkoid (>2 mm)(-al) ooid (-al) oolite (-itic) orange organic orthoclase ostracod overgrowth crystalline packstone

local loose lower


marble marl (-y) marls tone

loc lse/C1 low


Marb/MMMB Mrl, mrl/MR Mrlst/AL
ma r /WM

Orth/OR Ost/OC ovgth xln

marine massive
material

matrix maximum medium member


metamorphic mica (-ceous) microcrystalline microfossil
( -iferous)

mass Mat Mtrx max


m or med./MD
tfbr /MB

papery
part (-ly) particle patch (-y) pebble (-y) pelagic pelecypods pellet, faecal pelletoid (-al) permeability(-able) phosphate (-atic) phyllite, phyllitic

Pkst/P pap/PR
Part, part/PA Par, par Pch, pch Pbl, pbl/PB

metam/MM Mic, mic/MC

pelg/PE
Pelcp/LB Pel, fae / PTFE Peld, peld/PT Perm, perm/K1-K7* Phos, phos/PP Phy, phy/MMPY

micrxln
Micrfoss, micrfoss

micrograined micropelletoid (-al) microplankton micropore (-ous) microspar microstylolite

micrgrn
Micrpeld?micrpeld/

PM Mpl/MP
Micrpor, micrpor

pink
pisoid (-al) pitted plagioclase plant remains porcelaneous porosity, porous possible (-ly) predominant (-ly) preserved

pk/PK
Piso, piso/PD

Micrspr
Micrstyl

middle
mineral (-ized) moderate molluscs montmorillonite mottled mudcrack mudstone (carbonates) mudstone (siliciclastics)" muscovite (-ic)

Mid Min, min mod/MD Hol/ML Mtmo/MO mtl/VH


Mdcrk/XM

pit Plag/PG PIt Rem/PL

porcel
Por, 0, por/P1-P7

primary

Mdst/M
.Mdst/MS purple Musc, musc/MV

probable (-ly) pseudopseudooid (-tic) Psoo, psoo/PS pu or purp/PU pyrite(-tized,-itic)Pyr, pyr/PY pyroxene Px/PX

poss predom pres prim prob ps

See Appendices 3.2.1.2

and 7.2

G) en ID N 01 CD ..... en -

Appendix

7.1

page 5

quartz (-ose) quartzite (-ic) radiolaria rauhwacke recemented recov~ry (-ered) recrystallized

Qz, qz/QZ Qzt, qzt/QT

Rad/RA
Rauhw/RH

recmt
Rec, rec

red remains
replaced (-ment) residue (-ual) ripple (-ed) rockfragment (lithoc1ast) round (-ed) rudist salt /-y) same as above

rex red/RE Rem repl, Repl/RP Res, res/RS Rpl, rpl/Z..* Lc1/LC *
rnd, rnd/R4-R6 Rud/RD
Salt, salt / SL

stain (-ed), -ing) stalactitic strata (-Hied) streak (-ed, -y) striae (-ted) stringer stromatolite(-itic) stromatoporoid strongly structure stylolite (-itic) sub angular sublithic subrounded sucrosic sulphur, sulphurous superficial oolite

Stn, stn stal Strat, strat Strk, strk/SR Stri, stri Strgr Stromlt, stromlt Strom/SM indicated by underlining Struc Styl, styl/SE (ang) / R3

(lit)
(rnd) / R4

suc/S
Su, su/SU 00, spf, spf-oo/OD

(-ic)
supergroup

a.a.

surface
texture (-d)

Supgr Srf/SF
Tex, tex

sample
sand (-y) sandstone saturation (-ated) scattered schist (-ose) sediment (-ary) selenite shale (-ly) siderite (-itic) sidewall sample silica (-iceous) silt (-y) siltstone similar skeletal slate (-y) slickenside (-d) slightly slump (-ed) small smooth solution, soluble sorted (-ing) sparry speckled spherical spicule (-ar) splintery sporomorphs spotted (-y)

Spl
S, s / SA

Sst/SS
Sat, sat

scat
Sch, sch/MMSC Sed, sed Sel/GX Sh, shisH Sid, sid/SD SWS/SWS Sil, sil/SI Slt, slt/SJ Sltst/ST

thick thin tillite


tintinnids

tongue trace
translucent transparent trilobites tuff (-aceous) turbidite (-ic) type (-ical) unbedded unconformity(-ably) unconsolidated unimodal

tk tn Tilt/TI Tin/TT Tng/TN Tr trnsl trnsp Tril/TL


Tf, tf/TF Turb, turb/TU Typ, typ

sim skel Sl, sl Sks, sks/SK add brackets (..) Slump, slump/.S sml sm vadose Sol, sol/SX srt, Srt/Sl-S9 * spar speck
sph/05 * Spic, spic/SP

unbd
Unconf,unconf

uncons
unimod/..U

upper
Vad, vad variations (able) variegated varve (-d) vein (-ing, -ed) veinlet vertebrates vertical

u or up

Var,

var

or vr

vgt/VM
Varv, varv/VV Vn, vn/VN

splin Spr/PN
sptd, spty

Vnlet Vrtb/VE vert


v or underlining/V

very violet

vi

*
N $!
.....

See Appendices 3.2.1.2

and

7.2

co I<) N en q)
c:>

Appendix

7.1

page 6 visible
(-Hied) vitreous volcanic rock, volcanic vug (-gy)

vis vit Vo, vo/V


Vug, vug/VG *

wackestone weak weathered wedge-shaped

Wkst/W wk
weath/WT

Wdg/WD
indicated wh/~,m Wd, si/SW by underlining/repeat code

well white
wood, yellow silicified (ish)

yel/YE

* See Appendices 3.2.1.2

and 7.2
1,;') en <D I\) a> '" "Ci '"

.2

egeo Codes

REGEO

CODES

FOR LImOLOGICAL

DESCRIPTIONS OM DA DL DO OY
Ev CE Ex

Appendix

7.2

(July

1975)

(see also Appendix


AND QUALIFIERS IGOOI bl-66.71-7b ANO G002 27-3l)

3.2.1.22)

page 1
-DOLO~ITE -DOLO~IT~-ANHYORITE MIXED -OOLO~ITE-LIMESTnNE/OOLOMITIC LIMESTONE -OO~ES (LITHC QUALIFIER ONLY) -DyKE -EVAPORITF/EVAPOAITIC -EVAPORITES-CARBONATES -EXTRUSIVE ROCK

MAIN LITHOTYPE

MAIN LITHOTYPEIGDOI 61-62.71-72 AND GDOl 27-28 TwO QUA~IFIERSIGDOI 63-66.73-76 AND GD02 29-)l CAUTION'

MIxED

-----.--------------------------NOUNILIMESTONE/CLAY)-MAIN LITHO
-ADJECTIVE

UNLESS

SPECIFIED

OTHERWISE.SAME

CODE FORI

TYPE (CALCAREOUS/ARGILLACEOUS)-QUALIFIER

EXAMPLEISSlSST

- CALCAREOUS.SILTY SANDSTONE LSPT8 PELLETAL lST C EV-CARBONATE/EVAPORITIC DMCT-nOLOMITf/CHERTY DLAH-OOL.-LIMESTONE/ANHYDRITIC SHBT-SHALE/BITUMINOUS BTSR. BITUMINOUS STREAKS CTBA.RANDED CHERT LSCTBA8LIMESTONE/CHERT BANDS

FE FD FZ FG FT FI FY FK FF F FC

-FAECAL PELLETS -FELDSPAR -FERRICRETE -FERRUGINOUS/IRONSTONE/LIMONITE -FETID -FISSILE -FLAGGY BEDDED -FLAKY -FORAMINIFERAL -FOSSILIFEROUS -FRACTURED

AN -ANDESITE AM -ANHYORITF. AHCW-ANHYD.CONCRETIONS-COMPRESSEDICHICKEN-WIRE) DA -ANHYDRITE-DOLOMITE MIxED AR -ARAGONITE CL -ARGILLACEOUS/CLAY Al -ARGILLACEOUS LIMESTONE AS -ARGILLACEOUS SAND/SANDSTONE AK -ARKOSt. AE -ASBESTOS AP -ASPHALT BA -BANDS BS -BASALTIMAIN LITHOTYPE ONLY) SF -BIOCLASTIC/DETRITAL/SHELL FRAGMENTS BI -BIOTITE ILITHO QUALIFIER ONLY) CB -BIOTURBATED/CHURNED By -BIRDSEYE STRUCTURE/KEYSTONE VUGS BI -BISCHOFITE IMAIN LITHOTYPE ONLY) BT -BITU~lNOUS BK -BLACK BQ -BLOCKY Bl -BLUE BO -BORINGS SFBO-80RED SURFACE IIN RtMARKS ONLY) BN -BOUOINAGF RH -BOX WORK STRUCTUR/RAUHWACKE
8R -BRECC Bioi -BROWN lr, -BROWN IA COAL/lIGNITE

G6 -GABBRO GC -GLAUCON lTE GS -GNEISS GO -GOLD GN -GRANITE (M6IN PSAG-GRAPESTONE GV -GRAVEL GN -GREE~ GE -GREY GK -GREYWACKE GU -"GRUMELEUXM GY -GyPSUM ,NA HM HE HO HT

LITHOTYPE

ONL Y)

-~ALITE/ROCK SALT -~EAVY MINERALS -~E~ATITE -HOANBLENnE -~ORSE-TAJLING


-IG~EOUS AOCK -ILLITE -INTERCALATIO~S -INTRACLAST -INTRUSIvr AOCK -IRONSTONF/LI~ONITE/FEARUGINOUS-JOINTS IN GE~ERAL

IG IL IC IT IN FG
J

.JM -JOINTS-HORIZONTAL .JI/ -~OINTS-VrATICAL

KA KL By KI

-KAINITE -K60UNnF
-KEYSTONE VUGS/BIADSEYE -KIESERITf: STRUCTURE

8F BU LS CA CS CO CE OC C CN

-BUFF -BURROwS
-CALCAREOUS/LIMESTONE
-CALC

LM
LA

-LAMINATIO~S
-LA TEA IfE

IfE

-CALICHE -CARBONACEOuS/COAL -CARBONATf'S-EvAPORITES MIXED -CARRONAT~S-OHGANIC ROCKS MIXED -CARAONATFS UhSPECIFIED -CARNALLITE C.V -CAvERNOUS C'I' -CHALCEOO"'Y CK -CHALK CT -CHERT CI -CHLORITE CB -CHURhED/~IOTURBATED CL -CLAY/ ARGILLACEOUS MS -CLAYSTONE/MUDSTONE CO -COAL/CARBONACEOUS CO -COATED -USE ONLY wITH FOSSILS EG.FLCO

LE -LEAC~ED LN -LEhSES/LF~TICULAA LT -LIGHT LG -LIGNITE/RROW~ COAL LS -LIMESTONF/CALCAAEOUS 6L -LI~ESTONr.ARGILLACEOUS DL -LI~ESTONE-DOLOMITE MIXED/DOL.LIMEST. SC -LI~ESTONF.SANDY (MAIN LITHO.ONLY) LM -UNCONSOL.LIM~(CALC.OOZE) IMAIN LITH.ONLY) FG -LI~ONITE/IAO~STONE/FERAUGINOUS LC -LITMIC/LTTHOCLAST/ROCKFRAGMENT LCAG-LITHOCLASTS.AGGREGATED
KM
Mlli

-MAGNESIU~.POTASSIUM
-MAI'4GANESE

SALTS

IN GENERAL

CC CG Cu FE CY XA

-COlloCRET-IONS -COI'4GLOMERATE

-COPPER -COPROLITES/FAECAL PELLETS -CRYPTO -CRYSTAL

"II)
I') N C1> CD C)

'"

OK -DARK SF -DETRITAL/BIOCLASTIC/SHELL FRAGMENTS DR -DUBASF 01 -D lOR ITE DO -DOLERITE (~AIN LITHOTYPE ONLY)

MA OL MM MC MG M MD MO VM MS MV HK NO NO

-~ARL -MASS FLOw -"ETA/IIOAPHIC -MICA/MICACEOUS -MIIIoERAL GRAI~S

-~IXED

ROCK

IUNSPECIFIED)

-/IIODERATE/MEDIUM COLOUR -MOhTMORILLONITE -~OTTLED/VARIEGATED -"UDSTONE/CLAYSTONE


-~USCOV ITE

-NICKEL
-~OOULES/NODULAR -~OT OBSERVEDIINFO.IHCOMPLETE/ABSENT

OM -OLISTOLITH/SLIDF/ROCKFALL OL -OLISTOSTROME I MASS FLOW 01 -OLIVE OV -OLlV INE OK -ONKOIDAL 00 -OOID/OOLITIC/OOIDAL OZ -OOZE OA -OPAL OFt -OPHIOLITf/OPHIOLITE SUITE OT -OPHITIC ON -ORANGE 0 -ORGANIC ROCKS UNSPECIFIED OC -ORGANIC ROCK.CARBONATfSIMIXEOI OS -ORGANIC ROCK-SILICICLASTICSIMIXEDI SEOS.IMIXEOI 01'4 -ORGANIC ROCK-UNSPECIFYEO OR -ORTHOCLASE PR PA PE PT PM PR PK PO PP PG P PH PC KM Dv PU PY YC PX -PAPERY -PARTLY.LOCALLY -PEAT -PELLETAL/PELLETOIO/PELLETSIltI6-2 1'41'41 -MICROPELLETOIOI<I/16 MMI -PERIDOTITE IMAIN LITHOTYPE ONLY) -PINK pI SOlO -PISOLITIC. -PHOSPHATf/PHOSPHATIC -PLAGIOCLASE -PLUTONIC -POLYHALITE -PORPHYR IT IC -POTASSIUM.MAGNESIUM SALTS IN GENERAL -PULL-APART STRUCTURES -PURPLE -PYR ITE/PYR I TIC -PYROCLASTIC ROCK IN GENERAL -PYROXENE

WT -IIEATHll-Il:.n WD -IIEDGE-SHAPED WM -wHITE YE -YELLOw -ZEOLITES.

LAYFJ:1S

Appendix page 2

7.2

ZE

ZEOL I TIC

BEDDINGI

BI -NO APPARENT BEDDING/MASSIVE B3 -SLIGHTLY IPOORLY) BEDDED B5 -FAIRLY WELL BEDDED/BEDDED B7 -wELL BEDDED B9 -VERY wELL BEDDED NOTE I MASSIVE-SLIGHTLY BEDDED-B2 BB BC BD BM B.J BH BY

-MILIMETRE BEDDED 1<1 CM.I -CENTIMfTRE BEDDED 11-10 CM.I


-DECIMETRE BEDDED 110-100 -METRE BEDDED 1100 CM.I
-TMIN

CH.)

BEDDED

ex
BG BS SED.STRUCTURESIXF XG XL XP XS xC XM XI XN XO XR XX XT YF YP YR YL yQ YS

-VARIABLY BEDDED -CONVOLUTE BEDDING -CROSS-BEDDED -GRADED BEDDING -SLUMPED.CONTORTED -FLUTE -LOAD -PROD CASTS
12

BEDDING MM.WIDE) CASTS

-GROOVE CASTS

CASTS CASTS/BOUNCE

-STRIATION CASTS 1<2 MM.WIDEI


-GEOPETAL FABRIC/FLOORED CAVITIES -MUDCRACKS -PEBBLE IMBRICATION -PSEUDO-NODULED/PMACOIOS -PULL-OVER/FLAME STRUCTURE -RAIN.GAS.AIR OR SPRING PITS -SALT MOULDS OR HOPPERS -TEpEE STRuCTURE -FOSSILISHELL)LINEATION -PARTING LINEATION -PEBBLE LINEATION -PLANT FRAGMENTILIGNITEILINEATION -SAND GRAIN LINEATION -STREAMING LINEATION

az aT

-QUART!.
-QUARTZITF LINEATIONS I

RA -RADIOLARITE RH -RAUHWACK~/BOXWORK STRUCTURE RE -REO RB -REO BEDS RP -REPLACEMENT RS -RESIDUAL Rw -REIIORI<EU RL -RHYOLITE LC -ROCK FRAGMENT/LYTHOCLAST/LITHIC OH -ROCK'ALL/SLIDE/OLISTOLITH RT -ROOT BED/ROOT TUBES PS -ROUNDED PART.ICLES PSAG-ROUNOED.AGGREGATED PTLS.IGRAPESTONEI SL SA SS AS SC SC SN SH SF SO SI S OS SZ ST SY SK OH SX SR SQ SE SU SY TV TA TI TF UM UR
>.I
"II:) t<) N 0> CD C>

ROUNDINGI

RI RZ R3 R4 R5 R&
01 02 03 04 05 06

-VERY ANGULAR <0.1 -ANGULAR 0.2 -C;U8ANGULAR 0.3 -SUBROUNDED 0.. -ROUNDED 0.6 -WELL ROUNDED >0.85 -VERY ELONGATED <0.5 -FLONGATED 0.5-0.6 -SLIGHTLY ELONGATED 0.6-0.7 -ALHOST SPHERICAL 0.7-0.8 -5PHERICAL 0.8-0.9 -VERY SPHERICAL >0.9

-SALT IN r,ENERAL -SAI'4D/SANnY -SANDSTONE -SAI'4D/SANnSTO~E.ARGILLACEOuS -SAI'4DY LIMESTONE IHAIN LITHOTYPE ONLY) -SCOUR-FILL STRUCTURES -SERPENTINE -SHALE -SHELL FRAGMENTS/BIOCLASTIC/DETRITAL -SIDERITE/SIDERITIC -SILlCEOUS -SILICICLASTIC RnCI< UNSPECIFIED -SILICICLASTICS-ORGANIC ROCKS MIXED -SILCRETE, -SILT/SILTSTOI'fE -SLABBY -SLl CKENS IDES -SLIDE/ROCKFALL/nLISTOLITH -SOLUTION -STREAKS -STROMOTACTIS -STYLOLYTI:S -SULPHUR -SYLVINITf' -TACHYDRITE -TAR -T ILLITE

SPHER IC ITY I

SORTIhG I

NOTE I
PERMEAB III TY I

-VERY POORLY SORTED/UNSORTED -POORLY SORTED -MODERATELY WELL SDRTED -WELL SORTED -VERY wELL SORTED POORLY-FAIRLYWELL SORTED. 54

SI

S3 S5 S7 S9 KI
K3

-YHPERMEABLE/TIGHT -SLIGHTLY IPOORLY) PERMEABLE

NOTE I
POROS I TY I

K5 -MODERATELY PERMEABLE/pERMEABLE K7 -HIGHLY PERMEABLE SLIGHTLY PERMEABLE-PERMEABLE. K.

PI P3 PS P1
Cl C3 C5 C1

-NON-POROUS/DENSE -SLIGHTLY IPOORLY) POROUS -FAIRLY POROUS/POROUS -HIGHLY POROUS -UNCONSOLIDATED/LOOSE -SLIGHTLY CONSOLIDATED/FRIABLE -CONSOLIDATED/CEMENTED/HARD -STRONGLY CEHENTED/HIGHLY CONSOL. IE.G. QUARTZITIC SANDSTONE)

CONSOLIDATIONI ICEMENTATION)

-Tun
-ULTRAMAfTC
-UJ:1ANIuM

ROCK

IN GEI'4ERAL

Viol VV VN VA V YG

-VARIEGATfO/MDTTlED -VAF/VES -VEIN -VOLCANIC AGGLOMERATE -VOLCANYC J:10CI< UNSplCIFIEU/VQLCANIC -VUGS

Appendix

7.2

page 3
FOSSILS (CAN RE RECORDED AS LITHO QUALIFIERS USING THE FnLLOWING CODES OR IN GD REMARKS USING CODE OR FULL NAME)

AC -ACRITARCHESCMICROPLANKTON) AG -ALGAE AM -AM"'ON ITES BE BP BZ


-BELEMN ITE -BRACHIOPODA -BRYOZOA

CP -CALCISPHERES CH -CHARA CZ -CH IT I NOZOA CD -CONODONTS CR -CORALS CS -CRINOIDS DT OF EM FE FH FF FL FS FB FP F


-DIArOMAE -DINOFLAGELLATES -ECHINODERMA -FAECAL PELLETS/COPROLITES -FISH REMAINS -FORAMINIFERA/FORAMINIFERAL -FORAMINI'ERA LARGE -FORAMS SMALL -FORAMS BENTHONIC -FORAMS PLANKTONIC -FOSSILS IN GENERAL/FOSSILIFEROUS (MICROPLANKTON)

TEXTURE
-------

(GDOI 67-68,77-7A

AND GDOZ 33-34)

DUNHAM CLASSIFICATION

B G P W M A X S

-LIME-BOUNDSTONE -LIME-GRAINSTONE -LIME-PACKSTONE


-LI"'E-WACKESTONE

-LIME-MUDSTONE -APMANITIC -FINE CRYSTALLINE -COARSE CRYSTALLINE/SUCROSIC/SACCHAROIDAL

GR -GASTROPODS GP -GRAPTOLITES LB MP MI ML NC NP OG OC
PL PN RA RT RD SF Sw SP SG SM TR TL -LAMELLI8RANCHS/PELECYPODS -MICROPLANKTON -MILIOLIDAE -MOLLUSCA -NANNOCONUS -NANNOPLANKTON -OLlGOSTEGINA -OSTRACODA
-PLANT RE"'AINS -POLLEN/SPORES/SPOROMORPHS

WENhORTH

CLASSIFICATION

IN GENERAL

BO -BOULDERS CB -COBBLES PR -PEBBLES GR -GRANUL.E R -vERY COARSE (ARENITE) C -COARSE (ARENITE) MC -MEDIUM TO COARSE (ARENITE)
"I "IF

-MEDIUM (ARENITE) -MEDIUM Tn FINE (ARENITE)


-FINE (A~F.NITE) -VERY FIN~ (ARENITE) -SILT(20-63 MU) -PELITE20 MU)

F V ST PI

-RADIOLARIA -ROOT BEDS/ROOT -RUD IST

TUBES

-SHELL FRAGMENTS/SKELETAL/BIOCLASTIC -SILICIFIED WOOD -SPICULES -SPONGlS -STROMATOPOROID / STROMATOLITE / ALGAL MAT -TRACK,TRAIL,TRACE FOSSIL -TRILOBITES -VERTEBRATES -VERTEBRATE TRACKS

VE VT

(see also Appendix

3.2.1.22)

STANDARD ABRREVIATIONS FOR DESCRIPTION OF LITHOLOGICAL REAL.M -----------------------------------------------------------IF NO DETAILED INFORMATION IS AVAILABL.E,ONL.Y THE REAL.M OR PROVINCE CAN BE DESCRIBED (GOOI 61-64) SEDIMENTARY ,

-FILL I~ R

REALM
LEAVE

(REGIONAL. INFORMATION)
GD01 CC 64 BL.ANK

IN GoOl CC 63

GDOI CC 61-62 5 C E
"I

MAIN

LITHOLOGIC

PROvINCES,

-SILICICLASTIC -CARBONATE -EVAPORITE -MIXED (ALL THREE'

S,C.E,

ARE

PRESENT)

w
.......

-VOLCANIC

co
C\J '" 0> CD (!)

EXAMPLE

------Sv -MAINLY
VE
/01 V

SILICICLASTICS/ SOME VOLCANICS -VOLCANIC~/ SOME EVAPORITES. -"'IXED PRnvINCE/ SOME VOLCANICS

.13 Abbr. Wellsite

Appendix

7.3

ABBREVIATIONS

COMMONLY

USED AT THE WELL-SITE

AH AHBDF AMSL Ann API bbls/d B/D BDF BHA BHP

Along Along Above

hole hole mean below derrick floor

sealevel

Annulus
American Barrels Barrels Below Petroleum per day per day derrick floor Institute

Bottom hole assembly Bottom hole pressure Bottom hole temperature Barrels of liquid per day Below mean sealevel
Explosive Bottom Blowout Bridge Barrels Barrels service (back-off)

BHT BLPD BMSL BO


BOC BOP BP BOPD BPHL BPV BRT BS BSCF/D BS+W BV BWPD CB
eft (cuft)

of cement preventor plug of oil per day per hour losses

Backpressure Below Bottom Billion Bottom

valve

rotary table sediment standard solids cubic feet per day

plus water

Bulk volume Barrels Core Cubic of water per day

barrel feet gas

CG CI CIBHP Circ CITHP CHP


I"'<0 "CD N '" (g 0> (!)

Connection Cose(d) Closed in

in bottom

hole

pressure

Circulate Closed Casing in tubing head head pressure

pressure

Appendix

7.3

page 2

CL CON Compl CP CPI CPS Csg CBHP CBHT CST CSU CT CTHP CTHT
cuft (eft)

Control Clean

line oil mud completion

Complete(d), Casing Computer Counts

pressure processed per second interpretation

Casing
Closed Closed Core Cyber Cbeck Closed Closed Cubic Drill Deptb in bottom in bottom taker unit (Computerised logging unit) bole bole pressure temperature

sample service trip

in tubing in tubing feet collar

bead bead

pressure temperature

DC DD DF DFE DO DOE DOT DP DS DST ETA

determination floor floor elevation in a deviated well

Drilling Derrick Drop

off section

Department Department Drill Down Drill pipe stream

of energy of transport

stemtest time of arrival

Expected

F F & BU
FBHP FBHT FL FLP

Flowing
Flowing Flowing Flowing Fluid and closed bole bole in pressure pressure temperature build up survey

bottom bottom loss

Flowline Free

pressure indicator tester temperature tubing tubing bead bead pressure temperature

FPI FT
FT FTHP
FTHT FWL

point

Formation Formation Flowing Flowing

Free water

level
G\ 01 \0 N UI a> ...... m a>

Appendix

7.3

page 3

GIP GL
GLR GOC

Gas in place Gaslift Gas liquid ratio

Gas oil contract Gas oil ratio Gross rock volume survey temperature contact logging survey

GaR GRV GS
GTS GWC HEL HHP HUD HWC ID IPR JB KOP LCM LNG LOT LPG MAASP MD MMSCT/D MSCF/D

Gradient Gradient Gas water Hostile Hydraulic Hold

environment horsepower

up depth

(indicates contact diameter

true/apparent

bottom)

Hydrocarbon Internal Inflow Junk Kick Lost

water

(inside) performance

relationship

basket off point circulation material gas

Liquefield Leak-off Liquefield Maximum Measured Million Thousand Mean Master

natural test petroleum

gas surface pressure

allowable depth metric metric

annular

standard standard

cubic

feet per day

"

"

"

"

MSL MV
MWD NB NGL
OB~f

sea level valve while drilling

Measurement

New bit
Natural gas liquids

Oil based Outside Oil down Oil

mud

aD ODT

diameter to

OIP OWC PBA

in place contact and abandoned

Oil water Plugged

back

Q) ! ...... 10 ,.., N 0\ U) (!)

Appendix

7.3

page 4

POR P~S PPM PSI PT PTWC PV PVT RFT RIR RKB ROP ROS RPM RRB RT RT RTTS SBM SDT SP SRD SS SW SWS STOUP

Pull(ed)

out of hole of success

Probability Parts Pounds

per million per square test type well completion inch

Production Permanent

Pore volume Pressure Repeat Run volume formation temperature tester

in hole kelly bushing

Rotary Rate

of penetration oil saturation per minute

Residual Rotations Re-run Rotary Round

bit table trip test tool string

Retrievable Single buoy

mooring dipmeter tool

Sedimentary Shot point Seismic

reference

datum

Sub sea
Sea water Sidewall Stock samples oil initially in place

tank

TBA TBG
TC TD

To be advised

Tubing
Time Total Trip constant depth gas head head pressure spool

TG TRP TRS TOe


TOF TOL TV

Tubing Tubing

Top of cement Top of fish Top True of liner vertical

CO) en 10 N eM CI) ~ 0 ""

Appendix

7.3

page 5

TVBDF TVD

True

vertical

below depth pressure

derrick

floor

True vertical True vapour

TVP TVSS UMe VLV WBM we


we WH

True vertical Underwater

sub sea centre

manifold

Valve
Water Water Well Well Well based cut completion head head pressure or water blowout formation loss prevent or test mud

WHP WL WLBOP WLFT wo woe


woo WaR

Wire line Wireline Wireline Workover Waiting Waiting Water/oil Waiting Well

on cement on orders ratio on weather tool (seismic reference service)


.

WOW WST

shoot

WUT

Water up to

(!)

...... CD I') N 0\ (0

;::

.4 Abbr. Wire-Line Logs

Appendix

7.4

ABBREVIATIONS

OF WIRELINE

LOGS/TOOLS/PROGRAMS

Abbrev.

Name
Borehole Geometry Log Borehole Geometry Tool Bore Hole Compensated sonic Bore Hole Compensated Amplitude log Bore Hole Tele Viewer Bond Index Quick Look (= 'CYBERBOND', see below) Borehole compensated Sonic Log - Gammaray - Caliper Caliper log Cement Bond Log Casing Collar Locator Continuous Dip Meter Continuous DiRectional survey - Borehole Cement Evaluation Tool Continuous Flow Meter Computed Gamma Ray CHlorine Log Computer program for dip computation Circumferential Micro Sonic Circumferential Microsonic Tool Compensated Neutron Log Compensated Neutron

BGL BGT BHC BHCA BHTV BIQL


BSL (GC)

C or CAL

CBL CCL CDM CDR-BG CET CFM CGR CHL CLUSTER CMS CMT CNL
CNT(CNTA,CNTD)

Geometry

(Deviation)

CNT-G CO
CORIBAND

Dual porosity CNL

CPI CST CSU


CYBER CYBER
CYBERD

service BOND
IF

CYBERLOOK CYBERSCAN

Carbon-Oxygen log (water saturation logging tool) Interpretation process for complex lithology Computer Processed Interpretation Core Sample Taker (sidewall coring) Cyber Service Unit (computerised logging unit) unit = Computerised logging unit Well-site cement bond evaluation program (=BIQL) Well-site dip evaluation program Well-site formation evaluation program (=DWQL) Well-site evaluation program using TDT data Diamond Core Slicer Depth Derived BHC Caliper logging Dual Induction Focused Log Dual Induction Log (medium + deep) Dual Induction Spherically focused Dual Latero Log (shallow + deep) DiRectional survey DIP evaluation program using SHDT data Dual Water Quick Look (=CYBERLOOK, see Temperature logging Electric Log Well-site moved oil evaluation program Epithermal Neutron (or sidewall neutron Electromagnetic Propagation Tool Electrical Survey Electromagnetic Thickness Tool

DCS DDBHC DHG DIFL


DIL(DIT.DITB)

DIS
DLL(DLT,DST)

DR DUALDIF DWQL DWT EL EMOP EN EPT ES ETT


!:
......

above)

porosity

log)

CZ) I<)

N !B C)

Appendix

7.4

page 2

Abbrev.
FACIOLOG

Name
Interpretation (process for determination Formation Analysis Log (Flow Analyis Log) Formation Density (Log) Compensated Focused Dip Meter Fracture Identification Log Formation Interval Tester Continuous FLow meter Formation Multi Tester Free Point Indicator Formation Testing (Tool) Gamma Ray log
-

of electrofacies)

FAL
FDC (FDL)

FDM FIL FIT FL FMT


FPI (FPIT)

FT(T)

G or GR GASL GCL GCT GEODIP GLOGRAM GEOBAL GMA GNT GR(L) GRN GST GTT

GAS Log
Gamma ray Casing collar Locator
Guidance Continuous Tool (Gyro-Deviation) Computer program for detailed dip computation Computer program for generating synthetic seismograms Interpretation process for formation evaluation Gradio Manometer survey Gamma ray Neutron Tool Gamma Ray (Log) Gamma Ray Neutron log Gamma ray Spectroscopy Tool Gamma ray Through Tubing High resolution digital Dipmeter Tool Hostile Environment Logging High Resolution Temperature survey Induction Induction Induction Induction Electrical Log Electrical Survey Gamma Ray log Log

HDT HEL HRT IEL IES IGR IL ILD ILM


ISF (SFL)

" "
Induction

"Deep "Medium
Spherically Focused Log

LAT
LDL (LDT) (=LDL)

LDQL
LDT

LL LLD LLE LLGN LLS LN LSS(L) LSSL-WT

Lateral (resistivity tool) Litho Density Log Litho-Density Quick Look (well site Litho Density Tool Latero Log Latero Log Deep Experimental Latero Log Latero Log - Gamma ray - Neutron Latero Log Shallow Long Normal (resistivity tool) Long Spaced Sonic Log

computer

generated

product)

"

"

"

"+

Wave Train

t; en ID N .... 0> ....... .... ""

Appendix
page 3

7.4

Abbrev. HCT (CPI) MCT MCT MECHPRO MFS ML MLL HSFL MUST N NDL NGS (NGT) NL NLL NML NPHI NTT OPR PAL PCT PFL (PFM) PHOT PL PLT PML PPS PSR PST QL RABR RFQL RFT RHOB RIG, RTGLOB RMT RTGLOB
SARABAND

Name Machine computation Tool (?) (Computer processed Synergetic Log Systems Mechanical Coring Tool Computer program for determining the mechanical of the formation Multiple Fluid Sample Hicro Log or combinable Micro Log Hicro Latero Log Micro Spherically Focused Log Multiple Usage Shut-off Tool Neutron Neutron Natural Neutron Neutron Nuclear Neutron Neutron Orienting log Decay Log Gamma ray Spectroscopy Log Lifetime Log Magnetism Log PHI (neutron porosity) Through Tubing PerfoRating service interpretation)

properties

Pipe Analysis Log Production Combination Tool Packer FLow meter PHOTon log. Proximity Log Production Logging Tool Proximity Micro Log Production Packer Service Packer Setting Record Production Sample Taker Quick Look (well site computer generated products)

Radio Active Bullet Record Repeat Formation tester Quick look (well generated product) Repeat Formation Tester RHO Bulk (bulk density) Computer programs of the GLOBAL type Reservoir Management Log see RIG above

site

computer-

,\-

SCE SDT SFL (ISF) SHC SHDT SIT SL SLS SN SNP SP

Computer program for shaly sandstone lithologies Tubbing Cutter service Sonic Digital Tool induction Spherically Focussed Log Caliper logging Stratigraphic High resolution Dipmeter Tool Stuck-point Indicator Tool Sonic Log Long Spacing Sonic Short Normal Sidewall Neutron Porosity Spontaneous Potential

It) N 01 II) <!)

CD

Appendix

7.4

page 4

Abbrev. SQL SSP 8T SWS T(-GR)

Name
Seismic Quick Look (well site Static Spontaneous Potential Sidewall Coring Sidewall Samples computer-generated product)

TDQL
TDT TS TTC ULSEL VD(L) VSP WF WLFT WSS WST

Temperature (- Gamma Ray log) Thermal Decay Quick Look (=CYBERSCAN, see Thermal Decay Time Tool Temperature Survey Through Tubing Caliper Ultra Variable Vertical Log Spacing Density Seismic Electrical Log Profile Log

above)

Wave Form. Density Wireline Formation Test Well Seismic Service Well Shoot Tool (Well Seismic

Tool)

(seismic

reference

service)

CO) 01 ID I\) 01 CJI "~ UI

8. WL-Log

esponse Charts

G69238/f76

Ba.ck - up Scala a

50

\qo

150

200

Lt J.J
I I

MDI\)TMORILLD~JTE
I

~~CHlORITE
I I

I
POTASH PLRG.IOJLAJI:
I

Q RoGAN IC ~HALE

~kOALlN

ITE FL4)PAR~ arko~ m.")

245
WlICR
.

f lIMSrONE

DOLOMITE

GL~UC.D)J

"E

I I SAHD5TON

. ROC)('SA~ T I I I . . AHHYDRIH/GYP5UM I I
I

RJLY~RLI"E I

180-235 22 S-2&, 24 0-21:.7

I I I c. RNALLlTE-

KAI~\T~-I

l
!

K/5ERITE

-rrr
RI2!apon~ Char~

LAN&&INITE ,2.7
I

I I

5 - 342

5Yi

VIlE 955 n

GAMMA RAY LOG


~o-9'lu" hoLts
U.K. (E & p)
:t> "D "D ro ::J a. x co

Va}ul1s apply ~o pur4 rocks/mil14lro.Jsonly dnd in un~a.sd

Ad4p~d

from (:h4r~5 in usa wj~h Shd

G69238/1~7

USIZ

SchlurTlbergH char~!I ~ocorwcZr~Gtn

nza.dJn95 ~o 5NP Lime5rone poro5i~y

&ac k - up Sea ItZ


I
I

LIME STONE

)Q

I I
!
I

I
I

!
I I

- ti)':(.~

I
j I

DOLOMITE

35

30

2S

20

15

JO

r
I
~

I
5.AND5TONE.
If

I
i
I

!
35 30
?~ -j

20
. i'

15
I

10

LCLAY
I

r~TT I
,i
I

I
I

SHALE

?
I

! I
I I I

CHLORITE
KAOLlI

It iT E CLAY
I I

ANHYDRITE

I
62 CARNALL!TE

IN li II E
I

CLA

MO~TMORLl.ONITE Ct.8
I

I
&.\9 GYPSUM

I
I

z.4 B/SCHOFlif '

I I!!
~
I

~i
l

1
Tf

riS

F..R~

KA!NITE

i
I

j
'

.
il

6fAUf DNITE A
I

I I I I
I

.
1

I I HAll TE
I I

A SYLVITE:
l:1 LAN6BEI N JTt.

I I I

~L YHA~ITt
I I I

I
I

ill
I

COAL
I

ANTHRACITE
48

.
I

I
I

RClsponse

Cht1r~ SN P NEUTRON

LOG

G:t CNL as\..IE~It)

Caiibrahzd to read Limasrone porosi ~y


'Nata.,. Filled hol~~ - No mud ,aka
Values apply ro punz ro,ks/mjnlr41~
tJ.

only and J'n ur1Casd m-9(UJ9~ holQS


AdQP~4"d fro-.I chdrh " us. with Shell U.k'. [E & P)

~ -0 -0 (L)
:;, 0x'

radio achvQ minczrnls

! rv

G69238/178

1.95' I.g SAND

2.95' 2.0 2.1 2.2


15

1.5

1.6

1.7

1.8

2.3. J J~
I

2.4

2.5

2.6 5 1%

2.7

2..

2.9

,.
I

1
~ I
I

20

I!

D
10

I~ LL!H
I

3.0 P bulk fqr/c.c.)

LIMESTONE

30

2"S

20

15

or.. 95

I. 00

FRESH WATER I. 07 ~'W /75 ODD ppm I. 14 s'W ~50 000 ppm

DOLOMITE

35

30

25

20 H

15

10

r ~

Q~

I
I

1.3S

I I I I CAR/'IALLITE I I

~ 81SCHOFlTE

~-I

_n

~YLVITf

I
I

.f-- --- , QDlkSAlT


.A!HITE

I
HI 6YPSUM

J(1!IJt ITt I I
POL Y10IALI T E.

LAN6&Elfi'TE

I I

[
CLAY

'COAL
I

.ISULPHUR

j QUAIHZ
CLAYSTONE /5 IALE

. I, NHYOQIT<

RasponSQ Char}.

C. FORMATION

DENSITY

LOG
hoJs
J> <:J <:J ro ::J Q. x CD
(jJ

. - --I.hu~
L-

den'ji/'y
minaralo:.

Sal~ wC1~armud sys~am Valu~s a.pply ~o punz ro,ks/m;n~rC1l~ only t1J1d in unC4ud ~_~a

apparanr dan!li~)'

~ radIo a.crjv~

kIaphzd from chads in USl wi~h Sh~\1 U.K. eEl P)

Você também pode gostar